Coupé and Shooting Brake Owner's Manual

CLS Coupé and Shooting Brake Owner's Manual

Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only Symbols In this manual, you will find the following symbols:

G WARNING Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. X This symbol designates an instruction you must follow. X Several consecutive symbols indicate an instruction with several steps. (Y page) This symbol tells you where you can find further information on a topic. YY This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page. Display This text indicates a message on the multifunction/COMAND display. Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected by copyright © 2005 The FreeType Project http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved. Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz The technical documentation team at Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with motoring. your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a left- hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual RService Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep printed copies of the documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. i You can get to know the important features of your vehicle in the interactive Own- er's Manual on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung

2185843581Z102 É2185843581Z102eËÍ

Contents 3

Index ...... 4 At a glance ...... 29

Introduction ...... 22 Safety ...... 41

Opening and closing ...... 79

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 101

Lights and windscreen wipers ...... 119

Climate control ...... 135

Driving and parking ...... 155

On-board computer and displays .... 241

Stowing and features ...... 305

Maintenance and care ...... 335

Breakdown assistance ...... 351

Wheels and tyres ...... 371

Technical data ...... 401 4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 204 Adaptive Highbeam Assist 12 V socket Display message ...... 274 see Socket Function/notes ...... 126 4ETS AdBlue® see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Display message ...... 277 tion System) Filling capacity ...... 410 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Important safety notes ...... 409 ...... 207 drive) Service indicator ...... 341 4MATIC off-road system ...... 207 AdBlue® service indicator ...... 341 Additives (engine oil) ...... 411 A Airbag ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- Display message ...... 266 tor lamp ...... 57 Function/notes ...... 67 Airbags Important safety notes ...... 67 Front airbag (driver, front Warning lamp ...... 295 passenger) ...... 46 Activating/deactivating air-recir- Important safety guidelines ...... 44 culation mode ...... 146 Kneebag ...... 46 Activating/deactivating cooling Pelvis airbag ...... 48 with air dehumidification ...... 141 Sidebag ...... 47 Active Blind Spot Assist Triggering ...... 43 Activating/deactivating (on- Windowbag ...... 48 board computer) ...... 254 Air-conditioning system Display message ...... 281 see Climate control Function/notes ...... 228 Air filter (white display message) .... 277 Towing a trailer ...... 230 AIR FLOW ...... 142 Active Driving Assistance package . 228 AIRMATIC Active Lane Keeping Assist Display message ...... 278 Activating/deactivating (on- Function/notes ...... 203 board computer) ...... 254 Air vents Display message ...... 280 Glove compartment ...... 153 Function/notes ...... 231 Important safety notes ...... 152 Towing a trailer ...... 233 Rear ...... 153 Active light function ...... 125 Setting ...... 152 Active multicontour seat Setting the centre air vents ...... 153 Adjusting (on the seat) ...... 107 Setting the side air vents ...... 153 Active Park Assist Ambient lighting Display message ...... 281 Setting the brightness (on-board Active Parking Assist computer) ...... 257 Detecting parking spaces ...... 212 Setting the colour (on-board com- Function/notes ...... 211 puter) ...... 257 Important safety notes ...... 211 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus- Parking ...... 213 pension ...... 205 Towing a trailer ...... 214 Anti-glare film ...... 333 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 72 Aquaplaning ...... 185 Adaptive brake lamps ...... 69 Ashtray ...... 322 Index 5

Assistance display (on-board com- Manual drive program (vehicles puter) ...... 253 with Sports package AMG) ...... 173 Assistance menu (on-board com- Overview ...... 165 puter) ...... 252 Problem (fault) ...... 175 ASSYST PLUS Program selector button ...... 169 Displaying a service message ...... 340 Pulling away ...... 160 Hiding a service message ...... 340 Selector lever ...... 166 Notes ...... 340 Shift ranges ...... 172 Resetting the service interval dis- Starting the engine ...... 159 play ...... 340 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 170 Service message ...... 340 Trailer towing ...... 168 Special service requirements ...... 341 Transmission position display ...... 166 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Transmission position display Activating/deactivating ...... 75 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 166 Function ...... 75 Transmission positions ...... 168 Interior motion sensor ...... 76 Automatic transmission emer- Switching off the alarm ...... 75 gency running mode ...... 175 Tow-away protection ...... 75 Auxiliary heating ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ...... 148 Activating/deactivating ...... 254 Activating/deactivating (on the Display message ...... 278 centre console) ...... 148 Function/notes ...... 219 Display message ...... 289 AUTO lights Important safety notes ...... 147 Display message ...... 274 Problem (display message) ...... 152 see Lights Remote control ...... 149 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ Setting ...... 259 stop function) ...... 162 Setting the departure time ...... 150 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Auxiliary ventilation start/stop function) ...... 161 Activating/deactivating ...... 148 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 121 Activating/deactivating (on the Automatic transmission centre console) ...... 148 Accelerator pedal position ...... 168 Problem (display message) ...... 152 Automatic drive program ...... 170 Remote control ...... 149 Changing gear ...... 168 Axle load, permissible (trailer tow- DIRECT SELECT lever ...... 166 ing) ...... 417 Display message ...... 287 Drive program display ...... 166 B Driving tips ...... 168 Bag hook ...... 312 Emergency running mode ...... 175 Ball coupling Engaging drive position ...... 167 Folding in ...... 237 Engaging neutral ...... 167 Folding out ...... 236 Engaging reverse gear ...... 167 BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 67 Engaging the park position ...... 167 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Kickdown ...... 168 PLUS) ...... 68 Manual drive program ...... 171 Manual drive program (AMG vehicles) ...... 173 6 Index

Battery (key) BAS PLUS ...... 68 Checking ...... 83 Brake fluid (notes) ...... 411 Important safety notes ...... 83 Display message ...... 266 Replacing ...... 83 Driving tips ...... 183 Battery (vehicle) High-performance brake system .... 184 Charging ...... 361 Important safety notes ...... 183 Display message ...... 276 Parking brake ...... 181 Important safety notes ...... 359 Warning lamp ...... 294 Jump starting ...... 363 Breakdown Belt force limiter see Flat tyre Activation ...... 54 see Towing away Function ...... 54 Bulbs Belt tensioner see Changing bulbs Activation ...... 43 Function ...... 54 C Blind Spot Assist Calling up a fault Activating/deactivating ...... 254 see Display messages Display message ...... 281 Care Notes/function ...... 224 Automatic car wash ...... 342 Trailer towing ...... 226 Carpets ...... 348 see Active Blind Spot Assist Display ...... 346 BlueTEC (AdBlue®) ...... 409 ® Exhaust pipe ...... 346 Bluetooth SAP V3 telephone mod- Exterior lighting ...... 345 ule Gear or selector lever ...... 347 see Separate operating instructions High-pressure cleaner ...... 343 Bonnet Interior ...... 346 Closing ...... 337 Matt paintwork ...... 344 Display message ...... 288 Night View Assist Plus ...... 347 Important safety notes ...... 336 Notes ...... 341 Opening ...... 336 Paint ...... 343 Boot Plastic trim ...... 347 Emergency release ...... 93 Reversing camera ...... 346 Boot lid Roof lining ...... 348 Display message ...... 288 Seat belt ...... 348 Opening dimensions ...... 413 Seat cover ...... 348 Boot load (maximum) ...... 413 Sensors ...... 345 Bottle holders ...... 320 Steering wheel ...... 347 Box (boot) ...... 315 Trim pieces ...... 347 Brake fluid Washing by hand ...... 343 Display message ...... 268 Wheels ...... 344 Notes ...... 411 Windows ...... 344 Brake lamps Wiper blades ...... 345 Adaptive ...... 69 Wooden load compartment floor ... 349 Display message ...... 272 Wooden trim ...... 347 Brakes Car wash (care) ...... 342 ABS ...... 67 CD player/CD changer(on-board BAS ...... 67 computer) ...... 250 Index 7

Central locking Problems with cooling with air Automatic locking (on-board com- dehumidification ...... 142 puter) ...... 258 Problem with the rear window Locking/unlocking (key) ...... 81 heating ...... 146 Centre console Rear control panel ...... 139 Lower section ...... 37 Setting the air distribution ...... 143 Lower section (AMG vehicles) ...... 38 Setting the airflow ...... 144 Upper section ...... 36 Setting the air vents ...... 152 Changing bulbs Setting the climate mode (AIR Important safety notes ...... 129 FLOW) ...... 142 Overview of bulb types ...... 130 Setting the temperature ...... 143 Reversing lamps ...... 130 Setting the temperature, Child-proof locks THERMATIC ...... 143 Important safety notes ...... 65 Setting the temperature, Rear doors ...... 66 THERMOTRONIC ...... 143 Children Switching air-recirculation mode In the vehicle ...... 55 on/off ...... 146 Restraint systems ...... 55 Switching on/off ...... 140 Child seat Switching residual heat on/off ...... 147 Automatic recognition ...... 57 Switching the rear window heat- ISOFIX ...... 58 ing on/off ...... 145 On the front-passenger seat ...... 56 Switching the ZONE function on/ Problem (malfunction) ...... 65 off ...... 144 Recommendations ...... 62 THERMATIC automatic climate Suitable positions ...... 61 control (2-zone) ...... 137 Top Tether ...... 59 THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) auto- Cigarette lighter ...... 323 matic climate control ...... 139 Cleaning Coat hooks ...... 312 Mirror turn signal ...... 345 Cockpit Trailer tow hitch ...... 346 Overview ...... 30 Climate control see Instrument cluster Auxiliary heating/ventilation ...... 147 Collapsible emergency spare Controlling automatically ...... 142 wheel Convenience opening/closing see Emergency spare wheel (air-recirculation mode) ...... 146 COMAND display Cooling with air dehumidification .. 141 Cleaning ...... 346 Demisting the windows ...... 145 COMAND Online Demisting the windscreen ...... 144 see separate operating instructions Important safety notes ...... 136 Combination switch ...... 123 Indicator lamp ...... 142 Consumption statistics (on-board Information about using computer) ...... 246 THERMATIC automatic climate Convenience box ...... 315 control ...... 137 Convenience closing feature ...... 95 Information on using Convenience opening/closing (air- THERMOTRONIC automatic cli- recirculation mode) ...... 146 mate control ...... 140 Convenience opening feature ...... 95 Overview of systems ...... 136 8 Index

Coolant (engine) Diesel ...... 408 Checking the level ...... 339 Digital speedometer ...... 247 Display message ...... 275 Dipped-beam headlamps Important safety notes ...... 411 Display message ...... 271 Temperature (on-board computer) . 261 Setting for driving abroad (sym- Temperature gauge ...... 244 metrical) ...... 120 Warning lamp ...... 301 Setting for driving on the right/ Cooling left ...... 256 see Climate control Switching on/off ...... 121 Copyright ...... 27 DIRECT SELECT lever Cornering light function see Automatic transmission Display message ...... 271 Display message Function/notes ...... 125 ASSYST PLUS ...... 340 Crash-responsive emergency light- General information ...... 265 ing ...... 129 Hiding (on-board computer) ...... 265 Cruise control KEYLESS-GO ...... 290 Activation conditions ...... 187 Display messages Cruise control lever ...... 187 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 265 Deactivating ...... 189 Driving systems ...... 278 Display message ...... 284 Engine ...... 275 Driving system ...... 186 Key ...... 290 Important safety notes ...... 186 Lights ...... 271 LIM indicator lamp ...... 187 Safety systems ...... 266 Selecting ...... 187 Tyres ...... 285 Setting a speed ...... 188 Vehicle ...... 287 Storing and maintaining current Distance warning signal (warning speed ...... 187 lamp) ...... 303 Cup holder DISTRONIC PLUS Centre console ...... 319 Activating ...... 194 Important safety notes ...... 319 Activation conditions ...... 194 Rear centre console ...... 320 Deactivating ...... 199 Rear compartment ...... 320 Display message ...... 282 Displays in the multifunction dis- D play ...... 198 Function/notes ...... 192 Data Important safety notes ...... 192 see Technical data Selecting ...... 194 Daytime driving lights Setting the specified minimum Display message ...... 273 distance ...... 197 Function/notes ...... 121 Warning lamp ...... 303 Switching on/off (on-board com- Door puter) ...... 256 Automatic locking (on-board com- ...... 24 Declarations of conformity puter) ...... 258 Delayed switch-off Automatic locking (switch) ...... 88 Exterior lighting (on-board com- Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 81 puter) ...... 257 Control panel ...... 40 Interior lighting ...... 258 Display message ...... 288 Diagnostics connection ...... 25 Emergency locking ...... 88 Index 9

Emergency unlocking ...... 88 Blind Spot Assist ...... 224 Important safety notes ...... 86 Cruise control ...... 186 Opening (from the inside) ...... 87 Display message ...... 278 Drive program Distronic Plus ...... 192 Automatic ...... 170 HOLD function ...... 201 Display ...... 166 Lane Keeping Assist ...... 226 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 166 Lane package ...... 224 Manual ...... 171 Night View Assist Plus ...... 221 Manual (AMG vehicles) ...... 173 PARKTRONIC ...... 207 Manual (vehicles with Sports RACE START (AMG vehicles) ...... 202 package AMG) ...... 173 Reversing camera ...... 214 Drive program selector ...... 170 Speed Limit Assist ...... 220 Driver's door SPEEDTRONIC ...... 189 see Door Driving tips Drive system AMG ceramic brakes ...... 184 Active Blind Spot Assist ...... 228 Aquaplaning ...... 185 Driving abroad Automatic transmission ...... 168 Service24h ...... 341 Brakes ...... 183 Symmetrical dipped beam ...... 120 Downhill gradient ...... 183 Driving on flooded roads ...... 185 Driving abroad ...... 120 Driving safety system Driving in winter ...... 185 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Driving on flooded roads ...... 185 PLUS) ...... 68 Driving on wet roads ...... 185 Electronic Brake-force Distribu- General ...... 182 tion ...... 72 Icy road surfaces ...... 185 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Limited braking efficiency on sal- gram) ...... 69 ted roads ...... 184 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction New brake pads/linings ...... 184 System) ...... 70 Running-in tips ...... 156 Important safety guidelines ...... 67 Snow chains ...... 375 Driving safety systems Symmetrical dipped beam ...... 120 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...... 67 Towing a trailer ...... 235 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 72 Wet road surface ...... 184 Adaptive brake lamps ...... 69 DVD audio BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 67 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 250 Overview ...... 66 DVD video PRE-SAFE® Brake ...... 73 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 250 Driving system Active Lane Keeping Assist ...... 231 E Active Parking Assist ...... 211 EASY-ENTRY feature Driving systems Activating/deactivating ...... 260 Active Driving Assistance pack- Function/notes ...... 113 age ...... 228 EASY-EXIT feature AIRMATIC ...... 203 Crash-responsive ...... 114 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus- Function/notes ...... 113 pension ...... 205 Switching on/off ...... 260 ATTENTION ASSIST ...... 219 EASY-PACK convenience box ...... 315 10 Index

EASY-PACK load-securing kit Starting the engine with the key .... 159 Components and storage ...... 316 Starting with KEYLESS GO ...... 159 Inserting the brackets into the Stopping ...... 181 loading rail ...... 316 Tow-starting (vehicle) ...... 368 EASY-PACK luggage compartment Warning lamp (engine diagnos- management system ...... 316 tics) ...... 300 EBD (electronic brake force distri- Engine electronics bution) Notes ...... 402 Display message ...... 268 Problem (fault) ...... 164 Function/notes ...... 72 Engine oil ECO display Additives ...... 411 Function/notes ...... 182 Checking the oil level ...... 337 On-board computer ...... 247 Checking the oil level using the ECO start/stop function dipstick ...... 338 Automatic engine switch-off ...... 161 Display message ...... 276 Deactivating/activating ...... 162 Filling capacity ...... 410 General information ...... 161 Notes about oil grades ...... 410 Important safety notes ...... 160 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 337 Introduction ...... 160 Temperature (on-board computer) . 261 Electromagnetic compatibility Topping up ...... 338 Declaration of conformity ...... 25 Viscosity ...... 411 Emergency key Environmental protection Unlocking the driver's door ...... 88 Returning an end-of-life vehicle ...... 22 Emergency key element ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Function/notes ...... 82 gram) Locking vehicle ...... 88 AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 262 Emergency release Deactivating/activating (AMG Driver's door ...... 88 vehicles) ...... 70 Fuel filler flap ...... 177 Deactivating/activating (except Emergency spare wheel AMG vehicles) ...... 253 Important safety notes ...... 396 Deactivating/activating (notes; Inflating the collapsible spare except AMG vehicles) ...... 70 wheel ...... 398 Display message ...... 266 Points to remember ...... 396 ETS/4ETS ...... 70 Removing ...... 397 Function/notes ...... 69 Storage location ...... 397 Important safety guidelines ...... 69 Stowing ...... 398 Trailer stabilisation ...... 72 Technical data ...... 400 Warning lamp ...... 297 Emergency unlocking ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Tailgate ...... 93 tem) ...... 70 Vehicle ...... 88 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- Engine tions) ...... 346 Display message ...... 275 Exterior lighting ECO start/stop function ...... 160 Settings options ...... 120 Engine number ...... 405 see Lights Jump-starting ...... 363 Exterior mirrors Running irregularly ...... 164 Adjusting ...... 114 Starting problems ...... 164 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ...... 116 Index 11

Folding in/out (automatically) ...... 115 Notes for AMG vehicles ...... 407 Folding in/out (electrically) ...... 115 Problem (malfunction) ...... 179 Folding in when locking (on-board Quality (diesel) ...... 408 computer) ...... 261 Refuelling ...... 175 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 115 Tank content/reserve fuel ...... 406 Parking position ...... 116 Fuel filler flap Resetting ...... 115 Emergency release ...... 177 Storing settings (memory func- Opening/closing ...... 176 tion) ...... 117 Fuel filter (white display message) . 277 Fuel level F Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...... 247 Fault message Gauge ...... 32, 243 see Display messages Fuel reserve Filler cap see Fuel see Fuel filler flap Fuel tank Fire extinguisher ...... 353 Capacity ...... 406 First-aid kit ...... 352 Problem (malfunction) ...... 179 Fitting a wheel Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool Removing a wheel ...... 384 kit) ...... 353 Fitting wheels Fuses Fitting a wheel ...... 385 Allocation chart ...... 368 Lowering the vehicle ...... 385 Before changing ...... 368 Raising the vehicle ...... 383 Fuse box in the boot ...... 369 Securing the vehicle against roll- Fuse box in the engine compart- ing away ...... 382 ment ...... 369 Flat tyre Fuse box in the luggage compart- MOExtended tyres ...... 355 ment ...... 370 Preparing the vehicle ...... 354 Important safety notes ...... 368 TIREFIT kit ...... 356 Floormat ...... 332 G Foglamps (extended range) ...... 126 Frequencies Garage door opener Garage door opener ...... 329 Clearing the memory ...... 329 Mobile phone ...... 402 Frequencies ...... 329 Two-way radio ...... 402 Important safety notes ...... 327 Front foglamps Opening/closing the garage door .. 329 Display message ...... 273 Programming (button in the rear- Fuel view mirror) ...... 327 Additives ...... 407 Gear indicator (on-board com- Consumption information ...... 408 puter) ...... 261 Consumption statistics ...... 246 Gearshift program Displaying the current consump- SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 262 tion ...... 247 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...... 23 Displaying the range ...... 247 Glove compartment ...... 307 Fuel gauge ...... 32, 243 Grade (petrol) ...... 406 Important safety notes ...... 405 12 Index

H Instrument cluster lighting ...... 255 Intelligent Light System Hazard warning lamps ...... 124 Activating/deactivating ...... 256 Headbag Display message ...... 273 Display message ...... 271 Overview ...... 125 Headlamp Setting the dipped-beam head- Cleaning system (function) ...... 125 lamps for driving on the right/left . 256 Cleaning system (notes) ...... 412 Interior lighting ...... 128 Headlamps Automatic control system ...... 128 Misting up ...... 127 Delayed switch-off (on-board Topping up the cleaning system .... 339 computer) ...... 258 see Automatic headlamp mode Emergency lighting ...... 129 Head restraints Manual control ...... 129 Adjusting ...... 104 Overview ...... 128 Adjusting (electrically) ...... 105 Reading lamp ...... 128 Adjusting (manually) ...... 105 Setting brightness for display/ Adjusting (rear) ...... 106 switches (on-board computer) ...... 255 Fitting/removing (rear) ...... 106 Setting the ambient lighting Luxury ...... 105 brightness (on-board computer) .... 257 Heating Setting the ambient lighting col- see Climate control our (on-board computer) ...... 257 High-pressure cleaners ...... 343 Interior motion sensor ...... 76 Hill start assist ...... 160 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 58 HOLD function Display message ...... 279 J Function/notes ...... 201 Jack I Storage location ...... 353 Using ...... 383 Ignition lock Jump starting (engine) ...... 363 see Key positions Immobiliser ...... 74 K In-car hotspot see Separate operating instructions Key Indicator and warning lamps Changing the battery ...... 83 Coolant ...... 301 Checking the battery ...... 83 DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 303 Convenience closing feature ...... 96 Engine diagnostics ...... 300 Convenience opening feature ...... 95 SPORT handling mode ...... 298 Display message ...... 290 Indicator lamps Door central locking/unlocking ...... 81 Display message ...... 272 Emergency key element ...... 82 see Warning and indicator lamps Important safety notes ...... 80 Insect protection on the radiator .... 337 Loss ...... 85 Instrument cluster Modifying the programming ...... 82 Overview ...... 32, 243 Positions (ignition lock) ...... 157 Settings ...... 255 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 34, 292 Index 13

Problem (malfunction) ...... 85 Setting brightness for display/ Starting the engine ...... 159 switches (on-board computer) ...... 255 KEYLESS-GO Setting the ambient lighting Convenience closing ...... 96 brightness (on-board computer) .... 257 Display message ...... 290 Setting the ambient lighting col- Locking ...... 81 our (on-board computer) ...... 257 Start/Stop button ...... 157 Side lamps ...... 122 Starting the engine ...... 159 Switching the daytime driving Unlocking ...... 81 lights on/off (on-board computer) . 256 Key positions Switching the exterior lighting Key ...... 157 delayed switch-off on/off (on- KEYLESS GO ...... 157 board computer) ...... 257 Kickdown Switching the surround lighting Driving tips ...... 168 on/off (on-board computer) ...... 257 Manual drive program ...... 174 Turn signals ...... 123 Kneebag ...... 46 see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting L Light sensor (display message) ...... 274 LIM indicator lamp Lamps Cruise control ...... 187 see Warning and indicator lamps DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 193 Lane Keeping Assist Variable SPEEDTRONIC ...... 190 Activating/deactivating ...... 254 Limiting the speed Display message ...... 280 see SPEEDTRONIC Function/information ...... 226 Loading guidelines ...... 306 ...... 224 Lane package Locking Lap time (RACETIMER) ...... 262 see Central locking ...... 311 Lashing eyelets Locking (doors) Licence plate lamp (display mes- Automatic ...... 88 sage) ...... 273 Emergency locking ...... 88 Lights From inside (central locking but- Activating/deactivating the Intel- ton) ...... 87 ligent Light System ...... 256 Locking centrally Activating/deactivating the inte- see Central locking rior lighting delayed switch-off ...... 258 Locking verification signal (on- Active light function ...... 125 board computer) ...... 258 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 121 Luggage compartment cover ...... 313 Cornering light function ...... 125 Luggage compartment enlarge- Dipped-beam headlamps ...... 121 ment ...... 310 Driving abroad ...... 120 Luggage compartment floor Foglamps (extended range) ...... 126 opening/closing ...... 318 Hazard warning lamps ...... 124 stowage well, under ...... 318 Headlamp flasher ...... 124 Luggage cover Light switch ...... 120 Removing and fitting ...... 313 Main-beam headlamps ...... 124 Luggage holder (EASY-PACK load- Motorway mode ...... 126 securing kit) ...... 316 Parking lamps ...... 123 Rear foglamp ...... 122 14 Index

Lumbar support Multifunction steering wheel Adjusting ...... 108 Operating the on-board computer . 244 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Overview ...... 35 port ...... 108 Luxury head restraint ...... 105 N Navigation M Menu (on-board computer) ...... 248 M+S tyres ...... 374 NECK-PRO head restraints Main-beam headlamps Operation ...... 49 Display message ...... 272 Resetting after being triggered ...... 49 Switching Adaptive Highbeam NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Assist on/off ...... 127 Operation ...... 49 Switching on/off ...... 124 Resetting after being triggered ...... 49 Massage function (PULSE) ...... 108 Night View Assist Plus Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. 344 Activating/deactivating ...... 222 Memory card (audio) ...... 250 Cleaning ...... 347 Memory function ...... 117 Function/notes ...... 221 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre Problem (fault) ...... 224 see Qualified specialist workshop Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 156 Message memory (on-board computer) ...... 265 O Messages Occupant safety see Display messages Children in the vehicle ...... 55 Mirror Important safety notes ...... 42 see Vanity mirror (in sun visor) Odometer ...... 246 Mirrors see Total distance recorder see Exterior mirrors see Trip meter see Rear-view mirror Oil Mobile phone see Engine oil Frequencies ...... 402 On-board computer Installation ...... 402 AMG menu ...... 261 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 251 Assistance menu ...... 252 Notes/placing in the bracket ...... 325 Audio menu ...... 249 Transmission output (maximum) .... 402 Convenience submenu ...... 260 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 82 Displaying a service message ...... 340 MOExtended tyres ...... 355 Display messages ...... 265 Motorway mode ...... 126 DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 198 MP3 Factory setting submenu ...... 261 Operating ...... 250 Heating submenu ...... 259 see Separate operating instructions Important safety notes ...... 242 Multicontour seat Instrument cluster submenu ...... 255 Adjusting (on the seat) ...... 107 Light submenu ...... 255 Multifunction display Menu overview ...... 246 Function/notes ...... 245 Message memory ...... 265 Permanent display ...... 255 Navigation menu ...... 248 Operating the TV ...... 250 Index 15

Operating video DVD ...... 250 Important safety notes ...... 207 Operation ...... 244 Problem (fault) ...... 211 RACETIMER ...... 262 Sensor range ...... 208 Service menu ...... 254 Trailer towing ...... 210 Settings menu ...... 255 Warning display ...... 209 Standard display ...... 246 PASS AIRBAG OFF Telephone menu ...... 251 see PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Trip menu ...... 246 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Vehicle submenu ...... 258 Indicator lamp ...... 57 Operating instructions Petrol ...... 406 Vehicle equipment ...... 23 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 347 Operating safety Power windows Declaration of conformity ...... 24 see Side windows Important safety note ...... 24 PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant Operating system safety system) see On-board computer Display message ...... 269 Outside temperature display ...... 244 Operation ...... 50 Overhead control panel ...... 39 PRE-SAFE® Brake Override feature Activating/deactivating ...... 253 Rear side windows ...... 66 Display message ...... 269 Function/notes ...... 73 P Warning lamp ...... 303 Paint code ...... 404 Product information ...... 22 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 343 Program selector button ...... 169 Panic alarm ...... 42 Protection of the environment Parking ...... 180 General notes ...... 22 Important safety notes ...... 180 Pulling away (automatic transmis- Parking brake ...... 181 sion) ...... 160 Position of exterior mirror, front- passenger side ...... 116 Q Reversing camera ...... 214 Qualified specialist workshop ...... 25 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid R Active Parking Assist ...... 211 see Exterior mirrors RACE START (AMG vehicles) ...... 202 see PARKTRONIC RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 262 Parking brake Radar sensor system Display message ...... 268 Activating/deactivating ...... 259 Notes/function ...... 181 Display message ...... 279 Warning lamp ...... 300 Radiator cover ...... 337 Parking lamps Radio Display message ...... 273 Selecting a station ...... 249 Switching on/off ...... 123 see separate operating instructions PARKTRONIC Radio-based vehicle components Deactivating/activating ...... 210 Declaration of conformity ...... 24 Driving system ...... 207 Rain closing feature (sliding sun- Function/notes ...... 207 roof) ...... 99 16 Index

Reading lamp ...... 128 Reversing camera Rear compartment Cleaning instructions ...... 346 Setting the air vents ...... 153 Function/notes ...... 214 Rear-compartment seat belt sta- Switching on/off ...... 215 tus indicator ...... 54 Reversing feature Rear foglamp Side windows ...... 94 Display message ...... 273 Sliding sunroof ...... 98 Switching on/off ...... 122 Reversing function Rear seat Boot lid/tailgate ...... 90 Display message ...... 289 Reversing lamp Rear seat (folding the backrest for- Changing bulbs ...... 130 wards/back) ...... 309 Reversing lamp (display message) .. 273 Rear Seat Entertainment System Roller sunblind see Separate operating instructions Rear window ...... 321 Rear-view mirror Roof carrier ...... 318 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ...... 116 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Dipping (manual) ...... 114 instructions) ...... 348 Rear window blind ...... 321 Roof load (maximum) ...... 413 Rear window heating Problem (fault) ...... 146 S Switching on/off ...... 145 Safety Rear window wiper Children in the vehicle ...... 55 Replacing the wiper blade ...... 133 Child restraint systems ...... 55 Switching on/off ...... 131 Safety net Refuelling Attaching ...... 314 Fuel gauge ...... 32, 243 Important safety information ...... 314 Important safety notes ...... 175 Seat Notes for AMG vehicles ...... 407 Adjusting the active multicontour Refuelling process ...... 176 seat ...... 107 see Fuel Adjusting the multicontour seat ..... 107 Remote control Folding the backrest (rear com- Auxiliary heating/ventilation ...... 149 partment) forwards/back ...... 310 Changing the batteries (auxiliary Massage function ...... 108 heating) ...... 150 Seat backrest display message ..... 289 Garage door opener ...... 327 Seat belt Programming (garage door Adjusting the driver's and front- opener) ...... 327 passenger seat belt ...... 52 Replacing the battery (auxiliary Adjusting the height ...... 52 heating remote control) ...... 150 Belt force limiter ...... 54 Reserve (fuel tank) Belt tensioner ...... 54 see Fuel Centre rear-compartment seat ...... 53 Reserve fuel Cleaning ...... 348 Display message ...... 277 Display message ...... 269 Warning lamp ...... 301 Fastening ...... 52 Residual heat (climate control) ...... 147 Important safety guidelines ...... 51 Rev counter ...... 244 Rear seat belt status indicator ...... 54 Reverse gear (selector lever) ...... 166 Releasing ...... 53 Index 17

Switching belt adjustment on/off Problem (malfunction) ...... 97 (on-board computer) ...... 260 resetting ...... 96 Warning lamp ...... 293 Sliding sunroof Warning lamp (function) ...... 53 Important safety information ...... 97 Seats Opening/closing ...... 98 Adjusting (electrically) ...... 104 Problem (malfunction) ...... 100 Adjusting lumbar support ...... 108 Rain closing feature ...... 99 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Resetting ...... 99 port ...... 108 Snow chains ...... 375 Adjusting the head restraint ...... 104 Socket Cleaning the cover ...... 348 Centre console ...... 324 Correct driver's seat position ...... 102 Luggage compartment ...... 325 Important safety notes ...... 103 Rear compartment ...... 325 Overview ...... 103 Under the armrest ...... 324 Seat heating problem ...... 110 Sockets Seat ventilation problem ...... 111 General notes ...... 324 Storing settings (memory func- Spare wheel tion) ...... 117 Storing ...... 398 Switching seat heating on/off ...... 108 Specialist workshop ...... 25 Switching the seat ventilation on/ Spectacles compartment ...... 307 off ...... 110 Speed, controlling Selector lever see Cruise control Cleaning ...... 347 Speed Limit Assist Sensors (cleaning instructions) ...... 345 Activating/deactivating the warn- Service menu (on-board computer) . 254 ing function ...... 253 Service products Displaying ...... 252 AdBlue® special additives ...... 409 Display message ...... 279 Brake fluid ...... 411 Display message in the multifunc- Coolant (engine) ...... 411 tion display ...... 221 Engine oil ...... 410 Important safety notes ...... 220 Fuel ...... 405 Speedometer Important safety notes ...... 405 Digital ...... 247 Washer fluid ...... 412 In the Instrument cluster ...... 32, 243 Settings Segments ...... 244 Factory (on-board computer) ...... 261 Selecting the unit of measure- On-board computer ...... 255 ment ...... 255 Setting the air distribution ...... 143 see Instrument cluster Setting the airflow ...... 144 SPEEDTRONIC SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 262 Deactivating variable ...... 191 Sidebag ...... 47 Display message ...... 283 Side lamps Function/notes ...... 189 Switching on/off ...... 122 Important safety notes ...... 189 Side windows LIM indicator lamp ...... 190 Convenience closing ...... 95 Permanent ...... 192 Convenience opening ...... 95 Selecting ...... 190 Important safety notes ...... 94 Storing the current speed ...... 190 Opening/closing ...... 94 Variable ...... 190 18 Index

SPORT handling mode Stowage well beneath the boot Activating/deactivating (AMG floor ...... 317 vehicles) ...... 70 Summer tyres ...... 374 Warning lamp ...... 298 Sun visor ...... 321 SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- Surround lighting (on-board com- tem) puter) ...... 257 Display message ...... 270 Suspension tuning Introduction ...... 43 AIRMATIC ...... 204 Warning lamp ...... 300 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus- Warning lamp (function) ...... 43 pension ...... 205 Start/stop function SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 262 see ECO start/stop function Switching off the alarm (ATA) ...... 75 Starting (engine) ...... 158 Steering (display message) ...... 290 T Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ...... 112 Tailgate Display message ...... 288 Adjusting (manually) ...... 111 Emergency unlocking ...... 93 Button overview ...... 35 Important safety notes ...... 89 Buttons (on-board computer) ...... 244 Limiting the opening angle ...... 93 Cleaning ...... 347 Opening/closing (automatically Gearshift paddles ...... 170 from inside) ...... 92 Important safety notes ...... 111 Opening/closing (automatically Steering wheel heating ...... 112 from outside) ...... 91 Storing settings (memory func- Opening/closing (from outside) ...... 90 tion) ...... 117 Opening dimensions ...... 413 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 170 Tail lamps Steering wheel heating Display message ...... 272 Problem (malfunction) ...... 113 Switching on/off ...... 112 Technical data Capacities ...... 405 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ...... 262 Emergency spare wheel ...... 400 Stowage areas ...... 306 Information ...... 402 Stowage compartment Trailer loads ...... 417 Spectacles compartment ...... 307 Tyres/wheels ...... 386 Stowage compartments Vehicle data ...... 413 Armrest (under) ...... 308 Telephone Centre console ...... 307 Accepting a call ...... 251 Centre console (rear compart- Display message ...... 290 ment) ...... 309 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 251 Cup holder ...... 319 Number from the phone book ...... 252 Glove compartment ...... 307 Redialling ...... 252 Important safety information ...... 306 Rejecting/ending a call ...... 251 Rear ...... 309 Telephone compartment ...... 308 Under driver's seat/front- Telescopic rod (Easy-Pack fix kit) .... 317 passenger seat ...... 308 Temperature Stowage net ...... 309 Coolant ...... 244 Stowage space Coolant (on-board computer) ...... 261 Stowage net ...... 309 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 261 Index 19

Outside temperature ...... 244 Mounting dimensions ...... 415 Setting (climate control) ...... 143 Parktronic ...... 210 TEMPOMAT Power supply ...... 238 Function/notes ...... 186 Shift range ...... 168 Theft-deterrent system Trailer loads ...... 417 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ...... 75 Transmission Immobiliser ...... 74 see Automatic transmission Through-loading feature ...... 309 Transmission position display ...... 166 Timing (RACETIMER) ...... 262 Transmission position display TIREFIT kit ...... 356 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 166 Top Tether ...... 59 Transporting the vehicle ...... 367 Total distance recorder ...... 246 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 347 Tow-away protection ...... 75 Trip computer (on-board com- Towing puter) ...... 246 Important safety notes ...... 365 Trip meter With the rear axle raised ...... 367 Calling up ...... 246 Towing a trailer Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 247 Active Blind Spot Assist ...... 230 Turn signals Active Lane Keeping Assist ...... 233 Switching on/off ...... 123 Active Parking Assist ...... 214 TV Axle load, permissible ...... 417 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 250 Bulb failure indicator for LED see Separate operating instructions lamps ...... 238 Two-way radio ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Frequencies ...... 402 gram) ...... 72 Installation ...... 402 Towing away Transmission output (maximum) .... 402 Fitting the towing eye ...... 366 Type identification plate Removing the towing eye ...... 367 see Vehicle identification plate With both axles on the ground ...... 367 Tyre pressure Tow-starting Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 378 Emergency engine starting ...... 368 Display message ...... 285 Important safety notes ...... 365 Not reached (TIREFIT) ...... 358 Trailer Reached (TIREFIT) ...... 358 Display message ...... 289 Recommended ...... 375 Trailer coupling Tyre pressure loss warning see Towing a trailer General notes ...... 377 Trailer towing Important safety notes ...... 377 7-pin connector ...... 239 Restarting ...... 377 Blind Spot Assist ...... 226 Tyre pressure monitor Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ...... 346 Checking the tyre pressure elec- Coupling up a trailer ...... 237 tronically ...... 379 Decoupling a trailer ...... 237 Function/notes ...... 378 Driving tips ...... 235 Restarting ...... 380 Folding in the ball coupling ...... 237 Warning lamp ...... 304 Folding out the ball coupling ...... 236 Warning message ...... 379 Important safety notes ...... 233 Tyres Lights display message ...... 271 Changing a wheel ...... 381 20 Index

Checking ...... 373 Vehicle emergency locking ...... 88 Direction of rotation ...... 381 Vehicle identification number Display message ...... 285 see VIN Important safety notes ...... 372 Vehicle identification plate ...... 404 MOExtended tyres ...... 374 Vehicle level Replacing ...... 381 AIRMATIC ...... 203 Service life ...... 373 Vehicle level (display message) ...... 278 Storing ...... 381 Vehicle tool kit ...... 353 Tyre size (data) ...... 386 Vehicle weights ...... 413 Tyre tread ...... 373 Video see Flat tyre Operating the DVD ...... 250 VIN ...... 404 U Unladen weight ...... 413 W Unlocking Warning and indicator lamps Emergency unlocking ...... 88 ABS ...... 295 From inside the vehicle (central Brakes ...... 294 unlocking button) ...... 87 Distance warning signal ...... 303 ESP® ...... 297 V ESP® OFF ...... 298 Vanity mirror (in sun visor) ...... 321 Fuel tank ...... 301 Variable SPEEDTRONIC LIM (cruise control) ...... 187 see SPEEDTRONIC LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) ...... 193 Vehicle LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ...... 190 Correct use ...... 26 Overview ...... 34, 292 Data acquisition ...... 26 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ...... 57 Display message ...... 287 Reserve fuel ...... 301 Electronics ...... 402 Seat belt ...... 293 Equipment ...... 23 SRS ...... 300 Implied warranty ...... 26 Tyre pressure monitor ...... 304 Individual settings ...... 255 Warning triangle ...... 352 Leaving parked up ...... 182 Washer fluid Locking (in an emergency) ...... 88 Display message ...... 290 Locking (key) ...... 81 Wheel bolt tightening torque ...... 385 Lowering ...... 385 Wheel chock ...... 382 Pulling away ...... 160 Wheels Raising ...... 383 Changing/replacing ...... 381 Registration ...... 25 Changing a wheel ...... 381 Securing from rolling away ...... 382 Checking ...... 373 Towing away ...... 365 Cleaning ...... 344 Transporting ...... 367 Cleaning (warning) ...... 382 Unlocking (in an emergency) ...... 88 Emergency spare wheel ...... 396 Unlocking (key) ...... 81 Fitting a new wheel ...... 385 Vehicle data ...... 413 Fitting a wheel ...... 382 Vehicle data ...... 413 Important safety notes ...... 372 Vehicle dimensions ...... 413 Removing a wheel ...... 384 Storing ...... 381 Index 21

Tightening torque ...... 385 Wheel size/tyre size ...... 386 Windowbag Operation ...... 48 Windows Cleaning ...... 344 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...... 144 Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Notes ...... 412 Topping up ...... 339 Windscreen wipers Problem (malfunction) ...... 134 Rear window wiper ...... 131 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 132 Switching on/off ...... 130 Winter operation Important safety notes ...... 374 Radiator cover ...... 337 Slippery road surfaces ...... 185 Snow chains ...... 375 Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ...... 258 M+S tyres ...... 374 Wiper blades Cleaning ...... 345 Important safety notes ...... 132 Replacing ...... 132 Replacing (on the rear window) ..... 133 Replacing (windscreen) ...... 132 Wooden load compartment floor (cleaning instructions) ...... 349 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) ...... 347

Z ZONE function Switching on/off ...... 144 22 Introduction

Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. General notes Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. H Environmental note Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption. Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- hensive environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resour- Returning an end-of-life vehicle ces which form the basis of our existence on EU countries only: this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and Mercedes-Benz will take back your old vehicle humanity into consideration. to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner in accordance with the Euro- You too can help to protect the environment pean Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Direc- by operating your vehicle in an environmen- tive. tally-responsible manner. There is a network of return points and dis- Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, assembly plants available. You can return transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on your vehicle to these plants free of charge. the following factors: This makes a valuable contribution to the Roperating conditions of your vehicle recycling process and the conservation of Ryour personal driving style resources. You can influence both factors. Therefore, For further information on recycling old vehi- please bear the following in mind: cles, recovery and the terms of the policy, Operating conditions: visit the Mercedes-Benz homepage. Ravoid short trips, as these increase fuel consumption. Product information Robserve the correct tyre pressure. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use vehicle. genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion Rremove the roof rack once you no longer parts and accessories that have been need it. approved for the type of vehicle. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con- to environmental protection. You should version parts and accessories that have been therefore adhere to the service intervals. specifically approved for your vehicle for their Rall maintenance work should be carried out reliability, safety and suitability. Despite at a qualified specialist workshop. ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Therefore, Personal driving style: Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehi- starting the engine. cles. This is also the case, even if they have Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle been independently or officially approved. is stationary. The use of non-approved parts could affect Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance your vehicle's operating safety. from the vehicle in front. Mercedes-Benz therefore recommends that Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, con- braking. version parts and accessories that have been approved for the type of vehicle. Introduction 23

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved con- Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories are available version parts and accessories that have been from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Here, specifically approved for your vehicle for their you will receive advice about permissible reliability, safety and suitability. Despite technical modifications, and the parts will be ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is professionally fitted. unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts have been independently or officially approved. H Environmental note In Germany, certain parts are only officially Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned approved for installation or modification if assemblies and parts which are of the same they comply with legal requirements. This quality as new parts. For these, the same war- also applies to some other countries. All gen- ranty applies as for new parts. uine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well may invalidate the vehicle's general operating as control units and sensors for these permit. restraint systems, may be installed in the This is the case: following areas of your vehicle: Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type Rdoors from that for which the vehicle's general Rdoor pillars operating permit was granted Rdoor sills Rif other road users could be endangered Rseats Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely Rdashboard affected Rinstrument cluster Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) ( page 404) and the engine num- Rcentre console Y ber (Y page 405) when ordering genuine Do not install accessories such as audio Mercedes-Benz parts. systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint sys- Owner's Manual tems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified Vehicle equipment specialist workshop. This Owner's Manual describes all models If you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as and all standard and optional equipment accessories relevant to safety which have not available for your vehicle at the time of pub- been approved by Mercedes, the operating lication of the Owner's Manual. Country-spe- safety of the vehicle could be jeopardised. cific differences are possible. Note that your This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel- vehicle may not be fitted with all features evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Only described. This is also the case for systems use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and the equipment on your vehicle may differ from accessories that have been specifically that in the descriptions and illustrations. approved for your vehicle.

Z 24 Introduction

The original purchase contract documenta- components carried out at a qualified special- tion for your vehicle contains a list of all of the ist workshop. systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: equipment and operation, please consult a Rthe vehicle makes contact with the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ground, e.g. on a high kerb or a loose The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are road surface important documents and should kept in the Ryou drive too quickly over an obstacle, vehicle. e.g. a kerb or a pothole Ra heavy object hits the underbody or chassis component Operating safety In these or similar situations, the vehicle Important safety notes body, the underbody, chassis components, wheels or tyres could be damaged even if G WARNING this is not visible. Components that have If you do not have the prescribed service/ been damaged in this way can unexpect- maintenance work or necessary repairs car- edly fail or no longer be able to assimilate ried out, this could result in malfunctions or the loads occurring in the event of an acci- system failures. There is a risk of an accident. dent. Always have the prescribed service/mainte- If the underbody panelling is damaged, nance work as well as necessary repairs car- flammable material, such as leaves, grass ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. or twigs, could collect between the underbody and underbody panelling. These G WARNING materials could ignite if they remain in con- If you switch off the ignition while driving, tact with hot components of the exhaust safety-relevant functions are only available system for an extended period. with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, Have the vehicle checked and repaired for example, the power steering and the brake immediately at a qualified specialist work- boosting effect. You will require considerably shop. If you become aware when continu- more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk ing the journey that driving safety has been of an accident. effected, stop as soon as possible in Do not switch off the ignition while driving. accordance with the traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist G WARNING workshop. Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could effect their function and/or the operation of other net- Declarations of conformity worked components. This could in particular Wireless vehicle components also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly any The following information applies to all com- more and/or jeopardise the operational ponents of the vehicle and the COMAND sys- safety of the vehicle. There is an increased tem which receive and/or transmit radio risk of an accident and injury. waves: Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as The components of this vehicle that receive electronic components or their software. and/or transmit radio waves are compliant Always have work on electrical and electronic with the basic requirements and all other rel- Introduction 25 evant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. requirements of the next emissions test dur- You can obtain further information from any ing the main inspection. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Electromagnetic compatibility Qualified specialist workshop The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehi- A qualified specialist workshop has the nec- cle components has been checked and certi- essary special skills, tools and qualifications fied according to the currently valid version to correctly carry out any necessary work on of Directive 72/245/EEC or the equivalent your vehicle. This particularly applies to work ECE Regulation ECE-R 10. relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at Diagnostics connection a qualified specialist workshop: The diagnostics connection is only intended Rwork relevant to safety for the connection of diagnostic equipment at Rservice and maintenance work a qualified specialist workshop. Rrepair work G WARNING Rmodifications, installations and conver- If you connect equipment to a diagnostics sions connection in the vehicle, it can affect the Rwork on electronic components operation of the vehicle systems. This may Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a affect the operating safety of the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres WARNING G to carry out technical inspections on certain Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. is improved as a result of the inspection. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardised. There is a risk of an accident. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter It is possible that your vehicle has not yet the driver's footwell. Fit the floormats been registered in your name in the following securely and as specified in order to ensure cases: sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an loose floormats. authorised specialist dealer. Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined ! If the engine is switched off and equip- at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ment on the diagnostics connection is It is advisable to register your vehicle with a used, the starter battery may discharge. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible connection can lead to emissions monitoring about any change in address or vehicle own- information being reset, for example. This ership. may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the

Z 26 Introduction

Correct use Rmalfunctions and faults in important system components. This includes, e.g. lights, If you remove any warning stickers, you or brakes. others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Rreactions of the vehicle in special driving Leave warning stickers in position. situations. This includes, e.g. deployment Observe the following information when driv- of an airbag, intervention of stability control ing your vehicle: systems. Rthe safety notes in this manual Renvironmental conditions. This includes, Rthe technical data in this manual e.g. the outside temperature. Rtraffic rules and regulations This data is exclusively technical in nature Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to and is used to: motor vehicles Rassist in the detection and rectification of faults and defects Roptimise vehicle functions Implied warranty The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's ! Follow the instructions in this manual movements over distances travelled. about the proper operation of your vehicle When your vehicle is serviced, this technical as well as about possible vehicle damage. information can be read out from the event Damage to your vehicle that arises from and fault memory. culpable contraventions against these Services include: instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the Rrepairs New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Rservice processes Rwarranty claims Rquality assurance Data stored in the vehicle The information is read out by authorised employees of the service network (including A number of electronic components in your manufacturers) using special diagnostic devi- vehicle contain data memories. ces. You can find more information there if These data memories temporarily or perma- necessary. nently store technical information about: After a fault has been rectified, the informa- Rthe vehicle's operating state tion in the fault memory is deleted or consec- Revents utively overwritten. Rfaults In normal vehicle operation, situations may This technical information generally docu- arise in which this technical data could ments the condition of a component, a mod- become personal in nature in conjunction ule, a system or an environment. with other information and, if necessary, on These are, for example: consultation of an approval official. Examples include: Roperating conditions of system components. This includes, e.g. fluid levels. Raccident reports Rstatus messages from the vehicle and from Rvehicle damage individual vehicle components. This Rwitness testimonies includes, e.g. number of wheel revolu- Further additional features which are con- tions/speed, deceleration, lateral acceler- tractually agreed with the customer likewise ation. allow specific vehicle data to be obtained Introduction 27 from the vehicle. Such additional features include vehicle locating in an emergency, for example.

Copyright information General notes Information on licences for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource

Z 28 29

Cockpit ...... 30 Instrument cluster ...... 32 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 35 Centre console ...... 36 Overhead control panel ...... 39 Door control panel ...... 40 At a glance 30 Cockpit

Cockpit At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Steering wheel gearshift F Adjusts the steering wheel paddles 170 manually 111 ; Combination switch 123 G Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 111 = Instrument cluster 32 Steering wheel heating 112 ? Horn H Cruise control lever 187 A DIRECT SELECT lever 166 I Parking brake 181 B PARKTRONIC warning dis- J play 207 Diagnostics connection 25 K C Overhead control panel 39 Opens the bonnet 336 L D Climate control systems 136 Releases the parking brake 181 M E Ignition lock 157 Light switch 120 Start/Stop button 157 N Night View Assist Plus 221 Cockpit 31 At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Overhead control panel 39 G Opens the bonnet 336 ; PARKTRONIC warning dis- H Diagnostics connection 25 play 207 I Ignition lock 157 = Combination switch 123 Start/Stop button 157 ? Instrument cluster 32 J Adjusts the steering wheel A Horn manually 111 K B DIRECT SELECT lever 166 Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 111 C Steering wheel gearshift Steering wheel heating 112 paddles 170 L Cruise control lever 187 D Light switch 120 M Parking brake 181 E Night View Assist Plus 221 N Climate control systems 136 F Releases the parking brake 181 32 Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster Displays At a glance

i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Page Function Page = Rev counter 244 : Speedometer with seg- ? Coolant temperature 244 ments 244 A Fuel gauge ; Multifunction display 245

i Set the instrument cluster lighting via the on-board computer (Y page 255). Instrument cluster 33 At a glance

i Instrument cluster: miles Function Page Function Page = Rev counter 244 : Speedometer with seg- ? Coolant temperature 244 ments 244 A Fuel gauge ; Multifunction display 245 i Set the instrument cluster lighting via the on-board computer (Y page 255). 34 Instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps At a glance

Function Page Function Page : ÷ ESP® 297 G ü Seat belt 293 M SPORT handling H % Diesel engine: pre- mode in AMG vehicles 298 glow 159 ; · Distance warning 303 ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 298 = å ESP® OFF 297 I ? Coolant 301 ? #! Turn signals 123 J K Main-beam headlamps 124 A J Brakes (red) 294 K L Dipped-beam head- B J Only for certain vehi- lamps 121 cles: brakes (yellow) 294 L T Side lamps 122 C ! ABS 295 M R Rear foglamp 122 D 6 SRS 300 N 8 Reserve fuel 301 E ; Engine diagnostics 300 F h Tyre pressure monitor 304 Multifunction steering wheel 35

Multifunction steering wheel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Multifunction display 245 A =; ; Audio/COMAND display; Selects a menu 244 see the separate operating 9: instructions Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists 244 = ? a Switches on LINGUA- Confirms the selection 244 TRONIC; see the separate operating instructions Hides display messages 265 ? ~ B % Rejects or ends a call 251 Back 244 Exits telephone book/ Switches off LINGUA- redial memory TRONIC; see the separate 6 operating instructions Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute 36 Centre console

Centre console Centre console, upper section At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Audio system/COMAND C £ Hazard warning Online; see the separate lamps 124 operating instructions D u Rear-window roller ; c Seat heating 108 sunblind (CLS Coupé) 321 = s Seat ventilation 110 Ü Lowers the rear seat head restraints (CLS Shoot- ? c PARKTRONIC 207 ing Brake) 106 A ¤ start/stop function 160 E & Auxiliary heating 147 B 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 57 Centre console 37

Centre console, lower section At a glance

Function Page Function Page F Stowage compartment 306 I Stowage compartment 306 Ashtray 322 J Ú Selects the drive pro- Cigarette lighter 323 gram 169 Power socket 324 K COMAND controller; see Cup holders 319 the separate operating G e Adjusts the suspen- instructions sion setting 204 H É Sets the vehicle level 203 38 Centre console

Centre console, lower section (AMG vehicles) At a glance

Function Page Function Page F Cup holders 319 K Stowage compartment 306 G Engages parking position P 181 L ß Calls up/saves the suspension setting 205 H Selector lever 166 M à Adjusts the suspen- I Ashtray 322 sion setting 205 Cigarette lighter 323 Power socket 324 N å ESP® 70 J COMAND controller; see O Drive program selector 170 the separate operating instructions Overhead control panel 39

Overhead control panel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : u Switches the rear B Buttons for the garage door interior lighting on/off 129 opener 327 ; | Switches the auto- C 3 Opens/closes the matic interior lighting con- sliding sunroof 98 trol on/off 129 D ê Deactivates the inte- = p Switches the right- rior motion sensor 76 hand reading lamp on/off 128 E p Switches the left- ? ë Deactivates tow- hand reading lamp on/off 128 away protection 75 F c Switches the front A Rear-view mirror 116 interior lighting on/off 129 40 Door control panel

Door control panel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : r45= B W Opens/closes the Stores settings for the seat, side windows 94 exterior mirrors and steer- C ing wheel 117 n Activates/deactivates the override feature ; Adjusts the seats electri- for the side windows in the cally 104 rear compartment 66 = %& Unlocks/locks D p Opens/closes the the vehicle 87 boot lid/tailgate 92 ? Opens the door 87 A 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 114 41

Useful information ...... 42 Panic alarm ...... 42 Occupant safety ...... 42 Children in the vehicle ...... 55 Driving safety systems ...... 66 Anti-theft systems ...... 74 Safety 42 Occupant safety

Useful information Occupant safety

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Important safety notes els, series and optional equipment for your G WARNING vehicle that were available at the time of Modifications to the restraint systems could going to press. National variations are pos- result in them not functioning properly any sible. Note that your vehicle may not be more. The restraint systems could then no equipped with all of the functions descri-

Safety longer protect vehicle occupants as they are bed. This is also the case for systems and designed to do and could fail in the event of functions relevant to safety. an accident or activate unexpectedly, for i Read the information on qualified special- example. There is an increased risk of injury. ist workshops: (Y page 25). Never modify parts of the restraint systems. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Panic alarm The airbag system can be adapted for a person with disabilities. For further information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The seat belts, together with SRS (Supple- mental Restraint System), are complemen- tary, co-ordinated restraint systems (Y page 43). They reduce the risk of injury in specific, pre-defined types of accident situations and thereby increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects pene- trating the vehicle from the outside. X To activate: press the ! button : for To ensure that the restraint systems can at least one second. deliver their full potential protection, make An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting sure that: flashes. Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted X To deactivate: press the ! button : properly ( page 102) again. Y Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly or (Y page 51) X Insert the key into the ignition lock. Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if or deployed (Y page 44) X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehi- (Y page 111) cle. Rthe restraint systems have not been modified i The panic alarm function is only available in Mexico. An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. However, airbags are only an additional restraint system which complements, but does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear Occupant safety 43 their seat belt correctly at all times, even if SRS functions are checked regularly when the vehicle is equipped with airbags. The air- you switch on the ignition and when the bags are not deployed in all types of acci- engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions dents. For example, if the protective capacity can be detected in good time. of correctly fastened seat belts is not The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument increased by deploying the airbags, the air- cluster lights up when the ignition is switched bags will not deploy. on. It goes out no later than a few seconds Airbag deployment only provides increased after the engine is started. Safety protection if the seat belt is worn correctly. The SRS components are in operational read- The seat belt helps, firstly, to keep the vehicle iness when the 6 SRS indicator lamp goes occupant in the best position in relation to the out while the engine is running. airbag. Secondly, in a head-on collision, for A malfunction has occurred if: example, the seat belt prevents the vehicle occupant from being propelled towards the Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light point of impact. up when the ignition is switched on Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp does not go out after a few SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) seconds Introduction Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up again. SRS consists of: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp Triggering of belt tensioners and air- Rairbags bags Rthe airbag control unit with crash sensors During the first stage of a collision, the airbag Rbelt tensioners for the front seat belts and control unit evaluates important physical the outer seat belts in the rear data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- Rseat belt force limiters for the front seat eration, such as: belts and the outer seat belts in the rear Rduration SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming Rdirection into contact with the vehicle's interior in the Rmagnitude event of an accident. It can also reduce the Based on the evaluation of this data, the air- forces to which occupants are subjected dur- bag control unit pre-emptively triggers the ing an accident. belt tensioners in the first stage. If there is an even higher rate of vehicle decel- SRS warning lamp eration or acceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front airbags are also deployed. G WARNING If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint sys- Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air- tem components may be triggered uninten- bags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehi- tionally or might not be triggered at all in the cle deceleration or acceleration in the event event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle of a collision. In the first deployment stage, deceleration. There is an increased risk of the front airbag is filled with enough propel- injury, possibly even fatal. lant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The Have SRS checked and repaired immediately front airbag is fully deployed if a second at a qualified specialist workshop. deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds.

Z 44 Occupant safety

The belt tensioner and airbag triggering How the airbag system works is deter- thresholds are variable and are adapted to the mined by the severity of the accident detec- rate of deceleration or acceleration of the ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. acceleration, and the apparent type of acci- The triggering process must take place in dent: good time at the start of the collision. Rfrontal collision The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- Rside impact tion and the direction of the force are essen- Safety Roverturn tially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Airbags Rthe collision angle Important safety notes Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle G WARNING Rthe characteristics of the object with which Airbags provide additional protection; they the vehicle has collided are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. Factors which can only be seen and measured Observe the following notes to reduce the risk after a collision has occurred do not play a of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, deployment: nor do they provide an indication of airbag Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, preg- deployment. nant women – must wear their seat belt The vehicle may be deformed significantly, correctly at all times and lean back against e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag the backrest, which should be positioned being deployed. This is the case if only parts as close to the vertical as possible. The which are relatively easily deformed are affec- head restraint must support the back of the ted and the rate of deceleration is not high. head at about eye level. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even Ralways secure children less than though the vehicle suffers only minor defor- 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suit- mation. This is the case if, for example, very able child restraint systems. rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat occurs as a result. position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must i The front belt tensioners can only be trig- allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The gered if the seat belt tongues on the front driver's chest should be as far away from seats are correctly engaged in the seat belt the centre of the driver's airbag cover as buckles. possible. i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back dent. The different airbag systems work as possible. This is especially important if independently of each other. you have secured a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their head into the area of the window in which the sidebag/windowbag is deployed. Occupant safety 45

Rrearward-facing child restraint systems Rdo not hang any hard objects, e.g. coat must not be fitted to the front-passenger hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. seat unless the front-passenger airbag has Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, been disabled. On the front-passenger to the doors. seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury if a child restraint system with a trans- being caused by an airbag, due to the high ponder for automatic child seat recognition speed at which the airbag must be deployed. is fitted to the front-passenger seat in a Safety vehicle equipped with automatic child seat WARNING recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG G If you modify the airbag covers or affix OFF indicator lamp must be continuously objects, e.g. stickers to them, the airbags may lit. no longer function as intended. There is an If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle increased risk of injury. does not have automatic child seat recog- Never modify the airbag covers and do not nition, or your rearward-facing child affix any objects to them. restraint system does not have a transponder for automatic child seat recogni- WARNING tion, children must be secured in a child G restraint system on a suitable seat in the Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even rear. If you secure a forward-facing child prevent deployment of the airbags integrated restraint system to the front-passenger into the seats. The airbags may then fail to seat, you must move the front-passenger protect the vehicle occupants as intended. seat as far back as possible. Operation of the automatic child seat recognition may also be impaired. There is an Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharp- increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. edged objects in the pockets of clothing. Use only seat covers which have been specif- Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of ically approved for the respective seat by the driver's/front-passenger front airbag, Mercedes-Benz. particularly when the vehicle is in motion. Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard. G WARNING Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. After the driver's airbag has been deployed, This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of You could be injured if the airbag is injury. deployed and you are holding the inside of Do not touch the airbag parts. Have deployed the steering wheel. airbags replaced immediately at a qualified Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the specialist workshop. vehicle. Rmake sure that there are no people, ani- Airbag deployment slows down and restricts mals or objects between the vehicle occu- the movement of the vehicle occupant. pants and the area where the airbags are If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a deployed. bang and a small amount of powder may also Rdo not place any objects between the seat be released. Only in rare cases will the bang backrest and the door. affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The powder may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons

Z 46 Occupant safety

suffering from asthma or other pulmonary They are deployed: conditions. In order to prevent potential Rat the start of an accident with a high rate breathing difficulties, you should leave the of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can longitudinal direction also open the window to allow fresh air to Rif the system determines that airbag enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS warn- deployment can offer additional protection ing lamp lights up. to that provided by the seat belt The airbag installation locations are identified Safety Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being by the AIRBAG symbol. used i After an airbag has been deployed, have Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi- the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified cle specialist workshop, even if your vehicle is If the vehicle overturns, the front airbags are ready to drive. generally not deployed. Vehicles with automatic child seat recog- Front airbags nition in the front-passenger seat: the ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- front-passenger front airbag is only activated passenger seat. The system may then if the system determines that the front- detect that the seat is occupied and if there passenger seat is occupied. The PASSENGER is an accident, the restraint systems on the AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre front-passenger side could be deployed. console does not light up (Y page 57). Have restraint systems that have been trig- If a child restraint system is fitted to the front- gered replaced. passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is not on: Ra child restraint system without a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted or Ra child restraint system with a transponder has been fitted incorrectly

Driver's kneebag

Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. The front airbags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest.

Driver's kneebag : deploys under the steering column. It deploys together with the front airbags. The driver's kneebag is designed to Occupant safety 47 operate together with the front airbags in seam for sidebags. Otherwise, the sidebags frontal impacts if certain thresholds are cannot deploy correctly and therefore cannot exceeded. The driver's kneebag operates provide the intended protection in the event best in conjunction with correctly positioned of an accident. and fastened seat belts. The driver's kneebag increases protection of the driver against:

Rknee injuries Safety Rthigh injuries Rlower leg injuries i The driver's kneebag is only available in certain countries.

Sidebags Sidebags (example: CLS Coupé) G WARNING Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even deploy next to the outer seat cushions. prevent deployment of the airbags integrated When deployed, the sidebags offer additional into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protection for the thorax of the vehicle occu- protect the vehicle occupants as intended. pants on the side of the vehicle on which the Operation of the automatic child seat recog- impact occurs. However, they do not protect nition may also be impaired. There is an the: increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Rhead Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by Rneck Mercedes-Benz. Rarms The sidebags are deployed: G WARNING Ron the side on which an impact occurs Sensors to control the airbags are located in Rat the start of an accident with a high rate the doors. Modifications or work not per- of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera- formed correctly to the doors or door panel- tion, e.g. in a side impact ling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to Rindependently of the use of the seat belt the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function Rindependently of the front airbags properly any more. Consequently, the airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are If the vehicle overturns, the sidebags are gen- designed to do. This poses an increased risk erally not deployed. Sidebags are deployed if of injury. the system detects high vehicle deceleration Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. or acceleration in a lateral direction and Always have work on the doors or door pan- determines that sidebag deployment can elling carried out at a qualified specialist offer additional protection to that provided by workshop. the seat belt.

You should only use seat cover that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The seat covers must have a special tear

Z 48 Occupant safety

Pelvisbags i Pelvisbags are only available in certain countries. G WARNING If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz Windowbags recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The seat covers must have a special tear seam Safety for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the sidebag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained, for example, from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Windowbags on front-passenger side (example: CLS Coupé) Windowbags : enhance the level of protection for the head (but not chest or arms), of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The windowbags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. Windowbags are deployed: Pelvisbag on driver's side (example: CLS Coupé) Rat the start of an accident with a high rate Pelvisbags : enhance the level of protection of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera- of the vehicle occupants on the side of the tion, e.g. in a side impact vehicle on which the impact occurs. Ron the side on which an impact occurs Pelvisbags deploy next to and below the outer Ron the driver's and the front passenger's seat cushions. They are deployed: side if the vehicle overturns and the system Ron the side on which an impact occurs determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the Rat the start of an accident with a high rate seat belt of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners If the vehicle overturns, the pelvisbags are generally not deployed. Exception: if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Occupant safety 49

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK- Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head PRO luxury head restraints restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint Important safety notes NECK-PRO head restraints G WARNING The function of the head restraint may be impaired if you:

Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the Safety head restraints, for example Ruse head restraint covers If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfil their intended protective function in the event of an accident. In addition, objects attached to the head restraints could endanger other vehicle occupants. This poses an increased NECK-PRO head restraint (example: CLS Coupé) risk of injury. Do not attach any objects to the head X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint restraints and do not use head restraint cov- cushion forwards in the direction of ers. arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury down in the direction of arrow ; as far as head restraints increase protection of the it will go. driver's and front-passenger's head and X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK- neck. In the event of a rear collision of a cer- PRO head restraint cushion backwards in tain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/ the direction of arrow = until it engages. NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved for- X Repeat this procedure for the second wards and upwards. This provides better NECK-PRO head restraint. head support. NECK-PRO luxury head restraints If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats (Y page 49). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints that have been triggered are moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have NECK-PRO luxury head restraint (example: CLS the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO Coupé) luxury head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end collision.

Z 50 Occupant safety

® X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle PRE-SAFE intervenes: document wallet. Rwhen BAS activates, e.g. in emergency X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; braking situations between the NECK-PRO luxury head Rwhen BAS PLUS – on vehicles with DIS- restraint and the rear cover of the head TRONIC PLUS – intervenes heavily restraint. Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the X Push resetting tool : downwards until you radar sensor system detects an imminent

Safety hear the head restraint deployment mech- danger of collision in certain situations anism engage. Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- X Pull out resetting tool :. ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK- understeers or oversteers severely PRO luxury head restraint cushion back- PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures wards in the direction of arrow = until it depending on the hazardous situation detec- engages. ted: X Repeat this procedure for the second Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. NECK-PRO luxury head restraint. Rvehicles with the memory function: the X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an document wallet. unfavourable position. i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK- Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or active PRO luxury head restraints, have this work multicontour seat: the air pressure in the carried out at a qualified specialist work- side bolsters of the seat cushion and back- shop. rest is increased. Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant small gap remains. protection) If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens ! Make sure that there are no objects in the the belt pretensioning. The air pressure in the footwell or behind the seats when moving side bolsters on the multicontour seat/active the seat back. There is a risk that the seats multicontour seat is reduced again. All set- and/or the objects could be damaged. tings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to reversed. protect occupants in certain hazardous sit- If the seat belts are not released: uations. Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but injury in the event of an accident cannot be only when the vehicle is stationary. ruled out. Seat belt pretensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and More information about seat belt adjustment, maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in a convenience function integrated into PRE- front. Drive carefully. SAFE®, can be found under "Seat belt adjustment" (Y page 52). Occupant safety 51

Seat belts RChildren under 1.50 m tall and younger than twelve years of age cannot wear the Important safety notes seat belts correctly. For this reason secure WARNING them in special suitable child restraint sys- G tems installed on a suitable seat. Additional A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or information can be found in the Operating which has not been engaged in the seat belt Instructions in the chapter "Safety", "Chil- buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended dren in the Vehicle". Observe the installa-

level of protection. Under certain circumstan- Safety tion instructions of the child restraint sys- ces, this could cause severe or even fatal inju- tem manufacturer. ries in the event of an accident. RDo not secure an object with a seat belt if Therefore, make sure that all occupants — in the seat belt is also being used by one of particular, pregnant women — wear their seat the vehicle's occupants. belts correctly at all times. R The seat belt must fit snugly on your body G WARNING and must not be twisted.Therefore, avoid The seat belt does not offer the intended level wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. of protection if the backrest is not in the The shoulder section of the belt must be upright position. When braking or in the event routed across the centre of your shoulder of an accident, you could slide underneath the — on no account across your neck or under seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck inju- your arm — and pulled tight against your ries, for example. This poses an increased risk upper body. The lap belt must always pass of injury or even fatal injury. across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. Adjust the seat properly before beginning over your hip joints — not across your abdo- your journey. Always make sure that the seat men. If necessary, push the seat belt is in the upright position. slightly downwards and adjust it by pulling it in the direction the seat belt retracts. WARNING RDo not route the seat belt strap over sharp G Seat belts cannot perform their intended pro- or fragile objects. Please make sure that tective function if: such objects are not on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens or keys etc. The seat Rthey are damaged, modified, bleached or belt strap could become damaged and tear coloured, or are very dirty during an accident and you or other vehicle Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or very occupants could be injured. dirty ROnly one person should use each seat belt Rmodifications have been made to the seat at any one time. Children must never travel belt tensioners or belt anchorages sitting on the lap of another occupant. The In the event of an accident, seat belts can child will not be secured in the event of an sustain damage that is not visible to the naked accident, heavy braking or sudden change eye, e. g. due to glass splinters. Modified or of direction. This may result in the child or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the other occupants being seriously or fatally event of an accident, for example. Modified injured. belt tensioners could deploy unexpectedly or RPersons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the fail. There is an increased risk of serious or seat belts correctly. For this reason secure even fatal injuries. persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially Never make modifications to seat belts, belt designed, suitable restraint systems. tensioners, belt anchorages or seat belt

Z 52 Occupant safety

retractors. Make sure that the seat belts are X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the undamaged, are not worn and are clean. appropriate height (Y page 52). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only section of the seat belt to tighten the belt use seat belts which have been approved across your body. specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes- For information about releasing the seat belt Benz. with release button ?, see "Releasing seat Seat belts are the most effective means of

Safety belts" ( page 53). restraining the movement of vehicle occu- Y pants in the event of an accident. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming Seat belt adjustment into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the Fastening seat belts upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 260). The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More Example: CLS Coupé information about PRE-SAFE® can be found X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant an almost vertical position (Y page 102). protection)" (Y page 50). X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide :. Belt height adjustment X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your pelvis. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Seat belt adjustment: if necessary, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body (Y page 52). Occupant safety 53

You can adjust the belt height for the front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that allows the upper part of the seat belt to be routed across the centre of your shoulder.

X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions.

X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide Safety release :.

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. X Let go of belt sash guide release : and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged.

Wearing the rear centre seat belt (CLS Shooting Brake) Example: CLS Coupé If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded X Press release button ? on belt buckle =. down and back up again, the rear centre seat X Guide belt tongue ; back to belt sash belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be guide :. pulled out.

X To release the rear centre seat belt: pull Belt warning for the driver and front the seat belt out approximately 20 mm at passenger the belt outlet on the backrest and then The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- release it again. The seat belt is retracted and released. ment cluster is a reminder for all occupants to fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, a warning tone Releasing the seat belts may sound. ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue the warning tone ceases when the driver and will be trapped in the door or in the seat the front passenger have fastened their seat mechanism. This could damage the door, belt. the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- For certain countries only: regardless of aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their whether the driver and the front passenger protective function and must be replaced. have fastened their seat belts, the 7 seat Visit a qualified specialist workshop. belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine is started. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" (Y page 293).

Z 54 Occupant safety

Rear seat belt status indicator ! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident. i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: belt tensioners that are triggered by an electric motor can

Safety be deployed as often as desired and do not Rear seat belt status indicator (example: CLS need to be replaced. Coupé) The front seat belts and the outer seat belts The rear-compartment seat belt status indi- in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners cator indicates the rear seat on which the belt and belt force limiters. is fastened. In the example, the occupant on the left rear seat, when viewed in the direction The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in of travel, is secured. The ü symbol in the an accident, pulling them close against the body. display indicates a fastened seat belt. If a seat belt is not fastened or if a seat is not occupied, Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat the ý symbol is displayed. positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. The rear-compartment seat belt status indi- Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants cator appears in the multifunction display for back towards the backrest. around 30 seconds if: The belt tensioners can only be activated when: Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approximately 10 km/h. Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten Rthe restraint systems are operational; see their seat belts while the vehicle is in "6 SRS warning lamp" (Y page 43) motion. Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and each of the front seat belts. the vehicle drives off again. The belt tensioners on the outside seats in the You can also cancel the rear seat belt status rear compartment are triggered independ- indicator immediately (Y page 265). ently of the lock status of the seat belts. i The status indicator for the rear-compart- The belt tensioners are triggered depending ment seat belts is only available for certain on the type and severity of an accident: countries. Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end collision the vehicle decelerates or acceler- Belt tensioners, belt force limiters ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact G WARNING Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have opposite the impact the vehicle deceler- been deployed are no longer operational and ates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direc- are unable to perform their intended protection tive function. This poses an increased risk of Rin certain situations where the vehicle over- injury or even fatal injury. turns and the system determines that it can Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tensioners provide additional protection which have been triggered immediately If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. bang, and a small amount of powder may also Children in the vehicle 55 be released. Only in rare cases will the bang system with transponders for automatic affect your hearing. The powder that is child seat recognition released generally does not constitute a Rif you secure a forward-facing child health hazard and does not indicate that there restraint system to the front-passenger is a fire in the vehicle. The powder may cause seat, you must move the front-passenger short-term breathing difficulties to persons seat as far back as possible. suffering from asthma or other pulmonary Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap conditions. In order to prevent potential

of another occupant. Due to the forces Safety breathing difficulties, you should leave the which occur in the event of a sudden vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can change of direction, heavy braking or an also open the window to allow fresh air to accident, it would not be possible to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS warn- restrain the child. The child could be thrown ing lamp lights up. against parts of the vehicle interior and be If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force seriously or even fatally injured. limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is WARNING reduced. G If the child restraint system is incorrectly fit- The belt force limiters on the front seats are ted on the seat position suitable for this pur- synchronised with the front airbags, which pose, it cannot perform its intended protec- take on a part of the deceleration force. This tive function. In the event of an accident, results in the load being distributed over a sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, greater area. the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Children in the vehicle Observe the manufacturer's installation Child restraint systems instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire Important safety notes surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects WARNING G under or behind the child restraint system, To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint sys- injury to the child in the event of a sudden tems with the original cover designed for change in direction, braking or an accident: them. Only replace damaged covers with gen- Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under uine covers. twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on a suit- G WARNING able vehicle seat. This is necessary If the child restraint system is fitted incor- because the seat belts are not designed for rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in children. the event of an accident, heavy braking or a RDo not drive with a child secured in a rear- sudden change in direction. The child ward-facing child restraint system on the restraint system could be thrown about, strik- front-passenger seat. Exception: if the vehi- ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased cle is equipped with automatic child seat risk of injury, possibly even fatal. recognition on the front-passenger seat Always fit child restraint systems properly, and the child is secured in a child restraint even if they are not being used. Make sure

Z 56 Children in the vehicle

that you observe the child restraint system G WARNING manufacturer's installation instructions. If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. G WARNING Children could be suffer burns by touching Child restraint systems or their securing sys- these parts, in particular on the metallic parts tems that have been damaged or subjected to of the child restraint system. There is a risk of a load in an accident cannot perform their injury. intended protective function. In the event of

Safety If you and your child leave the vehicle, always an accident, sharp braking or a sudden make sure that the child restraint system is change in direction, the child may not be held not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, securely. There is an increased risk of serious for example. If the child restraint system has or even fatal injuries. been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to Immediately replace child restraint systems cool down before securing the child in it. that have been damaged or subjected to a Never leave children unattended in the vehi- load in an accident. Have the child restraint cle. securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure system again. the child using a child restraint system which is appropriate to the size, age and weight of the child. In order to correctly secure the child G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, in the child restraint system, always comply they can: with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You should pref- Ropen doors and endanger other persons or erably fit the restraint system to a suitable road users rear seat. Make sure that the child is secured Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic for the trip. Roperate vehicle equipment and, for exam- Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use ple, trap themselves. the listed child restraint systems Children could also set the vehicle in motion, (Y page 62). You can obtain further infor- for example by: mation about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care park position P products to clean child restraint systems. Rstarting the engine. You can obtain information about this at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key Child restraint system on the front- with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave passenger seat children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. G WARNING If the front-passenger airbag is not disabled: WARNING G Ra child secured in a child restraint system If persons (particularly children) are exposed on the front-passenger seat could be seri- to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there ously and even fatally injured by the front- is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never passenger airbag deploying. This is espe- leave persons (particularly children) unatten- cially a risk if the child is in the immediate ded in the vehicle. Children in the vehicle 57

vicinity of the front-passenger airbag when it deploys. Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Only secure a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Ralways move the front-passenger seat to

the rearmost position if you secure a child Safety in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger airbag is not disabled: Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system Ron vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat that is protected by an air- Rin vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat, if no bag installed in front of it. special child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recogni- Automatic child seat recognition on the tion in the front-passenger seat has been front-passenger seat fitted G WARNING R on vehicles with automatic child seat rec- If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- ognition on the front-passenger seat, if the tor lamp does not light up when the child PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger 4 is not lit. airbag has not been disabled. If the front- To make you aware of this danger, a corre- passenger airbag deploys, the child could be sponding warning sticker has been affixed on seriously or even fatally injured. the dashboard and on both sides of the sun Proceed as follows: visor on the front-passenger side. Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint Information about recommended child system on the front-passenger seat. restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. or Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position. Rhave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions/communicates correctly, never place Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint

Z 58 Children in the vehicle

system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could lead to injuries.

G WARNING Electronic devices on the front-passenger seat can affect the function of the automatic child seat recognition, for example: Safety Rlaptop Rmobile phone Rtransponder cards such as ski passes or The sensor system for child restraint systems access passes in the front-passenger seat detects whether The front-passenger front airbag could deploy a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a unintentionally or not function as intended transponder for automatic child seat recog- during an accident. This poses an increased nition has been fitted. In this case, risk of injury or even fatal injury. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp : Do not place any of the devices mentioned lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is above or similar devices on the front- disabled. passenger seat. i If the front-passenger front airbag is disabled by the automatic child seat recognition, the following remain enabled on the front-passenger side: Rthe sidebag Rthe pelvisbag Rthe windowbag Rthe belt tensioner

ISOFIX child seat securing system for the rear seats

If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle G WARNING does not have automatic child seat recogni- ISOFIX child restraint systems do not provide tion, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sufficient protection for children weighing sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard more than 22 kg. The child cannot be on the front-passenger side. The sticker is restrained in the event of an accident, for visible when you open the front-passenger instance. There is an increased risk of injury, door. possibly even fatal. Vehicles without automatic child seat recog- If the child weighs more than 22 kg, secure nition on the front-passenger seat: if you turn the ISOFIX child restraint system additionally the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the with the seat belt. If available, secure the child PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp restraint system additionally with the Top lights up briefly but has no function. It does Tether belt. not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation Children in the vehicle 59 instructions and the instructions for correct ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for use of the child restraint system. specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX WARNING G child restraint systems are fitted on the left The child restraint system cannot perform its and right of the rear seats. protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be Top Tether restrained in the event of an accident, heavy

braking or sudden changes of direction. The Important safety notes Safety child could be seriously or even fatally injured. WARNING For this reason, when fitting a child restraint G system, be sure to observe the manufactur- If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they er's installation instructions and the instruc- could fold forwards in the event of an acci- tions for correct use of the child restraint sys- dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of tem. direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective For safety reasons, when installing child function. Rear seat backrests that are not restraint systems on the rear seats, only use locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. child restraint systems with the ISOFIX child in the event of an accident. This poses an seat securing system, which are specially tes- increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. ted and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification An incorrectly fitted child restraint system indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so could come loose and seriously or even fatally that they are positioned vertically. injure the child or other vehicle occupants. When fitting the child restraint system, always Top Tether provides an additional connection make sure that it is engaged correctly in the between the ISOFIX child restraint system securing rings on both sides. secured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds.

Securing rings (example: CLS Coupé) When installing the ISOFIX child restraint system, fold protective caps ; of securing rings : inwards.

X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing the ISOFIX child restraint system.

Z 60 Children in the vehicle

CLS Coupé er's installation instructions when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is tight.

CLS Shooting Brake Safety

The Top Tether anchorage points are located in the rear compartment behind the head restraints. The Top Tether anchorages are attached to X Move head restraint : upwards. the rear of the rear seat backrests. X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage Move head restraint : upwards. =. X X Remove luggage compartment cover ; X Route Top Tether belt A under head ( page 313). restraint : between the two head restraint Y bars. X Route Top Tether belt B under head restraint : between the two head restraint X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether bars. anchorage =. Hook Top Tether hook A into Top Tether Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not X X anchorage ? on the back of rear seat twisted. backrest =. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchor- Make sure that Top Tether belt B is not age =. X twisted. X Move head restraint : back down again X Move head restraint : back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 106). slightly if necessary (Y page 106). Make Make sure that you do not interfere with the sure that you do not interfere with the cor- correct routing of Top Tether belt A. rect routing of Top Tether belt B. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the manufactur- Children in the vehicle 61

X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Weight cat- Front- Front- Top Tether. Comply with the manufactur- egories passenger passenger er's installation instructions when doing so. front air- front air- Make sure that Top Tether belt B is tight. bag is not bag is disa- X Fit luggage compartment cover ; disabled bled ( page 313). Y Category II: UF, L U, L 15 to 25 kg

Suitable positioning of the child Safety restraint systems Category UF, L U, L III: 22 to X Fitting a child restraint system on the 36 kg front-passenger seat: move the front- passenger seat to its rearmost position and move the belt height adjustment to the low- Vehicles with automatic child seat recog- est position. nition in the front-passenger seat: a "Uni- versal" category child restraint system with a Key to the letters used in the following table: transponder for automatic child seat recog- X Seat which is unsuitable for children in nition must be fitted when the front- this weight category. passenger front airbag is disabled. The U Suitable for child restraint systems in the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp "Universal" category that are approved must be lit. for use in this weight category. Rear seats UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint Weight cat- Left, right Centre (CLS systems that belong to the "Universal" egories Shooting category and are approved for use in this Brake only) weight category. L Suitable for child restraint systems as Category 0: U, L U recommended; see the following table of up to 10 kg "Recommended child restraint systems" Category U, L U ( page 62). Y 0+: up to Front-passenger seat 13 kg Weight cat- Front- Front- Category I: U, L U egories passenger passenger 9 to 18 kg front air- front airbag is not bag is disa- Category II: U, L U disabled bled 15 to 25 kg Category 0: X U, L Category U, L U up to 10 kg III: 22 to 36 kg Category X U, L 0+: up to "Universal" category child restraint systems 13 kg can be recognised by their orange approval Category I: UF, L U, L label. 9 to 18 kg

Z 62 Children in the vehicle

Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months

Size cate- Equipment Rear seat, gory left and right E ISO/R1 IL

Safety D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL Example: approval label on the child restraint system Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg approx- Suitability of the rear seats for attaching imately 9 months to 4 years ISOFIX child restraint systems Size cate- Equipment Rear seat, Key to the letters used in the following table: gory left and X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for right ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. D ISO/R2 IL IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child C ISO/R3 IL restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category which are approved B ISO/F2 IUF for use in this weight category. B1 ISO/F2X IUF IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the follow- A ISO/F3 IUF ing table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 62). Recommended child restraint systems Carry-cot weight category When installing a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat: Size cate- Equipment Rear seat, gory left and X Move the front-passenger seat to its lowest right and rearmost position. Weight category 0: up to 10 kg up to F ISO/L1 X approximately 6 months G ISO/L2 X Manufacturer Britax Römer Weight category 0: up to 10 kg up to Type BABY SAFE PLUS approximately 6 months Approval number 03 301146 Size cate- Equipment Rear seat, (E1 ...) 04 301146 gory left and right Order number (A 970 10 00 000 ...) E ISO/R1 IL Automatic child seat Yes recognition Children in the vehicle 63

Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg up to Order num- 970 12 00 970 17 00 approximately 15 months ber (A Manufacturer Britax Römer 000 ...) Type BABY SAFE PLUS Automatic Yes No child seat Approval number 03 301146 recogni- (E1 ...) 04 301146 tion Safety Order number (A 970 10 00 000 ...) Manufac- Britax Römer Britax Römer turer Automatic child Yes seat recognition Type KIDFIX KIDFIX Approval 04 301198 04 301198 Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg approx- number imately 9 months to 4 years (E1 ...) Manufac- Britax Römer Britax Römer Order num- 970 18 00 970 19 00 turer ber (A 000 ...) Type DUO PLUS DUO PLUS Automatic Yes No Approval 03 301133 03 301133 child seat number 04 301133 04 301133 recogni- (E1 ...) tion Order num- 970 11 00 970 16 00 ber (A Suggested "Universal" category ISOFIX 000 ...) child restraint systems: Automatic Yes No Carry-cot weight category child seat Size categories F, G recognition Manufacturer – Type – Weight category II/III: 15 to 36 kg, approximately 4 to 12 years Approval number (E1 ...) – Manufac- Britax Römer Britax Römer Order number – turer Automatic child seat recognition – Type KID KID Category 0: up to 10 kg Approval 03 301148 03 301148 number 04 301148 04 301148 Size category E (E1 ...) Manufacturer – Type – Approval number (E1 ...) –

Z 64 Children in the vehicle

Order number – Automatic child seat recognition –

Category 0+: up to 13 kg

Size categories E D, C

Safety Manufacturer Britax Römer – Type BABY SAFE ISO- – FIX PLUS Approval num- 04 301146 – ber (E1 ...) Order number B6 6 86 8224 – Automatic child No – seat recognition

Category I: 9 to 18 kg

Size categories D, C, B, A Manufacturer – Type – Approval number (E1 ...) – Order number – Automatic child seat recog- – nition

Size category B1 Manufacturer Britax Römer Type DUO PLUS Approval number 03 301133 (E1 ...) 04 301133 Order number A 000 970 11 00 Automatic child seat Yes recognition Children in the vehicle 65

Problems with automatic child seat recognition

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR- A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with a trans- BAG OFF indicator ponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the lamp on the centre con- front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front airbag has there- sole is lit. fore been disabled as desired. Safety G WARNING There is no child restraint system fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning. When you switch the ignition on, it is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/or the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly. There is a risk of injury.

X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptop Rmobile phone Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still lit:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Child-proof locks When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave Important safety notes children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, WARNING they can: G If persons (particularly children) are exposed Ropen doors and endanger other persons or to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there road users is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic leave persons (particularly children) unatten- Roperate vehicle equipment and, for exam- ded in the vehicle. ple, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Z 66 Driving safety systems

press the child-proof lock G WARNING X To activate: If children are travelling in the vehicle, they lever up in the direction of arrow :. could: X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow . Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming ; traffic Safety Roperate vehicle equipment and become Override feature for the rear side win- trapped, for example dows There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are travelling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can activate the following child-proof locks:

Rrear doors (Y page 66) Rrear side windows (Y page 66) X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the Child-proof locks for the rear doors rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment.

Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about Rear door child-proof lock (example: CLS Coupé) the following driving safety systems: You secure each door individually with the RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door (Y page 67) secured with a child-proof lock cannot be RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67) opened from inside the vehicle. When the RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened (Y page 68) from the outside. RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 69) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 69) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 72) Driving safety systems 67

RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72) When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, R ® including driving safety systems, will also PRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 73) become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 295) and Important safety notes display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 266). If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way are inattentive, the driving safety systems can that the wheels do not lock when you brake. neither reduce the risk of accident nor over- Safety This allows you to continue steering the vehi- ride the laws of physics. Driving safety sys- cle when braking. tems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for upwards, regardless of road-surface condi- braking in good time. Always adapt your driv- tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even ing style to suit the prevailing road, weather when you only brake gently. and traffic conditions and maintain a safe dis- The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the tance from the vehicle in front. Drive care- instrument cluster lights up when the ignition fully. is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. i The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there Brakes is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Please pay special atten- X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the tion to the notes on tyres, recommended brake pedal with force until the braking sit- minimum tyre tread depths, etc. uation is over. (Y page 372). X To make a full brake application: In wintry driving conditions, always use depress the brake pedal with full force. winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel snow chains. Only in this way will the driv- a pulsing in the brake pedal. ing safety systems described in this section The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- work as effectively as possible. tion of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) driving. Important safety notes BAS (Brake Assist System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 67). i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 67). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when G WARNING braking. The steerability and braking charac- If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- in an emergency braking situation is ally, further driving safety systems are deac- increased. There is a risk of accident. tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- In an emergency braking situation, depress ding and accidents. the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- the wheels from locking. diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 68 Driving safety systems

BAS operates in emergency braking situa- G WARNING tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS PLUS does not react: BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Rto people or animals The brakes will function as usual once you Rto oncoming vehicles release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all Safety BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) critical situations. There is a risk of an acci- General notes dent. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- uation and be ready to brake. tion (Y page 67). BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with In particular, the detection of obstacles can DISTRONIC PLUS. be impaired if there is: For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- system must be: ing the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rswitched on (Y page 259) Roperational Rinterference by other radar sources With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the for example, in multi-storey car parks path of your vehicle for an extended period of Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a time. motorcycle If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning, Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake line system is still available with complete brake Following damage to the front end of the vehi- boosting effect and BAS. cle, have the configuration and operation of BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz- the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- ardous situations at speeds greater than cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- 7 km/h. sions at slow speeds where there is no visible At speeds of up to approximately 70 km/h damage to the front of the vehicle. BAS PLUS can also detect stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are stopped Braking assistance or parked vehicles. To prevent a collision with the vehicle in front, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force neces- Important safety notes sary if: G WARNING Ryou approach an obstacle, and BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision objects and complex traffic situations. BAS When driving at a speed under 30 km/h: PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is is a risk of an accident. activated. Braking assistance from BAS PLUS Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- is carried out at the last possible moment. uation and be ready to brake. When driving at a speed greater than 30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal Driving safety systems 69 sharply, BAS PLUS automatically increases safety systems are switched off. This increa- the brake pressure to a degree suited to the ses the risk of skidding and an accident. traffic situation. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak- qualified specialist workshop. ing force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simul- ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the igni- taneously. tion when the parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the Safety emergency braking situation is over. Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth- ABS prevents the wheels from locking. erwise destroy the brake system. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func- Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your tion as usual, if: vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is impor- Ryou release the brake pedal tant that you observe the notes on ESP®( page 367). Rthere is no longer a risk of collision Y ® Rno obstacle is detected in front of your ESP is deactivated if the å warning lamp vehicle in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn- Adaptive brake lamps ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS Observe the information on warning lamps or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. (Y page 297) and display messages which In this way, traffic travelling behind you is may be shown in the instrument cluster warned in an even more noticeable manner. (Y page 266). ® If you brake sharply from a speed of more If ESP detects that the vehicle is deviating than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warn- from the direction desired by the driver, one ing lamps are activated automatically. If the or more wheels are braked to stabilise the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps vehicle. The engine output is also modified to light up continuously. The hazard warning keep the vehicle on the desired course within lamps switch off automatically if you travel physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® the hazard warning lamps using the hazard can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. warning button (Y page 124). If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ® X Do not deactivate ESP under any circum- Important safety notes stances. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- X when pulling away, only depress the accel- tion (Y page 67). erator pedal as far as is necessary Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail- WARNING X G ing road and weather conditions. If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving

Z 70 Driving safety systems

i Only use wheels with the recommended the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa- tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function tions, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. properly. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Rwhen using snow chains ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. Rin deep snow Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- Ron sand or gravel Safety vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull If you deactivate ESP®: away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for ® example if the road surface is slippery on one RESP no longer improves driving stability. side. In addition, more drive torque is trans- Rtraction control is still activated. ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. RESP® still provides support when you Traction control remains active if you deacti- brake. vate ESP®. Rengine torque is not limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the Deactivating/activating ESP® (except wheels results in a cutting action for better AMG vehicles) traction.

G WARNING Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- vehicles) bilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Activating/deactivating SPORT handling Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- mode bed in the following. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, ( page 253). X To deactivate: Y there is a greater risk of skidding and acci- ® The å ESP OFF warning lamp in the dents. instrument cluster lights up. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit- X To activate: (Y page 253). uations described in the following. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. X To activate: briefly press button :. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels The M SPORT handling mode warning start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. Driving safety systems 71

SPORT handling mode is designed for driv- Deactivating/activating ESP® ing on designated roads when the vehicle's WARNING own oversteering and understeering char- G ® ® acteristics are desired. Driving in SPORT If you deactivate ESP , ESP no longer sta- handling mode requires an extremely quali- bilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk fied and experienced driver who is able to of skidding and an accident. cope with these critical driving conditions. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. X To deactivate: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning Safety lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. It may be best to activate SPORT handling mode in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® X To deactivate: press button : until the warning lamp in the instrument cluster å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a the instrument cluster. limited degree. The ÷OFF message appears in the mul- When SPORT handling mode is activated: tifunction display. ® RESP® only improves driving stability to a Deactivate ESP when driving on designa- limited degree. ted roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics Rtraction control is still activated. are desired. Driving without ESP® requires ® RESP still provides support when you an extremely qualified and experienced brake. driver who is able to cope with these critical Rengine torque is restricted to a limited driving conditions. degree and the drive wheels are able to X To activate: briefly press button :. spin. The spinning of the wheels results in ® a cutting action for better traction. The å ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the ECO start/stop function switches the engine message appears in the multifunction dis- off automatically when the vehicle comes to play. a stop. When pulling away again, the engine ESP® is activated automatically when the starts automatically. ESP® remains in its pre- engine is started. viously selected status. Example: if ESP® was If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels deactivated before the engine was switched start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in off, ESP® remains deactivated when the the instrument cluster does not flash. In such engine is switched on again. situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.

Z 72 Driving safety systems

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- trailer combination by depressing the brake lowing situations: firmly. ® Rwhen using snow chains In this situation, ESP assists you and can Rin deep snow detect if the vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down Ron sand or gravel by braking and limiting the engine output until ® If you deactivate ESP : the vehicle/trailer combination has stabi- R ® lised.

Safety ESP no longer improves driving stability. Rtraction control is still activated. Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; nor is it about 65 km/h. ® activated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter- Trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP is venes. deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ® ESP intervenes. EBD (electronic brake force distribu- RESP® still provides support when you tion) brake. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Rengine torque is no longer limited and the tion ( page 67). drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning Y of the wheels results in a cutting action for G WARNING better traction. If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increa- ECO start/stop function switches the engine ses the risk of skidding and an accident. off automatically when the vehicle comes to You should therefore adapt your driving style a stop. When pulling away again, the engine to the different handling characteristics. Have starts automatically. ESP® remains in its pre- the brake system checked at a qualified spe- viously selected status. Example: if ESP® was cialist workshop. deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the Observe information regarding indicator and engine is switched on again. warning lamps (Y page 295) as well as display messages (Y page 268). ESP® trailer stabilisation EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving G WARNING stability while braking. If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- ADAPTIVE BRAKE ing. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety ® tip over before ESP can detect this. There is and offers increased braking comfort. In addi- a risk of an accident. tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE Always adapt your driving style to the prevail- also has the HOLD function (Y page 201) and ing road and weather conditions. hill start assist (Y page 160). If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/ Driving safety systems 73

PRE-SAFE® Brake In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: General notes Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Rneither give a warning nor intervene tion ( page 67). Y There is a risk of an accident. ® PRE-SAFE Brake is only available in vehicles Always pay particular attention to the traffic with DISTRONIC PLUS. situation and be ready to brake, especially if For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv- PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the Safety ing, the radar sensor system must be: intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Ractivated ( page 259) Y In particular, the detection of obstacles can Roperational be impaired if there is: With the help of the radar sensor system, Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that ing the sensors are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE- for example, in multi-storey car parks SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a you will be warned visually and acoustically motorcycle as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different Brake cannot prevent a collision without your line intervention. WARNING At speeds of up to approximately 70 km/h G PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are Rto people or animals stopped or parked vehicles. Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Important safety notes Rwhen cornering ® G WARNING As a result, PRE-SAFE Brake may neither PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi- give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit- cle by a partial application of the brakes if a uations. There is a risk of an accident. danger of collision is detected. There may be Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- a collision unless you also brake. Automatic uation and be ready to brake. emergency braking cannot prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col- Always apply the brakes yourself and try to lision, you must apply the brakes yourself. take evasive action. Due to the nature of the system, particularly WARNING complicated driving conditions may cause G unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden- intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. tify objects and complex traffic conditions. Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of

Z 74 Anti-theft systems

the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- ended automatically if: sions at slow speeds where there is no visible Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle damage to the front of the vehicle. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision Function Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac- ® ® If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE Safety tivate PRE-SAFE Brake in the on-board Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system computer (Y page 253). will alert you both visually and acoustically. If ® If the PRE-SAFE Brake is not activated, the you do not brake or take evasive action, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction system will warn you by automatically braking display. the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk This function will issue a warning if: of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated Rat a speed of around 30 km/h or more, over ( page 50). If, at speeds over 30 km/h a risk several seconds, the distance maintained Y of collision remains and you do not brake, to the vehicle travelling in front is insuffi- take evasive action or significantly acceler- cient. ate, automatic braking may be performed up The · distance warning lamp then lights to a level of automatic emergency braking. up in the instrument cluster. Automatic emergency braking is not per- Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h or formed until immediately prior to an accident more, you very quickly approach a vehicle that can no longer be avoided. in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp Anti-theft systems will light up in the instrument cluster. Immobiliser X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from or being started without the correct key. X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. X To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, if the To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the driver and front passenger have fastened X ignition off and open the driver's door. their seat belts, PRE-SAFE® Brake can brake the vehicle automatically at speeds up to X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. approximately 200 km/h. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can SAFE® Brake at any time by: start the engine if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle. Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further Ractivating kickdown i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. Rreleasing the brake pedal Anti-theft systems 75

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Tow-away protection Function An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This can occur if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. Safety

Activating

X Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed. X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Rthe boot lid/tailgate is closed Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys- Only then is the tow-away protection tem is primed after approximately primed. 15 seconds. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS- GO. X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 30 seconds. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Switching off Ra door X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the R the vehicle with the emergency key ele- key or KEYLESS-GO. ment Tow-away protection is switched off auto- Rthe boot lid/tailgate matically. Rthe bonnet X To turn the alarm off with the key: press Deactivating the % or & button on the key. The alarm is switched off. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash- X Remove the key from the ignition lock. board. The key must be inside the vehicle. Press button . The alarm is switched off. X : Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. The alarm is not switched off, even if you Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS- close the open door that has triggered it, for X GO. example. Tow-away protection is deactivated.

Z 76 Anti-theft systems

Tow-away protection remains deactivated Switching off until: X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEY- Rthe vehicle is unlocked again and LESS-GO. Ra door is opened and closed again and The interior motion sensor is switched off Rthe vehicle is locked again automatically. To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the tow- away protection if you lock your vehicle and Deactivating

Safety it: Ris being transported Rit is being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage

Interior motion sensor Function Remove the key from the ignition lock. When the interior motion sensor is primed, a X visual and audible alarm is triggered if move- X Press button :. ment is detected in the vehicle interior. This Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly. can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS- interior, for example. GO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. Activating The interior motion sensor remains deactiva-

X Make sure that: ted until: Rthe side windows are closed. Rthe vehicle is unlocked again and Rthe sliding sunroof is closed. Ra door is opened and closed again and Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang- Rthe vehicle is locked again ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grab To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte- handles on the roof trim. rior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle This will prevent false alarms. and: X Make sure that: Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle. Rthe doors are closed. Rthe side windows remain open. Rthe sliding sunroof is closed. Rthe sliding sunroof remains open. Rthe boot lid/tailgate is closed. Only then is the interior motion sensor i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a primed. double-lock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle was Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS- X locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO GO. ( page 87). Deactivate the interior The interior motion sensor is primed after Y motion sensor before you lock the vehicle. approximately 30 seconds. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked Anti-theft systems 77 from the outside. Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 86). Safety

Z 78 79

Useful information ...... 80 Key ...... 80 Doors ...... 86 Boot/luggage compartment ...... 89 Side windows ...... 94 Sliding sunroof ...... 97 Opening and closing 80 Key

Useful information G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- they could: els, series and optional equipment for your Ropen the doors, thus endangering other vehicle that were available at the time of people or road users. going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be Rget out and disrupt traffic. equipped with all of the functions descri- Roperate the vehicle's equipment. bed. This is also the case for systems and Additionally, children could set the vehicle in functions relevant to safety. motion if, for example, they: i Read the information on qualified special- Rrelease the parking brake. ist workshops: (Y page 25). Rshift the automatic transmission out of parking position P. Rshift the manual transmission into neutral. Key Rstart the engine. Important safety notes There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Opening and closing United Kingdom only: When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave G WARNING children or animals unattended in the vehicle. When the double locks are activated, the Always keep the key out of reach of children. doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get G WARNING out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a If persons (particularly children) are exposed risk of injury. to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper- is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld- leave persons (particularly children) unatten- erly people or people in need of special assis- ded in the vehicle. tance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, If the vehicle has been locked from the out- the key could be unintentionally turned in the side, the double lock function is activated as ignition lock. This could cause the engine to standard. It is then not possible to open the be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. doors from inside the vehicle. You can deac- Do not attach any heavy or large objects to tivate the double lock function by deactivat- the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before ing the interior motion sensor ( page 76). Y inserting the key into the ignition lock. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic outside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig- fields. Otherwise, the remote control func- gered if the door is opened from the inside. tion could be affected. Switch off the alarm (Y page 75). All countries: Key 81

Strong magnetic fields can occur in the When it is dark, the surround lighting also vicinity of powerful electrical installations. comes on if it is activated in the on-board RDo not keep the key: computer (Y page 257). - with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key KEYLESS-GO - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film General notes - inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case Bear in mind that the engine can be started This can affect the key's functionality. by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Key functions Locking and unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the key with you. You can combine the KEY- LESS-GO functions with the functions of a conventional key. Unlock the vehicle by using Opening and closing KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the key. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater : & To lock the vehicle than 1 m. ; F To unlock the boot lid/tailgate KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid key is in the vehicle by periodically establishing a radio = % To unlock the vehicle connection between the vehicle and the key. X To unlock centrally: press the % but- This happens: ton. Rwhen the external door handles are If you do not open the vehicle within touched approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rwhen starting the engine Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rwhile the vehicle is in motion Rthe anti-theft system is primed again.

X To lock centrally: press the & button. The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe boot lid/tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 258).

Z 82 Key

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- surface of the door handle. lows:

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur- X To unlock the driver's door: touch the face :. inner surface of the door handle on the X Convenience closing feature: touch driver's door. recessed sensor surface ; for an exten- X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur- ded period. face of the door handle on the front- X To unlock the boot lid/tailgate: pull the passenger door or the rear door. handle on the boot lid/tailgate. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor For further information on the convenience surface on one of the door handles. closing feature (Y page 95). X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six sec- Changing the settings of the locking onds until the battery check lamp flashes system twice (Y page 83). You can change the settings of the locking

Opening and closing system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the Emergency key element vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. General notes

X To change the setting: press and hold If the vehicle can no longer be locked or down the % and & buttons on the unlocked with the key, use the emergency key simultaneously for approximately six key element. seconds until the battery check lamp If you use the emergency key element to flashes twice (Y page 83). unlock and open the driver's door or the boot i If the setting of the locking system is lid/tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system will changed within the signal range of the vehi- be triggered (Y page 75). cle, pressing the & or % button: There are several ways to turn off the alarm: Rlocks or X To turn the alarm off with the key: press Runlocks the vehicle the % or & button on the key. The key now functions as follows: or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. or To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS- To unlock centrally: press the % but- X X GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni- ton twice. tion lock. The key must be in the vehicle. To lock centrally: press the & button. X or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS- GO. The key must be outside the vehicle. Key 83

If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency environmentally responsible key element, the fuel filler flap will not be recycling system. unlocked automatically. Dispose of batteries in an X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the environmentally responsible key into the ignition lock. manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- Removing the emergency key element cialist workshop or to a col- lection point for used batteries.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Checking the battery Opening and closing

: Release catch ; Emergency key element

X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key.

Battery of the key X Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery Important safety notes check lamp : lights up briefly. G WARNING The battery is discharged if battery check Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- lamp : does not light up briefly. ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in X Change the battery (Y page 83). severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal i If the key battery is checked within the injury. signal reception range of the vehicle, press- Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If ing the & or % button: a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention R immediately. locks or Runlocks the vehicle H Environmental note i You can get a battery at any qualified spe- Batteries contain pollutants. cialist workshop. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. Replacing the battery They must be collected separately and disposed of in an You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 82).

Z 84 Key

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing and then press to close it. X Insert emergency key element ; into the key (Y page 82). X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle.

: Battery compartment cover ; Emergency key element

X Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold battery

Opening and closing compartment cover : shut.

X Remove battery compartment cover :.

= Battery

X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. Key 85

Problems with the key

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control using the key. function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. If this does not work:

X Check the key battery (Y page 83) and replace it if necessary (Y page 83). X Lock (Y page 88) or unlock (Y page 88) the vehicle using the emergency key element.

The key is faulty.

X Lock (Y page 88) or unlock (Y page 88) the vehicle using the emergency key element. Opening and closing X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of using KEYLESS-GO. the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button.

There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If this does not work:

X Check the key battery (Y page 83) and replace it if necessary (Y page 83). X Lock (Y page 88) or unlock (Y page 88) the vehicle using the emergency key element.

You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the emer- X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. gency key element. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z 86 Doors

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be the on-board voltage is too low. started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work:

X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 361). or

X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 363). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily. started using KEYLESS- X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. GO. The key is in the

Opening and closing vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.

Doors gered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 75). Important safety notes All countries: United Kingdom only: G WARNING G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, When the double locks are activated, the they could: doors can no longer be opened from the Ropen the doors, thus endangering other inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get people or road users. out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a Rget out and disrupt traffic. risk of injury. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld- Additionally, children could set the vehicle in erly people or people in need of special assis- motion if, for example, they: tance. Do not activate the double lock when Rrelease the parking brake. people are in the vehicle. Rshift the automatic transmission out of parking position P. If the vehicle has been locked from the out- Rshift the manual transmission into neutral. side, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the Rstart the engine. doors from inside the vehicle. You can deac- There is a risk of an accident and injury. tivate the double lock function by deactivat- When leaving the vehicle, always take the key ing the interior motion sensor (Y page 76). with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave The doors can then be opened from the inside children or animals unattended in the vehicle. after the vehicle has been locked from the Always keep the key out of reach of children. outside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig- Doors 87

Pull door handle . G WARNING X ; If persons (particularly children) are exposed If the door is locked, locking knob : pops to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there up. The door is unlocked and can be is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never opened. leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside Unlocking and opening the doors You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside from the inside. For all countries except the United King- dom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 75). Opening and closing United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has been locked with the key from the outside, the double-lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deac- X To unlock: press button :. tivate the double lock function by deactivat- X To lock: press button ;. ing the interior motion sensor (Y page 76). If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. outside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig- You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from gered if the door is opened from the inside. the inside if the vehicle has been locked with Switch off the alarm (Y page 75). the key or KEYLESS-GO. For all countries: You can only open the rear For all countries except the United King- doors from inside the vehicle if they are not dom: you can open a door from inside the secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 66). vehicle even if it has been locked. For the United Kingdom only: you can only open a door from inside the vehicle if the double lock function has been deactivated. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 76). For all countries: You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 66).

Z 88 Doors

If the vehicle has been locked using the lock- Unlocking the driver's door (emer- ing button for the central locking, or has been gency key element) locked automatically, and a door is opened from the inside: If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had Take the emergency key element out of the previously been fully unlocked X key (Y page 82). Ronly the door which has been opened form Insert the emergency key element into the the inside is unlocked if only the driver's X lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. door had been previously unlocked

Automatic locking feature Opening and closing

1 To unlock

X Turn the emergency key element anti- clockwise to position 1. X To deactivate: press and hold button : The door is unlocked. for approximately five seconds until a tone i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the sounds. emergency key element clockwise. press and hold button for X To activate: ; X Turn the emergency key element back and approximately five seconds until a tone remove it. sounds. X Insert the emergency key element into the i If you press one of the two buttons and key. do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has If you use the emergency key element to already been selected. unlock and open the driver's door, the anti- The vehicle is locked automatically when the theft alarm system will be triggered ignition is switched on and the wheels are (Y page 75). turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Locking the vehicle (emergency key Rthe vehicle is being pushed. element) R the vehicle is being towed. If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamom- key, use the emergency key element. eter. X Open the driver's door. You can also switch the automatic locking Close the front-passenger door, the rear function on and off using the on-board com- X doors and the boot lid/tailgate. puter (Y page 258). X Press the locking button (Y page 87). Boot/luggage compartment 89

X Check whether the locking knobs on the Always switch off the engine before opening front-passenger door and the rear doors the boot lid/tailgate. Never drive with the are still visible. Press down the locking boot lid/tailgate open. knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 87). X Close the driver's door. G WARNING X Take the emergency key element out of the If persons (particularly children) are exposed key (Y page 82). to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there X Insert the emergency key element into the is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle.

! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. i Boot lid/tailgate opening dimensions (Y page 413). Opening and closing Ideally, place luggage or loads in the boot/ luggage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 306). 1 To lock Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage X Turn the emergency key element clockwise compartment. You could otherwise lock your- as far as it will go to position 1. self out. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the Vehicles without the boot lid remote clos- emergency key element anti-clockwise. ing feature: the boot lid can be: R X Turn the emergency key element back and opened and closed manually from outside remove it. Ropened automatically from outside X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid/ Ropened automatically from inside tailgate are locked. Runlocked with the emergency key element X Insert the emergency key element into the Vehicles with the boot lid remote closing key. feature: the boot lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside Boot/luggage compartment Ropened and closed automatically from the outside Important safety notes Ropened and closed automatically from the inside G WARNING Runlocked with the emergency key element Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust CLS Shooting Brake: you can: gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot Ropen and close the tailgate manually from lid/tailgate is open when the engine is run- outside ning, especially if the vehicle is in motion. Ropen and close the tailgate automatically There is a risk of poisoning. from outside

Z 90 Boot/luggage compartment

Ropen and close the tailgate automatically Opening/closing from the outside from inside Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate Opening Runlock the tailgate using the emergency key element

Boot lid/tailgate reversing function The boot lid/tailgate is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object obstructs or restricts the boot lid/tailgate during the closing procedure. The boot lid/tailgate opens again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid Handle (example: CLS Coupé) and is not a substitute for your attentiveness Press the % button on the key. to the boot lid/tailgate while it is closing. X X CLS Coupé: pull handle :.

Opening and closing WARNING G X Raise the boot lid. The reversing function does not react: CLS Shooting Brake: if you pull handle : Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- and keep it in this position, you can open the gers tailgate manually. If you release the handle, Rover the last 8 mm of the closing path the tailgate opens automatically. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these sit- Closing uations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rpress the F button on the key, or Rpress the remote operating switch on the driver's door, or Rpress the closing or locking button on the boot lid/tailgate, or Rpull the handle on the boot lid/tailgate Recess (example: CLS Coupé)

X Pull the boot lid/tailgate down using recess :.

X CLS Shooting Brake: let the tailgate to drop into the lock. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key (Y page 81) or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 81). Boot/luggage compartment 91 i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the Use one of the following options to stop the boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/ closing process: tailgate will not lock. RPress the F button on the key. Saloon: the boot lid then opens again. RPress the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Opening/closing automatically from RPress the closing or locking button on the the outside boot lid/tailgate. RPull the handle on the boot lid/tailgate. Important safety notes United Kingdom only: ! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make G WARNING sure that there is sufficient clearance When the double locks are activated, the above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. doors can no longer be opened from the i Opening dimensions of the boot lid/tail- inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get gate ( page 413). out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a Y risk of injury. Opening Opening and closing Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld- You can open the boot lid/tailgate automati- erly people or people in need of special assis- cally with the key or the handle in the boot tance. Do not activate the double lock when lid/tailgate. people are in the vehicle. You can open the boot lid/tailgate automatically with the key or the handle in the boot If the vehicle has been locked from the out- lid/tailgate. side, the double lock function is activated as Press and hold the F button on the key standard. It is then not possible to open the X until the boot lid/tailgate opens. doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double-lock function by deactivat- or ing the interior motion sensor (Y page 76). X If the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked, pull the The doors can then be opened from the inside handle of the boot lid/tailgate and release after the vehicle has been locked from the it again immediately (Y page 90). outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 75). All countries:

G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid or tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.

Z 92 Boot/luggage compartment

Closing Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: RPress the F button on the key. RPress the remote operating switch on the driver's door. RPress the closing or locking button on the boot lid/tailgate. RPull the handle on the boot lid/tailgate.

! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make Closing button and locking button (example: CLS sure that there is sufficient clearance Coupé) above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. : Closing button i Opening dimensions of the boot lid/tail- ; Locking button gate (Y page 413). X To close: press closing button : in the Opening and closing boot lid/tailgate. Opening and closing CLS Coupé with boot lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close and lock the boot lid.

X Press locking button ; in the boot lid. CLS Shooting Brake: you can simultaneously close and lock the tailgate.

X Press locking button ; on the tailgate. i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/ tailgate will not lock. X To open: pull remote operating switch for boot lid/tailgate : until the boot lid/tailgate opens. Opening/closing automatically from X To close (CLS Coupé): press remote oper- the inside ating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid is closed. Important safety notes X To close (CLS Shooting Brake): turn the G WARNING key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. Parts of the body could become trapped dur- X Press remote operating switch for tail- ing automatic closing of the boot lid or tailgate : until the tailgate is closed. gate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be You can open and close the boot lid/tailgate standing in the closing area or may enter the from the driver's seat when the vehicle is sta- closing area during the closing process. There tionary and unlocked. is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Boot/luggage compartment 93

Limiting the opening angle of the tail- X Take the emergency key element out of the gate (CLS Shooting Brake) key (Y page 82). X Insert the emergency key element into the Important safety notes boot lid lock to the stop. ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside.

To activate You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 20 cm before the stop. 1 Neutral position pull the handle on X To open the tailgate: 2 To unlock

the tailgate. Opening and closing X Turn the emergency key element anti- X To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: press the closing button clockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2. (Y page 91) in the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again. The boot is unlocked. X To store the position: press and hold the X Turn the emergency key element back to closing button in the tailgate until you hear position 1 and remove it. a short tone. X Insert the emergency key element into the The opening angle limiter is activated. The key. tailgate then stops in the stored position when opened. Tailgate emergency release (CLS To deactivate Shooting Brake)

X Press and hold the closing button General notes (Y page 91) in the tailgate until you hear two short tones. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. Unlocking the boot (CLS Coupé) i Boot lid/tailgate opening dimensions ! The boot lid swings upwards when ( page 413). opened. Therefore, make sure that there is Y sufficient clearance above the boot lid. If the tailgate can no longer be opened from outside the vehicle, use the emergency If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key release on the inside of the tailgate. or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 75).

Z 94 Side windows

Opening G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Side window reversing feature X Take the emergency key element out of the The side windows are equipped with an auto- key (Y page 82). matic reversing feature. If a solid object Insert emergency key element ; into the X blocks or restricts a side window during the opening in trim . : closing process, the side window opens again X Turn emergency key element ; 90° clock- automatically. The automatic reversing func- Opening and closing wise. tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for X Push emergency key element ; in the your attentiveness to the side window while direction of the arrow and open the tail- it is closing. gate. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Side windows Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Important safety notes Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement Rduring resetting G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts Rwhen closing the side window again man- could become trapped between the side win- ually immediately after automatic reversing dow and the door frame as the side window This means that the reversing function cannot moves. There is a risk of injury. prevent someone being trapped in these sit- Make sure that nobody touches the side win- uations. There is a risk of injury. dow during the opening procedure. If some- When closing make sure that no parts of the body becomes trapped, release the switch or body are in the closing area. If someone pull the switch to close the side window again. becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. Opening and closing the side win- There is a risk of injury. dows Make sure that no body parts are in close The switches for all side windows are located proximity during the closing procedure. If on the driver's door. There is also a switch on somebody becomes trapped, release the each door for the corresponding side window. switch or press the switch to open the side The switches on the driver's door take prec- window again. edence. Side windows 95

Ropen the sliding sunroof Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the key. The key must be close to the driver's door handle.

Convenience opening feature

X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. : Front left Press and hold the % button until the ; Front right X side windows and the sliding sunroof are in = Rear right the desired position. ? Rear left X To interrupt convenience opening: X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition release the % button. lock. Opening and closing X To open: press the corresponding switch. X To close: pull the corresponding switch. Convenience closing feature i If you press the switch beyond the point Important safety notes of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding G WARNING direction. You can stop automatic opera- When the convenience closing feature is oper- tion by pressing again. ating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the i You can continue to operate the side win- sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. dows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains Observe the complete closing procedure active for five minutes or until the driver's when the convenience closing feature is oper- or front-passenger door is opened. ating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. i The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: the side windows is activated (Y page 66). With the key: Rrelease the & button. Convenience opening feature Rpress and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the General notes panorama sliding sunroof open again. You can ventilate the vehicle before you start With KEYLESS-GO: driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han- the following functions simultaneously: dle. Runlock the vehicle Rpull the door handle immediately and hold Ropen the side windows it. The side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof open.

Z 96 Side windows

General notes X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: door handle. Rclose the side windows Rclose the sliding sunroof Resetting the side windows

Using the key If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. The key must be close to the driver's door X Close all doors. handle. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door lock. handle. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door X Press and hold the & button until the control panel until the side window is com- side windows and the sliding sunroof are pletely closed. (Y page 94) fully closed. X Hold the switch for an additional second. X Make sure that all the side windows and the If the side window opens again slightly: Opening and closing sliding sunroof are closed. Immediately pull the corresponding switch To interrupt convenience closing: X X on the door control panel until the side win- release the & button. dow is completely closed (Y page 94). X Hold the switch for an additional second. Using KEYLESS-GO X If the corresponding side window remains The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the closed after the button has been released, vehicle. All the doors must be closed. the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :.

X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. Sliding sunroof 97

Problems with the side windows

G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A side window cannot X Remove the objects. be closed because it is X Close the side window. blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.

A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again Opening and closing be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:

X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Important safety notes WARNING G WARNING G While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, If children operate the sliding sunroof they body parts in close proximity could become could become trapped, particularly if they are trapped. There is a risk of injury. left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close When leaving the vehicle, always take the key proximity during the opening and closing pro- with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave cedures. children unattended in the vehicle. If somebody becomes trapped: ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof Rrelease the switch immediately, or if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal- Rduring automatic operation, push the functions may occur. switch briefly in any direction

Z 98 Sliding sunroof

Do not allow anything to protrude from the Operating the sliding sunroof sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. Opening and closing i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. To reduce or eliminate these noises: Rchange the position of the sliding sunroof Ropen a side window Ropen the sliding sunroof to the comfort setting

Overhead control panel Sliding sunroof reversing feature : To raise The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto- ; To open Opening and closing matic reversing feature. If a solid object = To close/lower blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens lock. again automatically. The automatic reversing Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre- function is only an aid and is not a substitute X for your attentiveness to the sliding sunroof sponding direction. while it is closing. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ G WARNING closing process is started in the corre- The reversing function does not react: sponding direction. When opening, the slid- Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- ing sunroof first automatically moves to gers comfort setting. If you press it again, the sliding sunroof opens completely. You can Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement stop automatic operation by pressing R during resetting again. Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing The sun protection cover automatically opens This means that the reversing function cannot along with the sliding sunroof. You can open prevent someone being trapped in these sit- or close the sun protection cover manually uations. There is a risk of injury. when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. When closing make sure that no parts of the i You can continue to operate the sliding body are in the closing area. sunroof after switching off the engine or If someone is trapped: removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a Rrelease the switch immediately or front door. Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. Sliding sunroof 99

Rain-closing feature When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Rafter six hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised in order to ventilate the vehicle interior. i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated. The sliding sunroof does not close if:

Rit is raised at the rear Opening and closing Rit is blocked Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor. If the vehicle, for example, is under a bridge or in a carport, the field of the sensor may be covered.

Resetting ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move smoothly.

X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (Y page 98). X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 98). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

Z 100 Sliding sunroof

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNING If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process The closing process is stopped.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens not be closed and you again slightly: Opening and closing cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:

X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. 101

Useful information ...... 102 Correct driver's seat position ...... 102 Seats ...... 103 Steering wheel ...... 111 Mirrors ...... 114 Memory function ...... 117 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 102 Correct driver's seat position

Useful information X Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 103). i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- X Make sure that seat = is correctly adjus- els, series and optional equipment for your ted. vehicle that were available at the time of Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 104) going to press. National variations are pos- When adjusting the seat, make sure that: sible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions descri- Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag bed. This is also the case for systems and as possible. functions relevant to safety. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. i Read the information on qualified special- Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. R ist workshops: (Y page 25). you have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou have set the seat angle so that your Correct driver's seat position thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. G WARNING X Check whether the head restraint is adjus- You could lose control of the vehicle while ted correctly. driving if you: When doing so, make sure that you have Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or adjusted the head restraint so that the back mirrors of your head is supported at eye level by Rfasten the seat belt the centre of the head restraint. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment ( page 111). Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- Y ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors belt before starting the engine. ted correctly. Adjusts the steering wheel manually (Y page 111) Adjusts the steering wheel electrically (Y page 112) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 51). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 52). Seats 103

The seat belt should: ment buttons and become trapped. There is Rfit snugly across your body. a risk of injury. Rbe routed across the middle of your shoul- While moving the seats, make sure that your der. hands or other body parts do not get under Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip the lever assembly of the seat adjustment joints. system. Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir- X WARNING ror and the exterior mirrors so that you G have a good view of road and traffic condi- When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle tions ( page 114). occupant could become trapped by the guide Y rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of save X Vehicles with a memory function: injury. the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings with the memory function Make sure that no one has any part of their ( page 117). body within the sweep of the seat when Y adjusting it.

WARNING Seats G The head restraints cannot provide the inten- Important safety notes ded protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk G WARNING of injury to the head and neck in the event of If children adjust the seats, they could an accident or sudden braking, for example. become trapped, especially if they are unat- Always drive with the head restraints fitted. tended. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints When leaving the vehicle, always take the key support the back of each vehicle occupant's with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave head at eye level before driving off.

children unattended in the vehicle. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level You could lose control of the vehicle while of protection if the backrest is not in the driving if you: upright position. When braking or in the event Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or of an accident, you could slide underneath the mirrors seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck inju- Rfasten the seat belt ries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the seat properly before beginning Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- your journey. Always make sure that the seat ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat is in the upright position. belt before starting the engine. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat G WARNING heating, observe the following information: If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If other vehicle occupants could be trapped and liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as thereby injured. Children in particular could soon as possible. accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat

Z 104 Seats

heating should also not be used to dry ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment the seats. A Backrest angle Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE- ® Rdo not transport heavy loads on the SAFE has been triggered, the front- seats. Do not place sharp objects on the passenger seat will be moved to a better seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. position if it was previously in an unfavour- The seats should only be occupied by able position. passengers, if possible. i You can store the seat settings using the Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do memory function (Y page 117). not cover the seats with insulating mate- i Vehicles with the through-loading feature rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov- and memory function: if you fold down a ers, child seats or booster seats. rear seat backrest, the respective front ! Make sure that there are no objects in the seat is moved forwards slightly if neces- footwell or behind the seats when moving sary. the seat back. There is a risk that the seats i Vehicles with memory function: when the and/or the objects could be damaged. seat is moved forwards or backwards, the i The head restraints in the front seats are headrest is moved up or down automati- fitted with the NECK-PRO system cally. (Y page 49). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. Adjusting the head restraints For more information, contact a qualified Important safety notes specialist workshop. i Further related subjects: G WARNING

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors You could lose control of the vehicle while R Rear bench seat through-loading feature driving if you: (Y page 310) Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Adjusting the seats Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. : Head restraint height Always drive with the head restraints fitted. ; Seat cushion angle Ensure that the centre of the head restraints = Seat height Seats 105

support the back of each vehicle occupant's Adjusting the head restraints electri- head at eye level before driving off. cally

General notes Observe the important safety guidelines for seats (Y page 103). Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position.

Adjusting the head restraints manually X To adjust the head restraint height: slide Adjusting the head restraint height the switch for head restraint adjustment : up or down in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right or left-hand Adjusting the angle of the head restraints side bolster : into the desired position.

X To adjust the angle of the head restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ;. i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.

X Push or pull the lower edge of the head restraint in the direction of the arrow.

Z 106 Seats

Rear seat head restraints X Pull or push the bottom of the head restraint until it has reached the desired Lowering the rear seat head restraints position. from the front i The tilt angle can only be adjusted on the two outer head restraints. The centre head restraint is only height-adjustable. Removing and fitting the rear seat head restraints G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X Always drive with the head restraints fitted. lock ( page 157). Y Ensure that the centre of the head restraints X Press button :. support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. Adjusting the rear seat head restraint angle ! Make sure that the rear window roller sunblind is retracted when removing the rear head restraints. Otherwise, you could damage the roller sunblind. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

CLS Coupé

X Pull or push the top of the head restraint until it is in the desired position. CLS Coupé

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157).

Adjusting the active multicontour seat Overview

CLS Shooting Brake

X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. : To adjust the seat cushion length X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. ; To switch the dynamic function on or off = To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest Adjusting the multicontour seat ? To switch the massage function on or off A To adjust the contour of the backrest to increase/decrease support

B To adjust the height/depth of the back- Seats, steering wheel and mirrors rest contour The active multicontour seat automatically adapts the sides of the backrest to your current driving style.

Dynamic function The dynamic function adjusts the air cushions : To adjust the thigh cushion in the side bolsters of the seat backrests to ; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum- ensure ideal lateral support at all times. You bar region can choose between two levels. = To adjust the backrest contour in the X To switch on: press button ; once or upper back region twice until the desired level is set. ? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat One or two indicator lamps in button ; backrest light up. You can adjust the contour of the front seats X To switch off: press button ; repeatedly individually so as to provide optimum support until all indicator lamps in button ; go out. for your back and sides.

Z 108 Seats

You can select the following levels: X Move adjustment lever : in the direction of the arrow until the desired backrest con- Level 1 (one indica- Standard setting: tour is achieved. tor lamp) slightly increased lateral support and slow build-up of air Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest. Level 2 (two indica- Sport setting: tor lamps) increased lateral support and fast build-up of pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest.

Massage function (PULSE) : To raise the backrest contour The massage function helps you to prevent ; To soften the backrest contour muscle tension on long journeys. You can choose between two levels. = To lower the backrest contour ? To harden the backrest contour X To switch on: press button ? once or twice until the desired level is set. You can adjust the contour of the front seat One or two indicator lamps in button ? backrests individually to provide optimum light up. The air cushions in the lumbar support for your back. region vibrate for approximately 20 minutes. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off Adjusting the lumbar support G WARNING If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occupants with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating repeatedly. You can adjust the contour of the driver's seat so as to provide optimum support for your back. Seats 109

Driver's and front-passenger seat The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.

X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly

until the desired heating level is set. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

Z 110 Seats

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con- switched off prema- sumers are switched on. turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as switched on. the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off Switching on/off

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons Seats, steering wheel and mirrors indicate the ventilation level you have selected.

X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 95). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. Steering wheel 111

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con- switched off prema- sumers are switched on. turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as switched on. the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation will switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING = To adjust the steering wheel position Children could become trapped by the steer- (fore-and-aft adjustment) ing wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of Push release lever : down completely. injury. X The steering column is unlocked. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key Adjust the steering wheel to the desired with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave X position. children unattended in the vehicle. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction.

Z 112 Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel electri- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch cally off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is switched off. i The steering wheel heating does not switch off automatically.

: To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 113) RStoring settings (Y page 117)

Steering wheel heating Switching on/off Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;. Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the key from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is switched off. Steering wheel 113

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the steering wheel The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con- heating indicator lamp sumers are switched on. is flashing, the steering X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as wheel heating has the rear window heating or interior lighting. switched off automati- Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel cally. heating will switch back on automatically.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. Important safety notes The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting WARNING G in and out of your vehicle easier. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts You can activate and deactivate the EASY- the steering wheel, you and other vehicle ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com- occupants – particularly children – could puter ( page 260). become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Y While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- Position of the steering wheel when the ing adjustments, make sure that no one has EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. The steering wheel tilts upwards if you: If someone is trapped: Rremove the key from the ignition lock Rpress one of the memory function position Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door; buttons, or KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1 in the Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- ignition lock ment in the opposite direction to that in Rwith the key: open the driver's door; the which the steering wheel is moving. key must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition The adjustment process is stopped. lock (Y page 157) i The steering wheel only moves upwards if G WARNING it has not already reached the upper end If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea- stop. ture, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. Position of the steering wheel for driv- When leaving the vehicle, always take the key ing with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave The steering wheel is moved to the previously children unattended in the vehicle. set position if: G WARNING Rthe driver's door is closed and If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT Rwith KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/ feature is making adjustments, you could lose Stop button once on vehicles with KEY- control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an LESS-GO accident.

Z 114 Mirrors

or Exterior mirrors Rwith the key: you insert the key into the ignition lock. Adjusting the exterior mirrors If you close the driver's door with the key G WARNING inserted in the ignition lock, the steering You could lose control of the vehicle while wheel is automatically moved to the previ- driving if you: ously set position. Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or The last position of the steering wheel is mirrors stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store the setting with the memory Rfasten the seat belt function (Y page 117). There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column WARNING will move upwards when the driver's door is G opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi- The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the tion of the key in the ignition lock. This makes image. Objects visible in the mirrors are it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the closer than they appear. You could misjudge occupants. the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is is a risk of an accident. only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer. You should therefore always look over your ( page 260) shoulder to determine the actual distance Y from road users driving behind you.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Mirrors Rear-view mirror

X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte- X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. rior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected Mirrors 115

mirror using adjustment button = as long be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise as the indicator lamp is lit. not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted computer (Y page 261) the exterior mirror to the correct position. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition You should have a good overview of traffic lock (Y page 157). conditions. X Briefly press button :. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. Folding the exterior mirrors in/out After the engine has been started, the exte- automatically rior mirrors are automatically heated if the If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function rear window heating is switched on and the is activated in the on-board computer outside temperature is low. Heating takes a ( page 261): maximum of ten minutes. Y Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as i The exterior mirrors can also be heated soon as you lock the vehicle from the out- manually by switching on the rear window side. heating. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and Folding the exterior mirrors in/out elec- then open the driver's or front-passenger trically door. i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of Seats, steering wheel and mirrors position (forwards or backwards), proceed as follows.

X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. Turn the key to position or in the ignition X 1 2 Vehicles with electrically folding exte- lock ( page 157). X Y rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding X Briefly press button :. button : until you hear a click and the Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. mirror engages audibly into position i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are (Y page 115). always folded out fully while driving. They The mirror housing is engaged again and could otherwise vibrate. you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual ( page 114). i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, you Y can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must

Z 116 Mirrors

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror side moves to the preset parking position. on the driver's side automatically go into anti- Use adjustment button to adjust the dazzle mode if the following conditions are X = met simultaneously: exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. Rthe ignition is switched on and The parking position is stored. Rincident light from headlamps strikes the i If you shift the transmission to another sensor in the rear-view mirror position, the exterior mirror on the front- The mirrors do not dip if reverse gear is passenger side returns to the driving posi- engaged or if the interior lighting is switched tion. on. Using the memory button

Parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Button for the exterior mirror on the driver's side ; Button for the exterior mirror on the front- Seats, steering wheel and mirrors passenger side = Adjustment button ? Memory button M : Button for the exterior mirror on the driv- You can set the front-passenger side exterior er's side mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on ; Button for the exterior mirror on the front- that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. passenger side This setting can be stored using memory but- = Adjustment button ton M?.

? Memory button M X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition You can set the front-passenger side exterior lock (Y page 157). mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on X With the exterior mirror on the front- that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. passenger side activated, use adjustment You can store this position. button = to adjust the exterior mirror. The rear wheel and the kerb should be visible in X Park the vehicle and turn the key to posi- the exterior mirror. tion 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. Memory function 117

X Press memory button M ? and one of the Memory function arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. Storing settings The parking position is stored if the exterior WARNING mirror does not move. G If you use the memory function on the driver's X If the exterior mirror moves out of position, side while driving, the adjustments could repeat the steps. cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Calling up a stored parking position set- Only use the memory function on the driver's ting side while the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING If children activate the memory function, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three dif- : Button for the exterior mirror on the driv- ferent people. er's side The following settings are stored as a single ; Button for the exterior mirror on the front- memory preset: passenger side Rposition of the seat, backrest and head = Adjustment button restraint. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ? Memory button M RActive multicontour seat: seat contour, X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition dynamic function level lock (Y page 157). Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir- X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- rors on the driver's and front-passenger passenger side using button ;. sides

X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side

Z 118 Memory function

X Adjust the seat (Y page 104). X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 112) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 114). X Press memory button M and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting

X Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 119

Useful information ...... 120 Exterior lighting ...... 120 Interior lighting ...... 128 Replacing bulbs ...... 129 Windscreen wipers ...... 130 Lights and windscreen wipers 120 Exterior lighting

Useful information If the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- "extended range foglamps" functions (Intelli- els, series and optional equipment for your gent Light System) are not available. vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be Setting the exterior lighting equipped with all of the functions descri- Setting options bed. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Exterior lighting can be set using the: i Read the information on qualified special- Rlight switch R ist workshops: (Y page 25). combination switch (Y page 123) Ron-board computer (Y page 256)

Exterior lighting Light switch

General notes Operation For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. Therefore, your vehicle is equipped with special daytime driving lamps. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations.

Driving abroad Lights and windscreen wipers Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps 1W Left-hand parking lamps If your journey takes you to countries where 2X Right-hand parking lamps vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- road to the country in which the vehicle is ment cluster lighting registered, your headlamps must be switched 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- to symmetrical dipped beam. This prevents led by the light sensor oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Sym- metrical lights do not illuminate as large an 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- area of the edge of the carriageway. lamps BR Rear foglamp Convert the headlamps as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries If you hear a warning tone when you leave the (Y page 256). vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.

X Turn the light switch to Ã. Asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps Convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border (Y page 256). Exterior lighting 121

The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ Ã is the preferred light switch setting. The parking lamps) switches off automatically if light setting is automatically selected accord- you: ing to the brightness of the ambient light Rremove the key from the ignition lock (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): Ropen the driver's door with the key in position 0 RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automat- Automatic headlamp mode ically depending on the brightness of the G WARNING ambient light. When the light switch is set to Ã, the RWith the engine running: if you have dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched switched on the daytime driving lights func- on automatically if there is fog, snow or other tion in the on-board computer, the daytime causes of poor visibility due to the weather driving lights or the side lamps and dipped- conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an beam headlamps are switched on or off accident. automatically depending on the brightness In such situations, turn the light switch to of the ambient light. L. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. The automatic headlamp feature is only an The daytime driving lights improve the detect- aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's ability of your vehicle during the day. Here, lighting at all times. the daytime driving lights function must be switched on via the on-board computer (Y page 256). When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and the

daytime driving lights are switched off or dim. Lights and windscreen wipers Dipped-beam headlamps G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the 1W Left-hand parking lamps dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other 2X Right-hand parking lamps causes of poor visibility due to the weather 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an ment cluster lighting accident. 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- In such situations, turn the light switch to led by the light sensor L. 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps BR Rear foglamp

Z 122 Exterior lighting

Rear foglamp

1W Left-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps 1W Left-hand parking lamps 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- 2X Right-hand parking lamps ment cluster lighting 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- ment cluster lighting led by the light sensor 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- led by the light sensor lamps 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- BR Rear foglamp lamps When the ignition is switched on and the light BR Rear foglamp switch is in the L position, the side lamps The rear foglamp improves the visibility of and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on your vehicle in heavy fog for the following even if the light sensor does not sense dark traffic. Please observe the country-specific ambient light conditions. This is advanta- laws on the use of rear foglamps. geous when there is fog or rain. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the

Lights and windscreen wipers X To switch on the dipped-beam head- key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to the engine. position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. Turn the light switch to L. X Press the R button. The green L indicator lamp in the instru- X The yellow R indicator lamp in the ment cluster lights up. instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Side lamps ! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the side lamps or parking lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T side lamps for several Exterior lighting 123

hours. If possible, switch on the X right 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- or the W left parking lamp. lamps BR Rear foglamp Switching on the parking lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.

X To switch on the parking lamps: the key is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). 1W Left-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- Combination switch ment cluster lighting Turn signals 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps BR Rear foglamp

X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Lights and windscreen wipers Parking lamps : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = Headlamp flasher ? Turn signal, left

X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch 1W Left-hand parking lamps beyond the pressure point in the direction 2X Right-hand parking lamps of arrow ; or ?. 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instrument cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor

Z 124 Exterior lighting

Main-beam headlamps Headlamp flasher

: Main-beam headlamps : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right ; Turn signal, right = Headlamp flasher = Headlamp flasher ? Turn signal, left ? Turn signal, left

X To switch on the main-beam head- X To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine. position 2 or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. of arrow =. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. Hazard warning lamps In the Ã position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. Lights and windscreen wipers The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, press button :. it controls activation of the main-beam All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, headlamps (Y page 126). only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. Exterior lighting 125

The hazard warning lamps switch on auto- Active light function matically if: Ran airbag is deployed or Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of over 10 km/h again after a full brake application. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this Headlamp cleaning system way, relevant areas remain illuminated while The headlamps are cleaned automatically if driving. This allows you to recognise pedes- the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is oper- trians, cyclists and animals. ated five times (Y page 130) while the lights Active: when the lights are switched on. are on and the engine is running. When you switch off the ignition, the automatic head- Cornering light function lamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0.

Intelligent Light System

General notes Lights and windscreen wipers The Intelligent Light System is a system that adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. It offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending The cornering light function improves the illu- on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. mination of the road over a wide angle in the The system includes the active light function, direction you are turning, enabling better vis- cornering light function, motorway mode and ibility in tight bends, for example. It can only extended range foglamps. The system is only be activated when the dipped-beam head- active when it is dark. lamps are switched on. You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent Active: Light System" using the on-board computer Rif you are driving at speeds below (Y page 256). 40 km/h and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steering wheel

Z 126 Exterior lighting

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above Not active: if, following activation, you are 40 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you the steering wheel to the straight-ahead posi- switch off the rear foglamp. tion. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after Adaptive Highbeam Assist no more than three minutes. Important safety notes

Motorway mode G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognise road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist recognises road users too late or not at all. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an Active: if you are driving at a speed above accident. 110 km/h and do not make any large steering Always carefully observe the traffic conditions movements for at least 1000 m or if you are and switch off the main-beam headlamps in driving at a speed above 130 km/h. good time. Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation.

Lights and windscreen wipers Extended range foglamps

The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve You can use this function to set the head- the illumination of the edge of the carriage- lamps to change between dipped beam and way. main beam automatically. The system recog- Active: if you are driving at speeds below nises vehicles with their lights on, either 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp. approaching from the opposite direction or travelling in front of your vehicle, and conse- Exterior lighting 127 quently switches the headlamps from main The main-beam headlamps are switched on beam to dipped beam. automatically. The K indicator lamp in The system automatically adapts the dipped- the instrument cluster also lights up. beam headlamp range depending on the dis- If you are driving at speeds below tance to the other vehicle. Once the system 45 km/h or other road users are recog- no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac- nised or the roads are adequately lit: tivates the main-beam headlamps. The main-beam headlamps are switched off The system's optical sensor is located behind automatically. The K indicator lamp in the windscreen near the overhead control the instrument cluster goes out. The _ panel. indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist X To switch off: move the combination on/off switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Headlamps misted up on the inside The headlamps may mist up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity.

X Switch on the lights and drive off. The level of moisture diminishes, depend- : Main-beam headlamps ing on the length of the journey and the ; Turn signal, right weather conditions (humidity and temper- = Headlamp flasher ature). If the level of moisture does not diminish: Lights and windscreen wipers ? Turn signal, left Have the headlamps checked at a qualified X To switch on: turn the light switch to X Ã. specialist workshop.

X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the dipped-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 45 km/h: The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 55 km/h and no other road users are recognised:

Z 128 Interior lighting

Interior lighting Interior lighting control Overview of interior lighting General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The colour and brightness of the ambient lighting may be set using the on-board computer (Y page 257).

Automatic interior lighting control Front overhead control panel : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p Switches the right-hand front reading lamp on/off ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off A p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off Front overhead control panel : u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off Lights and windscreen wipers ; | To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off ? c To switch the front interior lighting on/off A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off

Rear-compartment overhead control panel X To activate/deactivate: press the | : p Switches the right-hand reading button. lamp on/off When the automatic interior lighting con- ; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp trol is activated, the button is flush with the on/off overhead control panel. Replacing bulbs 129

The interior lighting automatically switches Crash-responsive emergency lighting on if you: The interior lighting is activated automatically Runlock the vehicle if the vehicle is involved in an accident. Ropen a door X To switch off the crash-responsive Rremove the key from the ignition lock emergency lighting: press the hazard The interior lighting is activated for a short warning lamp button. time when the key is removed from the igni- or tion lock. You can activate this delayed Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the switch-off using the on-board computer X key. (Y page 258).

Manual interior lighting control Replacing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs

G DANGER Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You can get an electric shock if you remove the cover of the xenon bulb and touch the electrical contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. Never touch the parts or the electrical con- Front overhead control panel tacts of the xenon bulb. Always have work on the xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe- : u To switch the rear interior lighting cialist workshop. on/off.

; | To switch the automatic interior Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of Lights and windscreen wipers lighting control on/off vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure = p To switch the right-hand reading that these function correctly at all times. lamp on/off Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. ? c To switch the front interior lighting on/off LED lamps A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp You can neither replace xenon bulbs nor LED on/off bulbs. Have LED bulbs changed at a qualified X To switch the front interior lighting on/ specialist workshop. off: press the c button. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure off: press the u button. that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. Other bulbs

G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during use. When replacing

Z 130 Windscreen wipers

a bulb, you could burn yourself on these com- Replacing the rear bulbs ponents. There is a risk of injury. Reversing lamp Allow these components to cool down before replacing the bulb.

There are bulbs other than xenon and LED bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 130). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination Lamp cluster can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint- X Switch off the lights. free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb X Open the boot or luggage compartment. when fitting. X Reach up into the side panelling and pull Only use bulbs of the correct type. downwards until the lamp cluster is easily If the new bulb still does not light up, consult accessible. a qualified specialist workshop. X Press the detent of connector ; and pull Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of out connector ;. vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure X Use a suitable tool to loosen and remove that these function correctly at all times. four nuts :. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. X Remove the entire lamp cluster. X Turn bulb holder = anti-clockwise and pull Lights and windscreen wipers Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs it out. Pull out the bulb. You can replace the following bulbs. The X details for the bulb type can be found in the X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder =. legend. X Insert bulb holder = into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Reinsert the lamp cluster. X Tighten four nuts :. X Push in connector ; until it engages. X Insert the side panelling.

Windscreen wipers Switching the windscreen wipers on/ Tail lamps off : Reversing lamp: W 16 W ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust Windscreen wipers 131

that has collected on the windscreen can X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition scratch the glass if wiping takes place when lock. the windscreen is dry. X Turn the combination switch to the corre- If it is necessary to switch on the wind- sponding position. screen wipers in dry weather conditions, In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate always operate them using washer fluid. wiping frequency is set automatically accord- ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Å the windscreen after the vehicle has been position, the rain sensor is more sensitive washed in an automatic car wash, this may than in the Ä position, causing the wind- be due to wax or other residue. Clean the screen wipers to wipe more frequently. windscreen with washer fluid after an auto- If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen matic car wash. will no longer be wiped properly. This could ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due prevent you from observing the traffic condi- to optical influences and the windscreen tions. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, ideally in spring and autumn. the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the wind- Switching the rear window wiper on/ screen. off For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Lights and windscreen wipers

Combination switch : è Switch Combination switch 2 ô To wipe with washer fluid 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping set to low sensitivity) 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition set to high sensitivity) X lock. 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow X Turn switch : on the combination switch 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast to the corresponding position. B í Single wipe/î to wipe the wind- When the rear window wiper is switched on, screen using washer fluid the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

Z 132 Windscreen wipers

Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes

G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. X Remove the wiper blade from the retaining ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the blades, make sure that you touch only the arrow. wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. Fitting the wiper blades ! Never open the bonnet/tailgate if a wiper arm is folded away from the windscreen/ X Push the new wiper blade onto the retain- rear window. ing pin on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow. Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/ Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully rear window. onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper you change the wiper blade. If you release arm. the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind- falls onto the windscreen/rear window, the screen. windscreen/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Changing the wiper blades (version 2) Lights and windscreen wipers Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified Removing the wiper blades specialist workshop. X Remove the key from the ignition lock or Depending on the equipment level of your turn the key to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO). vehicle, there are two variants of wiper blade; X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- these are fitted and removed in different screen until it engages. ways. Based on the diagrams, check which system is fitted in your vehicle.

Changing the wiper blades (version 1)

Removing the wiper blades X Remove the key from the ignition lock or turn the key to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO). X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. Windscreen wipers 133

X Firmly press release knob : and pull the X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in correctly. the direction of the arrow. X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper arm :. Fitting the wiper blades X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win- X Position the new wiper blade in the retainer on the wiper arm and slide it into place in dow. the opposite direction to the arrow. The wiper blade audibly engages. X Make sure that wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing the wiper blades Lights and windscreen wipers

X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window until it engages. X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to wiper arm :.

X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the direction of the arrow until it releases. X Remove wiper blade ;.

Fitting a wiper blade X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :.

X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages.

Z 134 Windscreen wipers

Problems with the windscreen wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.

X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Lights and windscreen wipers 135

Useful information ...... 136 Overview of climate control systems ...... 136 Operating the climate control system ...... 140 Adjusting the air vents ...... 152 Climate control 136 Overview of climate control systems

Useful information i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely fil- i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol- els, series and optional equipment for your lutants and odours. A clogged filter reduces vehicle that were available at the time of the amount of air supplied to the vehicle going to press. National variations are pos- interior. For this reason, you should always sible. Note that your vehicle may not be observe the interval for replacing the filter, equipped with all of the functions descri- which is specified in the Service Booklet. bed. This is also the case for systems and As it depends on environmental conditions, functions relevant to safety. e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. To prevent the windows from misting up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Climate control Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windscreen function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved when the side windows and the roof are closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 147). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 95). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. Overview of climate control systems 137

Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone)

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 143) ; To demist the windscreen (Y page 144) = To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 144) ? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 141) A To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 145) Climate control B To set the temperature, right (Y page 143) C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 146) D To set the air distribution (Y page 143) E To increase the airflow (Y page 144) F To reduce the airflow (Y page 144) G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 140) H To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 142)

Information about using THERMATIC ROnly use the "windscreen demisting" func- automatic climate control tion briefly until the windscreen is clear again. Automatic climate control ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. The following contains notes and recommen- if there are unpleasant outside odours or dations on optimum use of THERMATIC auto- when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- matic climate control. erwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into RActivate climate control using the Ã and the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem- the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. perature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indi- RSet the temperature to 22 †. 138 Overview of climate control systems

cator lamp above the á button goes out. RVehicles with COMAND Online Multime- dia-System: if you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. See also the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions.

ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 162). Climate control Overview of climate control systems 139

Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone)

Front control panel : To set the temperature, left (Y page 143) ; To demist the windscreen (Y page 144) = To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 147) ? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification ( page 141)

Y Climate control A To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 145) B To set the temperature, right (Y page 143) C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 144) D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 140) E To set the air distribution (Y page 143) F To increase the airflow (Y page 144) G To reduce the airflow (Y page 144) H To set the climate mode (Y page 142) I To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 146) J To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 142)

Rear control panel K To increase the airflow (Y page 144) L To reduce the airflow (Y page 144) M Display

N To reduce the temperature (Y page 143) O To increase the temperature (Y page 143) 140 Operating the climate control system

Information about using ECO start/stop function THERMOTRONIC automatic climate During automatic engine switch-off, the cli- control mate control only operates at a reduced capa- Automatic climate control city. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop The following contains instructions and rec- function by pressing the ECO button ommendations to enable you to get the most (Y page 162). out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the Ã and Operating the climate control system ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above Switching climate control on/off the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. RIn automatic mode, you can also use the Points to observe before use ñ button to set a climate mode When the climate control is switched off, the (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The air supply and air circulation are also MEDIUM level is recommended. switched off. The windows could mist up. RSet the temperature to 22 †. Therefore, switch off the climate control only ROnly use the "windscreen demisting" func- briefly. tion briefly until the windscreen is clear i Activate climate control primarily using again. the Ã button (Y page 142). ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.

Climate control if there are unpleasant outside odours or Switching on/off when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. lock (Y page 157). RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem- X To switch on: press the Ã button on perature settings on the driver's side for the control panel for the climate control. the front-passenger side and the rear com- The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights partment as well. The indicator lamp above up. Airflow and air distribution are set to the á button goes out. automatic mode. RUse the residual heat function if you want or to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior X Press the ^ button. when the ignition is switched off. The resid- The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes ual heat function can only be activated or out. The previous settings are reactivated. deactivated with the ignition switched off. X To switch off: press the ^ button. RVehicles with COMAND Online Multime- The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights dia-System: if you change the settings of up. the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. See also the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. Operating the climate control system 141

Switching the cooling with air dehumidification function on/off Points to observe before use If you deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled during warm weather. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Activating/deactivating Climate control

X To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. i In vehicles with auxiliary heating, one of the indicator lamps on the auxiliary heating button lights up when the "cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated.

X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature. 142 Operating the climate control system

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a the ¿ button malfunction.

flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. remains off. The cooling system with dehu- midifier cannot be switched on.

Setting climate control to automatic X To switch to manual mode: press the mode _ button. or Points to observe before use X Press the I or K button. In automatic mode, the set temperature is The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes maintained automatically at a constant level. out. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. Setting the climate mode

Climate control The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" The "Set climate mode" function is only avail- function is activated. If desired, cooling with able with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate air dehumidification can be deactivated. control. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- In automatic mode you can select the follow- midification" function, the air inside the vehi- ing climate modes: cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- cooler dows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting only switch off cooling with air dehumidifica- DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly tion for a short period. warmer and with less of a draught To activate/switch X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Press the Ã button. lock ( page 157). X Y Press the ñ button repeatedly until the Set the desired temperature. X X desired climate mode appears in the dis- X To activate: press the Ã button. play. The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode (Y page 142). Operating the climate control system 143

Setting the temperature X Turn temperature control : clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 139). THERMATIC automatic climate control Only change the temperature setting in Different temperatures can be set for the small increments. Start at 22 †. driver's and front-passenger sides. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the rear compartment Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X and the front-passenger side. lock (Y page 157). To increase/reduce the temperature in To increase/reduce: turn temperature X X the rear compartment using the rear control : or B clockwise or anti-clock- control panel: press the r or s wise ( page 137). Y button on the rear control panel. Only change the temperature setting in Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. small increments. Start at 22 †. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents Climate control S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents ¯ Directs the airflow through the demis- THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control zones ter vents You can select different temperature settings b Directs the airflow through the demis- for the driver's and front-passenger sides as ter, centre and side air vents (only for well as for the rear compartment. certain countries). a Directs the airflow through the foot- Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X well and demister vents lock (Y page 157). _ Directs the airflow through the demis- To increase/reduce the temperature in X ter vents, the centre and side air vents the front compartment: turn temperature as well as the footwell air vents control : or B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 139). i Regardless of the air distribution setting, Only change the temperature setting in airflow is always directed through the side small increments. Start at 22 †. air vents. The side air vents can only be X To increase/reduce the temperature in closed when the controls on the side air the rear compartment using the front vents are turned downwards. control panel: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. 144 Operating the climate control system

To set the air distribution Demisting the windscreen

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition You can use this function to defrost the wind- lock (Y page 157). screen or to demist the inside of the wind- X Press the _ button repeatedly until the screen and the side windows. desired symbol appears in the display. Switch off the "windscreen demisting" function as soon as the windscreen is clear again.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Setting the airflow lock (Y page 157). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X To activate: press the ¬ button. lock (Y page 157). The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights X To increase: press the K button. up. The climate control system switches to the X To reduce: press the I button. following functions: i You can use THERMOTRONIC automatic Rhigh airflow climate control to set the airflow in the rear Rhigh temperature compartment separately. Rair distribution to the windscreen and If the battery is not charged sufficiently, the front side windows blower output may be reduced. Once the bat- Rair-recirculation mode off tery is sufficiently charged again, full blower output will be available. If the battery is not charged sufficiently, the blower output may be reduced. Once the bat-

Climate control tery is sufficiently charged again, full blower Switching the ZONE function on/off output will be available again. press the ¬ button. X To switch on: press the á button. X To deactivate: The indicator lamp above the á button The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes lights up. out. The previous settings are reactivated. Air-recirculation mode remains deactiva- THERMATIC automatic climate control: the ted. temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. or THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con- X Press the Ã button. trol: the temperature setting for the driver's The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes side is not adopted for the front-passenger out. Airflow and air distribution are set to side and the rear compartment. automatic mode. X To switch off: press the á button. or The indicator lamp above the á button X THERMATIC automatic climate control: goes out. turn temperature controls : or B clock- THERMATIC automatic climate control: the wise or anti-clockwise (Y page 137). temperature setting for the driver's side is THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con- adopted for the front-passenger side. trol: turn temperature controls : or B THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con- clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 139). trol: the temperature setting for the driver's or side is adopted for the front-passenger side X Press the K or I button. and the rear compartment. Operating the climate control system 145

Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside

X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X Adjust the side air vents so that the heated air is directed towards the side windows. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the "windscreen demisting" function (Y page 144). i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again.

Windows misted up on the outside

X Press the _ button repeatedly until the P or O symbol appears in the display. X Adjust the side air vents so that no air is directed towards the side windows. Climate control

Rear window heating Switching on/off The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. It otherwise switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. 146 Operating the climate control system

Problems with the rear window heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window heat- The battery has not been sufficiently charged. ing has switched off X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading prematurely or cannot lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula- g button does not light up. Outside air tion mode is added after about 30 minutes. Points to observe before use X To deactivate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if out. unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto- from outside. The air already inside the vehi- matically: cle will then be recirculated. R If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the after approximately five minutes at out- windows can mist up more quickly, in partic- side temperatures below approximately ular at low temperatures. Only use air-recir- 5 † Rafter approximately five minutes if cool- Climate control culation mode briefly to prevent the windows misting up. ing with air dehumidification is deactiva- The operation of air-recirculation mode is the ted same for all control panels. Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately Switching on/off 5 † if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To activate: press the g button. Convenience opening/closing using The indicator lamp in the g button lights the air-recirculation button up. WARNING i THERMATIC automatic climate control: G When the convenience closing feature is oper- air-recirculation mode is activated auto- ating, parts of the body could become trapped matically at high outside temperatures. in the closing area of the side window and the THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con- sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. trol: air-recirculation mode is automatically Observe the complete closing procedure activated at high levels of pollution or at when the convenience closing feature is oper- high outside temperatures. ating. When closing make sure that no parts When air-recirculation mode is activated of the body are in the closing area. automatically, the indicator lamp above the G WARNING During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped Operating the climate control system 147

between the side window and window frame. Activating/deactivating the residual There is a risk of injury. heat function When opening, make sure that nobody is The residual heat function is only available touching the side window. If someone with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con- becomes trapped, press the W switch trol. immediately to open/close the side window It is possible to make use of the residual heat in the door. The side window stops. To con- of the engine to continue heating the vehicle tinue closing the side window, pull on the for approximately 30 minutes after the engine W switch. has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been Convenience closing feature: press and X set for the vehicle interior. hold the g button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition The indicator lamp in the g button lights lock or remove it (Y page 157). up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. X To activate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights If parts of the body are in the closing area up. during convenience closing, proceed as follows: i If the residual heat function is activated, the windows may mist up on the inside. X Press the W button for opening/closing the side windows. i The blower will run at a low speed regard- The side window stops. less of the airflow setting.

X To then open the side window, press the i If you activate the residual heat function Climate control W button again. at high temperatures, only the ventilation X Press the 3 button for opening/closing will be activated. The blower runs at the sliding roof. medium speed. The sliding sunroof stops. X To deactivate: press the Ì button. X To open the sliding sunroof, press the The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes 3 button again. out. i Notes on the automatic reversing func- Residual heat is deactivated automatically: tion for: Rafter approximately 30 minutes R the side window (Y page 94) Rwhen the ignition is switched on R the sliding sunroof (Y page 98) Rif the battery voltage drops X Convenience opening feature: press and Rwhen the auxiliary heating is switched on hold the g button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof have opened. The side windows and the sliding sunroof Auxiliary heating move back to their original position. The indicator lamp in the g button goes Important safety notes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. G DANGER i If you open the side windows or the sliding If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient sunroof manually after closing with the ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust convenience closing feature, they will fumes can enter the vehicle, especially car- remain in this position when opened using bon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in the convenience opening feature.

Z 148 Operating the climate control system

enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in The auxiliary heating switches off automati- snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. cally after 50 minutes. This time limit can be You should switch off the auxiliary heating in altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist enclosed spaces which do not have an extrac- workshop. tion system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary cool the vehicle interior to a temperature heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and lower than the outside temperature. the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open Before switching on a window on the side of the vehicle away from Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition the wind. X lock (Y page 157). X Set the desired temperature. G WARNING When the auxiliary heating is switched on, Auxiliary heating or ventilation can also be parts of the vehicle can become very hot. switched on if the manually set climate con- Flammable material such as leaves, grass or trol is activated. Optimum comfort can be twigs may ignite if they come into contact with attained when the system is set to automatic hot parts of the exhaust system for extended mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. periods. There is a risk of fire. The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti- When the auxiliary heating is switched on, vated or deactivated using the remote control make sure that no flammable material can or the button on the centre console. come into contact with hot vehicle compo- The on-board computer can be used to spec-

Climate control nents. ify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 259). ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventilation draws on the vehicle battery. After you Switching the auxiliary heating/venti- have heated or ventilated the vehicle a lation on/off using the centre console maximum of two times, drive for a longer button distance. The colours of the indicator lamps on the but- i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly ton have the following meanings: once a month for about ten minutes. Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehi- Red Auxiliary heating switched on cle interior to the set temperature. This occurs without using the heat of the running Yellow Departure time preselected engine. The auxiliary heating is operated (Y page 259) directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank content must be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. Operating the climate control system 149

low. Replace the remote control battery (Y page 150). Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off

Switch in the centre console

X To switch auxiliary heating/ventilation on: press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : lights up. Remote control X To switch auxiliary heating/ventilation : Display off: press button :. ; . To check the status/set the depar- The red or blue indicator lamp in but- ture time ton : goes out. = ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/ ventilation Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-

? To switch on the auxiliary heating/ Climate control lation on/off using the remote control u ventilation Points to observe before use A , To check the status/set the depar- Your vehicle comes with one remote control. ture time

You may use two additional remote controls X To activate: press the u button. for your vehicle. For more information, please ON is shown in the remote control display. contact a qualified specialist workshop. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The remote control has a maximum range of OFF is shown in the remote control display. approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: Checking the status of the auxiliary heat- Rsources of radio interference ing/ventilation Rsolid objects between the remote control X Press the , or . button. and the vehicle The following messages may appear in the Rthe remote control being in an unfavoura- display: ble position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space Display Meaning i The optimum range can be achieved if you The auxiliary heating/ hold the remote control vertically, pointing ventilation is switched upwards when you press one of the but- off. tons. i A battery symbol appears in the display when the battery in the remote control is

Z 150 Operating the climate control system

The auxiliary ventilation i The longer you press the , or . is switched on. The num- button, the faster the time changes. ber in the display shows X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta- the remaining time (in neously. minutes) for the auxiliary The new departure time is stored. ventilation. Activating the set departure time The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number X Press the , or . button repeatedly in the display shows the until the desired departure time appears in remaining time (in the display. minutes) for the auxiliary X Press the u button. heating. The Í symbol and the departure time appear in the display. A departure time has been activated. The Deactivating a set departure time departure time appears X Press the , or . button. in the display. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown A departure time has in the display. been activated. The aux- X Press the . button. iliary ventilation is cur- The first departure time stored appears in rently activated. The the display. departure time appears

Climate control X Press the ^ button. in the display. OFF is shown in the remote control display. A departure time has been activated. The aux- Replacing the remote control battery iliary heating is currently activated. The departure G WARNING time appears in the dis- Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- play. ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal Setting the departure time injury. X Press the , or . button repeatedly Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If until the time to be changed appears in the a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention display. immediately. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. H Environmental note The Î symbol in the remote control dis- Batteries contain pollutants. play flashes. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. X Press the , or . button to set the desired departure time. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an Operating the climate control system 151

environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a col- lection point for used batteries.

One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is required. Climate control X Prise apart the side arms of battery cover ; and pull off battery cover ;.

X Remove old battery :. X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity signs on the back of the remote control when doing so. X Slide battery cover ; back onto the remote control. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions.

Z 152 Adjusting the air vents

Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty.

X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle $ is faulty. FAIL X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control.

There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, i.e. the fuel tank is not © filled to the reserve fuel level. FAIL X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

Climate control X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control.

The auxiliary heating is faulty.

X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Adjusting the air vents In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, Important safety notes please observe the following notes: G WARNING Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air and the bonnet free of blockages, such as vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in ice, snow or leaves. the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles is a risk of injury. in the vehicle interior. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. Adjusting the air vents 153

Setting the centre air vents At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove compartment could be damaged.

: Centre air vent, left ; Centre air vent, right = Centre vent thumbwheel, right ? Centre vent thumbwheel, left : Air vent thumbwheel

X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = ; Air vent and ? up or down. When automatic climate control is activated, the glove compartment can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of air- Setting the side air vents flow depends on the airflow and air distribu-

tion settings. Climate control

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or anti-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment air vents Setting the centre vents in the rear compartment

: Demister vent ; Side air vent = Control for side air vent

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or down.

Setting the glove compartment air vent ! Close the air vent when heating the vehi- Example: CLS Coupé cle. : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ; Rear-compartment air vent, right

Z 154 Adjusting the air vents

= Rear control panel, only with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control ? Rear-compartment air vent, left

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or down. Climate control 155

Useful information ...... 156 Running-in notes ...... 156 Driving ...... 156 Automatic transmission ...... 165 Refuelling ...... 175 Parking ...... 180 Driving tips ...... 182 Driving systems ...... 186 Towing a trailer ...... 233 Driving and parking 156 Driving

Useful information After 1500 km, you may gradually accelerate the vehicle to full road and engine speeds. i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles: els, series and optional equipment for your RDo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for vehicle that were available at the time of the first 1500 km. going to press. National variations are pos- ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum sible. Note that your vehicle may not be engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly. equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and i You should also observe these notes on functions relevant to safety. running-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). AMG vehicles with self-locking rear

Driving and parking axle differential Running-in notes Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking Important safety notes differential on the rear axle. Change the oil New brake pads/linings and discs that have after a running-in period of 3000 km to been replaced only achieve optimum braking improve protection of the rear axle differen- effect after several hundred kilometres of tial. This oil change prolongs the service life driving. Compensate for the reduced braking of the differential. Have the oil change carried effect by applying greater force to the brake out at a qualified specialist workshop. pedal.

Driving The first 1500 km Important safety notes If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with G WARNING excellent performance for the remainder of Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the the engine's life. pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine is jeopardised. There is a risk of an accident. speeds for the first 1500 km. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter period, e.g. driving at full throttle. the driver's footwell. Fit the floormats RChange gear in good time, before the rev securely and as specified in order to ensure counter needle is Ô of the way to the red sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use area of the rev counter. loose floormats. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. G WARNING RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick- of the pedals, e.g.: down). Rshoes with thick soles R The shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 should only be Rshoes with high heels engaged when driving slowly, e.g. when R driving in mountainous terrain. slippers Driving 157

There is a risk of an accident. Key positions Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct Key usage of the pedals.

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

g To remove the key Driving and parking WARNING G 1 Power supply for some consumers, such If the parking brake has not been fully as the windscreen wipers released when driving, the parking brake can: 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) Roverheat and cause a fire and drive position Rlose its hold function. 3 To start the engine There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, the parking brake fully before driving off. it can still be turned in the ignition lock. ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use However, the ignition will not be switched the engine's full performance until it has on. The engine cannot be started. reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the KEYLESS-GO respective drive positions when the vehicle General notes is stationary. RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together Where possible, avoid spinning the drive with: wheels when pulling away on slippery - electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone roads. Otherwise, you could damage the or another key drive train. - metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper- RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together atures (below +20 †), the maximum with metallic objects, such as a metal case, engine speed is restricted in order to pro- for example. tect the engine. To protect the engine and This can affect the functionality of KEY- maintain smooth engine operation, avoid LESS-GO. driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with keys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the key must be in the vehicle.

Z 158 Driving

Pressing the Start/Stop button several times Removing the Start/Stop button in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. Driving and parking i When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use Start/Stop button :. You can remove the Start/Stop button from Switching on the power supply the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop key being removed from the ignition. button from the ignition lock when you X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :. leave the vehicle. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. Starting the engine i If you then open the driver's door when in Important safety notes this position, the power supply is deactivated. G WARNING Switching on the ignition If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop button : twice. Ropen the doors, thus endangering other The ignition is switched on. people or road users. i The ignition is switched off if: Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Rthe driver's door is opened and Additionally, children could set the vehicle in Ryou press Start/Stop button : once motion if, for example, they: when in this position Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of parking position P. Rstart the engine. Driving 159

There is a risk of an accident and injury. Starting procedure with the key When leaving the vehicle, always take the key i To start the engine using the key instead with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button children or animals unattended in the vehicle. out of the ignition lock. Always keep the key out of reach of children. X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position ( page 157) in the ignition lock WARNING 3 Y G and release it as soon as the engine is run- Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust ning. gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave position 2(Y page 157) in the ignition lock. the engine running in enclosed spaces with- The % preglow indicator lamp in the out sufficient ventilation. instrument cluster lights up. X When the % preglow indicator lamp G WARNING goes out, turn the key to position Driving and parking Flammable materials introduced through 3(Y page 157) and release it as soon as the environmental influence or by animals can engine is running. ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or i You can start the engine without preglow parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk if the engine is warm. of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust i The Start/Stop button can be used to system. start the vehicle manually without inserting the key into the ignition lock. The key must ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button when starting the engine. must be inserted in the ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine operates inde- General notes pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. i The catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The X Depress the brake pedal and keep it sound of the engine may change during this depressed. time. X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/ Stop button once (Y page 157). Automatic transmission The engine starts. To start a diesel engine: press the Start/ Shift the transmission to position P. X X Stop button once ( page 157). The transmission position display in the Y Preglow is activated and the engine starts. multifunction display shows P. i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N.

Z 160 Driving

Pulling away Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Automatic transmission It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. WARNING G This gives you enough time to move your foot If the engine speed is above the idling speed from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and you engage transmission position D or and depress it before the vehicle begins to R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There roll. is a risk of an accident. X Take your foot off the brake pedal. When engaging transmission position D or R, The vehicle is then held for about a second. always firmly depress the brake pedal and do Pull away. not simultaneously accelerate. X Hill start assist will not function if: Depress the brake pedal and keep it X Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a depressed. Driving and parking downhill gradient. Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Rthe transmission is in position N. Release the parking brake ( page 181). X Y Rthe parking brake is applied. Release the brake pedal. X RESP® is malfunctioning. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if ECO start/stop function you depress the brake pedal. Only then is Introduction the parking lock released. The ECO start/stop function switches the i The vehicle locks centrally once you have engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop- pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors ped under certain conditions. drop down. When pulling away again, the engine starts You can open the doors from the inside at automatically. The ECO start/stop function any time. thereby helps you to reduce the fuel con- You can also deactivate the automatic lock- sumption and emissions of your vehicle. ing feature (Y page 258). i Upshifts take place at higher engine Important safety notes speeds after a cold start. This helps the WARNING catalytic converter to reach its operating G temperature more quickly. If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. Hill start assist There is a risk of accident and injury. G WARNING If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off After a short time, hill start assist will no lon- the ignition and secure the vehicle against ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away. rolling away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Driving 161

General notes Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe bonnet is closed Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's : ECO start/stop display seat belt is fastened If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the If not all conditions for automatic engine multifunction display, the ECO start/stop switch-off are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is function switches the engine off automati- shown in yellow. cally if the vehicle stops moving. AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multi-

Every time you switch on the engine using the function display also shows the Stop/Start Driving and parking key or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/ inactive message. stop function is activated. i If you shift the transmission from R to D, If the ECO start/stop function has been man- the ECO start/stop function is available ually deactivated ( page 162) or a malfunc- Y again once the ¤ symbol reappears in tion has caused the system to be deactivated, green in the multifunction display. the ¤ symbol is not displayed. AMG vehicles: the Stop/Start active or i All of the vehicle's systems remain active Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG when the engine is switched off automati- menu in the multifunction display goes out. cally. AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): is only available in drive program C. automatic engine switch-off can take place For further information on automatic engine a maximum of four times consecutively (ini- switch-off (Y page 161) and automatic tial stop, then three subsequent stops). The engine start (Y page 162). ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been Automatic engine switch-off started automatically for the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is shown in green General notes in the multifunction display, automatic If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or engine switch-off is again possible. N, the ECO start/stop function switches off i AMG vehicles: the number of times the engine automatically. which the engine can be automatically The ECO start/stop function is operational switched off is unlimited. and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in the multifunction display, if: i The HOLD function can also be activated if the engine has been switched off auto- Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit matically. It is then not necessary to con- green tinue applying the brakes during the auto- Rthe outside temperature is within the com- matic stop phase. When you depress the fort range accelerator pedal, the engine starts auto- Rthe engine is at normal operating temper- matically and the braking effect of the ature HOLD function is deactivated.

Z 162 Driving

Automatic engine start Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function The engine is started automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Ryou release the brakes when in transmission position D or N, when the HOLD function is inactive Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou move the transmission out of position P Ryou switch to drive program , or S S+ M ECO button (AMG vehicles) Driving and parking To switch off (except AMG vehicles): Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the X press button . driver's door : Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in Rthe vehicle starts to roll the multifunction display go out. Rthe brake system requires this X To switch on (except AMG vehicles): R the temperature in the vehicle interior devi- press button :. ates from the set range Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- for automatic engine switch-off screen when the air-conditioning system is (Y page 161) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol switched on is shown in green in the multifunction dis- Rthe battery's charge status is too low play. i Shifting the transmission to position P If not all conditions for automatic engine does not start the engine. switch-off (Y page 161) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the mul- i If you shift the transmission from to , R D tifunction display. If this is the case, the the ECO start/stop function is available ECO start/stop function is not available. again once the ¤ symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display. X To switch off (AMG vehicles): in program C, press button :. or X Switch to drive program S, S+ or M (Y page 170). Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out. The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG menu in the multifunction display goes out. X To switch on (AMG vehicles): press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the automatic transmission switches to drive program C. Driving 163

If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 161) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. In addition, the Stop/ Start active message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 161)are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is not shown. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. In addition, the Stop/Start inactive message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display.

i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ Driving and parking stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops.

Z 164 Driving

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 201) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 199). X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. can be heard. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go

Driving and parking out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 158). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not The fuel tank is empty. start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle. can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display shows 0.

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak start. You cannot hear or discharged. the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 363). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.

X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Automatic transmission 165

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with a petrol There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical engine: component of the engine management system.

The engine is not run- X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. ning smoothly and is Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con- misfiring. verter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant coolant warning lamp to cool down. may also be lit and a Driving and parking Check the coolant level ( page 339). Observe the warning warning tone may X Y notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

Automatic transmission cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Important safety notes

G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-

Z 166 Automatic transmission

Selector lever DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions Overview of transmission positions

Driving and parking Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button j Park position with parking lock j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear k Reverse gear i Neutral i Neutral h Drive h Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. Transmission position and drive program display i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current trans- ! If the transmission position display in the mission position P, R, N or D appears in the multifunction display is not working, you transmission position display should pull away carefully to check whether (Y page 166) in the multifunction display. the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select trans- Transmission position and drive pro- mission position D and drive program C. Do gram display not restrict the shift range. ! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S. Do not restrict the shift range. Example: transmission position display and drive program display : Transmission position display ; Drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. : Transmission position display ; Drive program display Automatic transmission 167

The current transmission position and drive In order to shift from park position P program appear in the multifunction display. directly into R or D: i The arrows in the transmission position Rdepress the brake pedal and display show how and into which transmis- Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or sion positions you can change using the down past the first point of resistance DIRECT SELECT lever. Engaging reverse gear R Engaging park position P ! Only shift the automatic transmission to ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift R when the vehicle is stationary. the automatic transmission directly from Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the to , from to or directly to . Other- X D R R D P first point of resistance. wise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. Shifting to neutral (N) Driving and parking

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: j Park position with parking lock Rrelease the parking brake. k Reverse gear Rshift the automatic transmission out of i Neutral parking position P. h Drive Rstart the engine. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc- There is a risk of an accident and injury. tion of arrow P. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key i The automatic transmission shifts into with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave park position P automatically: children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rif you open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary in transmission posi- X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down tion D or R to the first point of resistance. Rif you open the door while travelling at very low speeds in transmission position Engaging drive position D D or R X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past i Depressing the brake and pushing the the first point of resistance. DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disen- gages the parking lock. The transmission is in N neutral.

Z 168 Automatic transmission

Transmission positions Changing gear

B Park position The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in trans- This prevents the vehicle from roll- mission position D. Gearshifting is deter- ing away when stopped. Do not mined by: shift the transmission into position Ra shift range restriction, if selected P(Y page 180) unless the vehicle is stationary. Rthe selected drive program(Y page 169) The automatic transmission shifts Rthe position of the accelerator pedal to P automatically if you: Rthe road speed Rremove the key Rswitch off the engine when in R or D and open one of the front Driving tips

Driving and parking doors Accelerator pedal position C Reverse gear Your style of driving influences how the auto- Only shift the transmission to R matic transmission shifts gear: when the vehicle is stationary. Rlittle throttle: early upshifts A Neutral Rmore throttle: late upshifts Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the auto- AMG vehicles matic transmission could be dam- When shifting down, the double-clutch func- aged. tion is active regardless of the currently selec- If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: ted drive program. The double-clutch function only shift the transmission to posi- reduces load change reactions and is condu- tion N if the vehicle is in danger of cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen- skidding, e.g. on icy roads. erated by the double-clutch function depends If you switch off the engine using on the drive program selected. the key or the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmission shifts Kickdown to neutral N automatically. Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the damage to the transmission. pressure point. 7 Drive The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the forward gears are available. desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Towing a trailer

X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2(Y page 172) depending on the uphill or Automatic transmission 169

downhill gradient, even if cruise control, DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC is activated.

Program selector button General notes

CLS 350 Coupé

X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired drive

program appears in the multifunction dis- Driving and parking play. The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics. All vehicles (except CLS 350 Coupé, AMG vehicles and vehicles with the Sports package AMG) E Economy Comfortable, economical X Press program selector button : repeat- driving edly until the letter for the desired gearshift E+ Economy Comfortable, particularly program appears in the multifunction dis- Plus economical driving play. S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting

i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 170). i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program E each time the engine is started.

Vehicles with the Sports package AMG

X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display.

Z 170 Automatic transmission

AMG vehicles Steering wheel gearshift paddles

Drive program selector with manual drive program : Left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle X Turn drive program selector : until the ; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad- Driving and parking desired drive program appears in the mul- dle tifunction display in the speedometer. You can restrict or derestrict the shift range The drive program indicator on drive pro- by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. gram selector : lights up in red. You can change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddle in the manual Controlled Comfortable, economical C drive program. Efficiency driving i You can only change gear with the steer- S Sport Sporty driving style ing wheel gearshift paddles when the trans- S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving mission is in position D. style M Manual Manual gearshifting Automatic drive program RS RACE Optimal vehicle accelera- Automatic drive program E START tion from a standstill Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterised by the following: i For further information on the automatic Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic drive program, see (Y page 170). transmission settings. i The automatic transmission switches to Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from automatic drive program each time the C the automatic transmission shifting up engine is started. sooner. i RS cannot be selected during normal driv- Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in ing. For further information on RACE forward and reverse gears unless the accel- START; see (Y page 202). erator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Automatic transmission 171

Automatic drive program E+ (CLS 350 RYou switch to drive program E or Coupé) S(Y page 169). Drive program E+ is characterised by the fol- RYou drive at less than 60 km/h. lowing: RYou drive faster than 160 km/h. Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic transmission settings. Automatic drive program S Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehi- the automatic transmission shifting up cles, drive programs S and S+) is character- sooner. ised by the following: Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in Rsporty engine and automatic transmission forward and reverse gears unless the accel- settings erator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving Rthe automatic transmission shifting up stability on slippery road surfaces, for later Driving and parking example. Ras a result of the later automatic transmis- Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sion shift points, the fuel consumption pos- sooner. This results in the vehicle being sibly being higher driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Manual drive program M Rthe overrun mode is active in the 60 km/h to 160 km/h range. General notes - The combustion engine is switched off You can activate manual drive program M in and is disconnected from the drive train. the E, E+ (CLS 350 Coupé) and S automatic - The engine speed corresponds to the drive programs. idling speed. In manual drive program M, you can briefly - Drive program E+ is shown in the multi- change gear yourself by using the steering function display and the transmission wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission position display goes out (Y page 166). must be in position D. Drive program E+ can be activated under the Activating following conditions: X Shift the transmission to position D. RThe vehicle speed is between 60 km/h and X Pull the left or right steering wheel gearshift 160 km/h. paddle (Y page 170). RThe course of the road is suitable, e.g. there Manual drive program M is temporarily acti- are no steep up or downhill gradients. vated. The selected gear and M appear in RYou are no longer depressing the acceler- the multifunction display. ator pedal. Drive program E+ is deactivated under the Shifting gears following conditions: If you pull on the left or right steering wheel gearshift paddle, the automatic transmission RYou depress the accelerator pedal. switches to manual drive program M for a RYou depress the brake pedal. limited amount of time. Depending on which RYou use the DIRECT SELECT lever to gearshift paddle is pulled, the automatic change the transmission position transmission immediately shifts into the next (Y page 166). gear down or up, if permitted.

Z 172 Automatic transmission

X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering matic drive program that was last selected, wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 170). i.e. E, E+ (CLS 350 Coupé) or S. The automatic transmission shifts up to the You can also deactivate manual drive pro- next gear. gram M yourself: i If the maximum engine speed on the cur- X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel gear- rently engaged gear is reached and you shift paddle and hold it in place continue to accelerate, the automatic ( page 170). transmission automatically shifts up in Y order to prevent engine damage. or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer- transmission position. ing wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 170). The automatic transmission shifts down to or the next gear. X Use the program selector button to change the drive program ( page 169). i If the engine exceeds the maximum Y Driving and parking Manual drive program is deactivated. engine speed when shifting down, the auto- M The automatic transmission switches into matic transmission protects against engine the automatic drive program that was last damage by not shifting down. selected, i.e. E, E+ (CLS 350 Coupé) or S. i Automatic downshifting occurs when coasting. Gearshift recommendation Shift ranges Introduction i You can restrict or derestrict the shift range by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. When the automatic transmission is in position D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict The gearshift recommendations assist you in the shift range (Y page 172). adopting an economical driving style. The rec- The shift range selected is shown in the mul- ommended gear is shown in the multifunction tifunction display. The automatic transmis- display. sion shifts only as far as the selected gear.

X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Deactivating If you have activated manual drive program M, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. If manual drive program M is deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts into the auto- Automatic transmission 173

Shift range: Clearing the shift range restriction

= To use the engine's braking effect X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the number for the gear disap- 5 To use the braking effect of the pears from the multifunction display. engine on downhill gradients and or for driving: X Shift the transmission to position D. Ron steep mountain roads The automatic transmission shifts from the Rin mountainous terrain current shift range directly to D. Rin arduous conditions Selecting the ideal shift range 4 To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift gradients and on long downhill paddle and hold it in position. stretches The automatic transmission shifts to the gear which allows optimum acceleration Driving and parking Restricting the shift range and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift gears. paddle. The automatic transmission shifts down one gear and restricts the shift range to the Manual drive program (AMG vehicles relevant gear. and vehicles with AMG Sports pack- i If the engine exceeds the maximum age) engine speed when shifting down, the auto- Activating the manual drive program matic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. X Press the program selector button ( page 169) repeatedly until M appears in i Y If the maximum engine speed for the shift the multifunction display. range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up, X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program even if the shift range is restricted. This selector (Y page 170) until M appears in the prevents the engine from overrevving. multifunction display. The indicator M on the drive program selec- Extending the shift range tor lights up in red. Manual drive program M can be selected X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. using the program selector button or the drive The shift range is derestricted. program selector. In manual drive program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel gearshift paddles if the transmission is in position D.

Shifting up ! In manual gearshift program M, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached.

Z 174 Automatic transmission

When the engine limiting speed is reached, Deactivating the manual drive program the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine Press the program selector button from overrevving. You must make sure that X ( page 169) repeatedly until E or S the engine speed does not reach the red Y appears in the multifunction display. area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 170) until C, S or S+ X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift appears in the multifunction display. paddle. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. AMG vehicles

X If the colour in the speedometer multifunction display changes to red and the UP dis-

Driving and parking play message is shown, shift up a gear.

Downshifting

X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down. i For maximum acceleration, pull the left- hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed.

Kickdown You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M.

X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M. Refuelling 175

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. Driving and parking X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Refuelling If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: Important safety notes RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin G WARNING with water and soap immediately. Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek sion. immediate medical attention. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi- sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine cal attention. Do not induce vomiting. and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before RChange any clothing that has come into refuelling. contact with fuel immediately.

WARNING G G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and There is a danger of injury. thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact fire and explosion. with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel Always touch the vehicle body before opening vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil- the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump dren. nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up.

G WARNING Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Z 176 Refuelling

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash Refuelling point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, Opening/closing the fuel filler flap components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel.

! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts

Driving and parking of the wrong fuel could result in damage to Opening the fuel filler flap (example: CLS Coupé) the fuel system and the engine. The repair : To open the fuel filler flap costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist ; To insert the fuel filler cap workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel = Tyre pressure table lines drained completely. ? Fuel type to be refuelled ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto- fuel system. matically when you open or close the vehicle ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the The position of the 8 fuel filler cap is dis- paintwork. played in the instrument cluster. The arrow ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel next to the filling pump indicates the side of can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injec- the vehicle. tion system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. To open the fuel filler flap Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 405).

: To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tyre pressure table ? Fuel type to be refuelled Refuelling 177

Closing the fuel filler flap

X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central locking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing.

Opening the fuel filler flap (example: CLS Coupé) Fuel filler flap emergency release : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap

= Tyre pressure table Driving and parking ? Fuel type to be refuelled

X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. This corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". The driver's door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of X CLS Coupé: open the boot lid. arrow :. X Slide the luggage net down. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the right-hand side trim panel. X Open the fuel filler flap fully. X Remove the first-aid kit (Y page 352). X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and Detach the emergency release from remove it. X retainer :. CLS Coupé: insert the fuel filler cap into X Pull the emergency release in the direction the holder on the inside of fuel filler X of arrow ;. flap ;. The fuel filler flap is released. or X Open the fuel filler flap. X CLS Shooting Brake: insert the fuel filler cap, held in a horizontal position, into the recesses in the fuel filler flap hinge arm from above. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.

Z 178 Refuelling

X CLS Shooting Brake: open the tailgate. X Open the right-hand side trim panel. X Fold down the trim. X Detach the emergency release from retainer :.

X Pull the emergency release in the direction of arrow ;. The fuel filler flap is released. X Open the fuel filler flap. Driving and parking Refuelling 179

Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING Risk of explosion or fire.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it immediately (Y page 157). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run com-

start. pletely dry. Driving and parking

X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 157). X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. or X Start the engine using the touch-start function. To do this, turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock and then release it immediately (Y page 157). If the engine does not start:

X Turn the ignition on again a maximum of ten seconds (Y page 157). X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. or X Start the engine again via the touch-start function. If the engine does not start after three attempts:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 180 Parking

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. not be opened. or The key battery is discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 82). X Open the boot lid or the tailgate. X CLS Coupé: open the boot lid. or X CLS Shooting Brake: open the tailgate. X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release (Y page 177). Driving and parking The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- Important safety notes cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: G WARNING Rreleasing the parking brake If flammable materials such as leaves, grass Rshifting the automatic transmission out of or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to the parking position P parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they Rstarting the engine. could ignite. There is a risk of fire. They could also operate the vehicle's equip- Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- ment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. rials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to When leaving the vehicle, always take the key park on dry grassland or harvested grain with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave fields. children unsupervised in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly WARNING G against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle If you switch off the ignition while driving, or its drivetrain could be damaged. safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, To ensure that the vehicle is secured against for example, the power steering and the brake rolling away unintentionally: boosting effect. You will require considerably Rthe parking brake must be applied more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk Rthe transmission must be in position P and of an accident. the key must be removed from the ignition Do not switch off the ignition while driving. lock Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the kerb Parking 181

Switching off the engine Using KEYLESS-GO Press the Start/Stop button ( page 157). Important safety notes X Y The engine stops and all the indicator G WARNING lamps in the instrument cluster go out. The automatic transmission switches to neu- i When the driver's door is closed, this cor- tral position N when you switch off the engine. responds to key position 1. When the driv- The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of er's door is open, this corresponds to key an accident. position 0: "key removed". After switching off the engine, always switch i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- off the engine, the automatic transmission cle from rolling away by applying the parking shifts to N automatically. If you then open brake. one of the front doors, the automatic transmission shifts to P.

Vehicles with automatic transmission i The engine can be switched off while the Driving and parking X Firmly depress the parking brake. vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding X All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): shift the Start/Stop button for about three sec- the transmission to position P. onds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

Parking brake

G WARNING If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi- Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not X AMG vehicles: press P button :. apply the parking brake too firmly. If the Using the key wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. G WARNING The immobiliser is activated. If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- i If you switch the engine off with the trans- cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: mission in position R or D, the automatic Rreleasing the parking brake transmission shifts to N automatically. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of If you then open one of the front doors or the parking position P remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P. Rstarting the engine. If you shift the automatic transmission to They could also operate the vehicle's equip- N before switching off the engine, the auto- ment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. matic transmission remains in N even if a door is opened.

Z 182 Driving tips

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key Driving tips with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. General notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Driving and parking When you apply the parking brake to brake ECO display the vehicle, the brake lamps do not light up.

X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the engine is running. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull release handle :. Example: ECO display The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the Parking up the vehicle most economical driving style for the selected settings and existing conditions. Con- If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer sumption can be significantly influenced by than four weeks, the battery may be damaged your driving style. by exhaustive discharging. The ECO display consists of three bars: If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer RAccel. than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. RConstant RCoasting X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. The percentage count is the mean value of the three bar values. The three bars and the mean i You can obtain information about trickle value begin at the value of 50 %. A higher per- chargers from a qualified specialist work- centage count indicates a more economical shop. driving style. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption and a fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption figure. Driving tips 183

In addition to driving style, the consumption a journey. During a prolonged driving time, is affected by many other factors, such as: these changes are smaller. For more Rload dynamic changes, perform a manual reset. Rtyre pressure For further information on the ECO display; Rcold start see (Y page 247). Rchoice of route Rthe use of electrical consumers Braking These factors are not included in the ECO display. Important safety notes The evaluation of your driving style takes the G WARNING following three categories into consideration: If you shift down on a slippery road surface in RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera- an attempt to increase the engine's braking tion processes): effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. Driving and parking - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, This increases the risk of skidding and having especially at higher speeds an accident. - The bar empties: sporty acceleration Do not shift down for additional engine brak- RConstant (assessment of driving behav- ing on a slippery road surface. iour at all times): - The bar fills up: constant speed and Downhill gradients avoidance of unnecessary acceleration Do not depress the brake pedal continuously and deceleration while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed cause the brakes to rub by constantly apply- RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration ing light pressure to the pedal. This results in processes): excessive and premature wear to the brake - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, pads. keeping your distance and early release On long and steep downhill gradients, you of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. without use of the brakes. Take particular note of this when driving a - The bar empties: frequent braking laden vehicle and when towing a trailer. i An economical driving style involves driv- i This also applies if you have activated ing with a moderate engine speed. cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS- To achieve a higher value in the categories TRONIC PLUS. Acceleration and Constant: This will use the braking effect of the engine, Robserve the gearshift recommendation. so less braking will be required to prevent the Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E. vehicle from gaining speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. brakes from overheating and wearing too on the motorway, only the bar for Con‐ quickly. stant will change. i The ECO display summarises the driving Heavy and light loads characteristics from the start of the journey WARNING to its completion. Therefore, there are G dynamic changes in the bars at the start of The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving.

Z 184 Driving tips

This increases the braking distance and could RBrake occasionally to remove any possible even cause the braking system to fail. There salt residue. Make sure that you do not is a risk of an accident. endanger other road users when doing so. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the not simultaneously depress both the brake beginning and end of a journey. pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to New brake pads/linings the brake pads. New and replaced brake pads and discs only If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy reach their optimum braking effect after sev- load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but eral hundred kilometres of driving. Compen- drive on for a short while. This allows the air- sate for this by applying greater force to the flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Driving and parking brake pedal. If the brakes have been used only moderately, For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- you should occasionally test their effective- mends that you only have brake pads/linings ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a fitted to your vehicle which have been higher speed. This improves the grip of the approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or brakes. which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not Wet road surfaces been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain which are not of an equivalent quality could without braking, there may be a delayed reac- affect your vehicle's operating safety. tion from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has AMG high-performance and ceramic been washed or driven through deep water. brakes You have to depress the brake pedal more AMG brake systems are designed for heavy firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the loads. This may lead to noise when braking. vehicle in front. This is dependent on: After driving on a wet road or having the vehi- Rspeed cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- Rbraking force tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more Renvironmental conditions, such as temper- quickly and protecting them against corro- ature and humidity sion. The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings Limited braking performance on salt- or brake discs, depends on the individual driv- treated roads ing style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt mileage (service life) that will be valid under residue may form on the brake discs and all circumstances. An aggressive driving style brake pads. This can result in a significantly will lead to high wear. You can obtain further longer braking distance. information about this from your Mercedes- Benz Service Centre. New brake pads/brake pads and discs that have been replaced only achieve optimum Driving tips 185 braking effect after several hundred kilome- Winter driving tres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the Important safety notes brake pedal. Always be aware of this and WARNING adapt your driving and braking accordingly G during the running-in period. If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking Excessive heavy braking results in corre- effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. spondingly high brake wear. Observe the This increases the risk of skidding and having # brake pad wear warning lamp in the an accident. instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. If you Do not shift down for additional engine brak- regularly drive at high speeds, it is particularly ing on a slippery road surface. important to have the brake system checked and maintained regularly. G DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate Driving and parking ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases Driving on wet roads such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle Aquaplaning becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of If water has accumulated to a certain depth fatal injury. on the road surface, there is a danger of aqua- If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating planing occurring, even if: running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To Ryou are driving at low speeds. ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth. a window on the side of the vehicle that is not For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts and facing into the wind. brake carefully. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified Driving on flooded roads specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in section ( page 374). front or in the opposite direction create Y waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. Driving with summer tyres These notes must be observed under all Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" circumstances. You could otherwise dam- section (Y page 374). age the engine, the electronics or the transmission. Slippery road surfaces

If you have to drive on stretches of road on WARNING which water has collected, please bear in G If you shift down on a slippery road surface in mind that: an attempt to increase the engine's braking Rthe maximum permissible still water depth effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. is 25 cm. This increases the risk of skidding and having Ryou should drive no faster than at walking an accident. pace. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.

Z 186 Driving systems

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be steady speed for a prolonged period. You can stopped when moving at low speed: store any road speed above 30 km/h.

X Move the transmission to position N. If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an acci- X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account road, You should drive particularly carefully on slip- weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera- is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis- tion, steering and braking manoeuvres. tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, i For more information on driving with for braking in good time, and for staying in the lane. snow chains; see (Y page 375). The outside temperature indicator is not Do not use cruise control: designed to serve as an ice-warning device Rin road and traffic conditions which do not and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. allow you to maintain a constant speed Driving and parking Changes in the outside temperature are dis- (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads) played after a short delay. Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or Indicated temperatures just above the freez- accelerating can cause the drive wheels to ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- lose traction and the vehicle could then face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, skid especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your heavy rain or snow driving style. Always adapt your driving style If there is a change of drivers, advise the new and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing driver of the speed stored. weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road con- General notes ditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and Driving systems steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer (CLS Shoot- Cruise control ing Brake only), you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make Important safety notes use of the braking effect of the engine. This Cruise control maintains a constant road relieves the load on the brake system and speed for you. It brakes automatically in order prevents the brakes from overheating and to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into wearing too quickly. a lower gear in good time on long and steep Use cruise control only if road and traffic con- downhill gradients. Take particular note of ditions make it appropriate to maintain a this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, steady speed for a prolonged period. You can you will make use of the braking effect of the store any road speed above 30 km/h. engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a Driving systems 187

Cruise control lever Rthe transmission must be in position D Rthe cruise control function must be selected (Y page 187)

Selecting cruise control

: To activate or to increase speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To activate at the current speed/last Driving and parking stored speed ? To activate or reduce speed X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off. A To switch between cruise control and var- If it is off, cruise control is already selected. iable SPEEDTRONIC If it is not off, press the cruise control lever B To deactivate cruise control in the direction of arrow ;. You can operate cruise control and variable LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selec- Storing and maintaining the current ted: speed RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED- TRONIC is selected. When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In the multifunction display, the segments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up.

Activation conditions You can accept the current speed if you are To activate cruise control, all of the following driving faster than 30 km/h. activation conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe parking brake must be released Ryou are driving faster than 30 km/h. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening

Z 188 Driving systems

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired Setting a speed speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the X Press the cruise control lever up : for a stored speed on downhill gradients by higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

Driving and parking automatically braking the vehicle. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until Storing the current speed and calling up the desired speed is reached. the last stored speed X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: press the cruise control lever briefly up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards The last stored speed increases or decrea- you :. ses in 10 km/h increments. X Remove your foot from the accelerator i Cruise control is not deactivated if you pedal. depress the accelerator pedal. For exam- The first time cruise control is activated, it ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, stores the current speed or regulates the cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed speed of the vehicle to the previously to the last speed stored after you have fin- stored speed. ished overtaking. Driving systems 189

Deactivating cruise control downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED- TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. SPEEDTRONIC cannot take into account There are several ways to deactivate cruise road, weather or traffic conditions. SPEED- control: TRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for

the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle Driving and parking X Briefly press cruise control lever = for- speed, for braking in good time, and for stay- wards. ing in the lane. or If there is a change of drivers, advise the new X Brake driver of the speed stored. or You can set a variable or permanent limit X Briefly move the cruise control lever in the speed: direction of arrow ;. Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM areas indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever Rpermanent for long-term speed restric- lights up. tions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: fitted (Y page 192) Ryou depress the parking brake i The speed indicated in the speedometer Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h may differ slightly from the limit speed RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® stored. Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise control off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine.

SPEEDTRONIC Important safety notes SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep

Z 190 Driving systems

Variable SPEEDTRONIC Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC

General notes

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. : To store the current speed or a higher Driving and parking speed X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is on. ; LIM indicator lamp If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already = To store the current speed and call up the selected. last stored speed If it is not, press the cruise control lever in ? To store the current speed or a lower the direction of arrow ;. speed LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control A To switch between cruise control or DIS- lever is lit. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selec- TRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC ted. B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC Storing the current speed With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED- TRONIC is selected

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. The current speed is stored and shown in the multifunction display. The segments in the multifunction display light up from the start of the scale up to the stored speed. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. Driving systems 191

Storing the current speed and calling up a higher speed, or down ; for a lower the last stored speed speed. G WARNING or If you call up the stored speed and it is lower X Keep the cruise control lever pressed than the current speed, the vehicle deceler- beyond the pressure point until the desired ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the speed is set. Press the cruise control lever vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There up : for a higher speed or down ; for a is a risk of an accident. lower speed. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre- tions before calling up the stored speed. If you ments: briefly press the cruise control do not know the stored speed, store the lever up : to the pressure point for a desired speed again. higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. or

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the Driving and parking pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC by braking.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :.

Setting a speed

There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC:

X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise con- X Briefly move the cruise control lever in the trol lever up : past the pressure point for direction of arrow =. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Z 192 Driving systems

Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated auto- In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: matically if you depress the accelerator pedal Rgive an unnecessary warning and then beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but brake the vehicle only if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. Rneither give a warning nor intervene You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. Raccelerate unexpectedly i The last speed stored is cleared when you There is a risk of an accident. switch off the engine. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by Permanent SPEEDTRONIC DISTRONIC PLUS.

You can use the on-board computer to limit G WARNING the speed permanently to a value between DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up 160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this

Driving and parking the maximum speed (Y page 258). braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk appears in the multifunction display. of an accident. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active, In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. try to take evasive action. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function beyond the pressure point (kickdown). is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC DISTRONIC PLUS PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Important safety notes Rwhen towing the vehicle G WARNING Rin the car wash DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: If you fail to adapt your driving style, DIS- Rpeople or animals TRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- an accident nor override the laws of physics. ped or parked vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and weather conditions or traffic conditions into Roncoming and crossing traffic account. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give are responsible for the distance to the vehicle warnings nor intervene in such situations. in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good There is a risk of an accident. time, and for staying in the lane. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: uation and be ready to brake. Rin road and traffic conditions which do not WARNING allow you to maintain a constant speed G (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads) DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic sit- Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or uations. accelerating can cause the drive wheels to Driving systems 193

lose traction and the vehicle could then If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk skid of a collision, you will be warned visually and Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, acoustically. Without your intervention, DIS- heavy rain or snow TRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision. An DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow intermittent warning tone will then sound and vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or the distance warning lamp will light up in the vehicles driving on a different line. instrument cluster. Brake immediately to increase the distance to the vehicle driving in In particular, the detection of obstacles can front, or take evasive action, provided it is be impaired in the case of: safe to do so. Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar ing the sensors sensor system must be operational. Rsnow or heavy rain If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC Rinterference by other radar sources PLUS operates in the same way as cruise

Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, control in the speed range between Driving and parking for example, in multi-storey car parks 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi- in front of you, it operates in the speed range cle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. the speed stored. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on This speed can: roads with steep gradients. Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip road Cruise control lever Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive countries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries) If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and : To store the current speed or a higher automatically helps you maintain the dis- speed tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi- cles are detected with the aid of the radar ; To set the specified minimum distance sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes = LIM indicator lamp automatically so that the set speed is not ? To store the current speed and call up the exceeded. last stored speed Change into a lower gear in good time on long A To store the current speed or a lower and steep downhill gradients. Take particular speed note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and doing so, you will make use of the braking variable SPEEDTRONIC effect of the engine. This relieves the load on C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Z 194 Driving systems

With the cruise control lever, you can operate Rthe transmission must be in position D. DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEED- Rthe bonnet must be closed. TRONIC. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control shift from P to D or your seat belt must be lever indicates which system you have selec- fastened. ted: Rthe front-passenger door and the rear RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS doors must be closed. is selected. Rthe vehicle must not be skidding. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED- Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must be TRONIC is selected. selected with the cruise control lever (Y page 194). Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS Activating Driving and parking

X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selec- you ;, or press it up : or down =. ted. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. If it is not off, press the cruise control lever Press the cruise control lever repeatedly in the direction of arrow . X ; up : or down = until the desired speed LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control is set. lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selec- Remove your foot from the accelerator ted. X pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the Activating DISTRONIC PLUS vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. Activation conditions To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you conditions must be fulfilled: can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown Rthe engine must be running. It may take up in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in to two minutes of driving before DIS- front is no longer detected and displayed, TRONIC PLUS is ready for use. DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and you will Rthe parking brake must be released. hear a tone. ® RESP must be switched on, but not inter- i If you do not fully release the accelerator vening. pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS suspended RActive Parking Assist must not be activa- message appears in the multifunction dis- ted. Driving systems 195

play. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ;, or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Press the cruise control lever repeatedly X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards X you . up : or down = until the desired speed : is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal. Driving and parking If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your time it is activated, the current speed is vehicle is stationary as well. stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at speed to the previously stored value. under 30 km/h if a vehicle in front has been detected. Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the instrument cluster should be activated (Y page 253). Pulling away and driving i You can use the cruise control lever to set the stored speed and the control on the cruise control lever to set the specified minimum distance (Y page 197). Activating with the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may X If you want to pull away with DIS- accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a TRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the risk of an accident. brake pedal. Take the traffic conditions into account X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards before calling up the stored speed. If you do you : not know what the stored speed is, store the or desired speed again. X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. i The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The

Z 196 Driving systems

vehicle then brakes automatically. There is Vehicles with COMAND Online a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all times. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. Example: roundabout However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. i The following function is not operational Driving and parking in all countries. Changing lanes DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information If you change to the overtaking lane, DIS- from your navigation system so that it can TRONIC PLUS supports you if: adapt to certain traffic situations. This is the Ryou are driving faster than 60 km/h case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis- PLUS is active and you: tance to a vehicle in front Rapproach or drive around a roundabout Ryou switch on the respective turn signals Rapproach a T-junction RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger Rturn off at a motorway exit of collision. Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detec- If these conditions are met, your vehicle is tion range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted maintains the current driving speed and does if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis- not accelerate. This is based on the current tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in map data in the navigation system. front becomes too small. Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS the speed you set. monitors the left lane for left-hand-drive Stopping vehicles and the right lane for right-hand- drive vehicles. G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be operated, activated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. Driving systems 197

The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is can- Setting a speed celled and the vehicle can start moving if: RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the cruise control lever. Ryou accelerate. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. R the battery is disconnected. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the Driving and parking X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until vehicle against rolling away. the desired speed is reached. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle X Release the cruise control lever. in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS it is stationary. is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre- brake. ments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure i Depending on the specified minimum dis- point. tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill The last stored speed increases or decrea- at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle ses in 1 km/h increments. in front. The specified minimum distance is To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h set using the control on the cruise control X increments: press the cruise control lever lever. briefly up : or down ; beyond the pres- When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the sure point. transmission is shifted automatically to posi- The last stored speed increases or decrea- tion P if: ses in 10 km/h increments. Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC seat belt is unfastened PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last R the engine is switched off, unless it is auto- speed stored after you have finished over- matically switched off by the ECO start/ taking. stop function Rthe bonnet is opened Setting the specified minimum distance Ra system fault occurs You can set the specified minimum distance Rthe power supply is not sufficient. for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can

Z 198 Driving systems

see this distance in the multifunction display If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, (Y page 198). segments ; between speed of the vehicle in i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient front : and stored speed = light up. distance to the vehicle in front and comply i For design reasons, the speed displayed with the minimum distance as required by in the speedometer may differ slightly from law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. front if necessary. Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the multifunction display

General notes In the assistance graphics display menu (Y page 252) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance graphics display. Driving and parking Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

X To increase: turn control = in direction ;. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator: current distance to Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the the vehicle in front speedometer = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle

X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 253).

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. Driving systems 199

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa- There are several ways to deactivate DIS- ted TRONIC PLUS:

X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. : Vehicle in front, if detected When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you ; Specified minimum distance to the vehi- Driving and parking will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message cle in front; adjustable in the multifunction display for approximately = Own vehicle five seconds. ? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only i appears when the cruise control lever is The last speed stored remains stored until actuated) you switch off the engine. You will see the stored speed for approx- i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you imately five seconds when you activate DIS- depress the accelerator pedal. TRONIC PLUS. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva- X Select the Distance display function ted if: using the on-board computer Ryou engage the parking brake (Y page 253). Ryou are driving slower than 25 km/h and i You will see the stored speed for approx- there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle imately five seconds when you activate in front is no longer detected DISTRONIC PLUS. RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away, and the front- passenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle has skidded Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐ TRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

Z 200 Driving systems

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their General notes lane. The distance to the vehicle in front is too Pay particular attention in the following traffic small. situations: Other vehicles changing lane RCornering, going into and coming out of a bend RVehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane ROther vehicles changing lane RNarrow vehicles RObstructions and stationary vehicles RCrossing vehicles

Driving and parking In such situations, brake if necessary. DIS- TRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Cornering, going into and coming out of a DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi- bend cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle is too small. Narrow vehicles

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the Vehicles which are not driving in the mid- vehicle in front on the edge of the carriage- dle of their lane way, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small. Driving systems 201

Obstructions and stationary vehicles The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta- the voltage supply cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by Driving and parking an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC a vehicle occupant PLUS will not brake for these. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- Crossing vehicles partment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle from rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat- ing or other similar situations: ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with Rwhen towing the vehicle crossing traffic, for example, could cause R your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. in the car wash Activation conditions HOLD function You can activate the HOLD function if: General notes Rthe vehicle is stationary. R The HOLD function can assist the driver in the the engine is running or if it has been auto- following situations: matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. R when pulling away, especially on steep Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat slopes belt is fastened. R when manoeuvring on steep slopes Rthe parking brake is released. R when waiting in traffic Rthe bonnet is closed.

Z 202 Driving systems

Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. Ra system fault occurs. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

Activating the HOLD function RACE START Important safety notes i Observe the safety notes for the SPORT handling mode (Y page 70). Only activate RACE START on dedicated race circuits. X Make sure that the activation conditions RACE START enables optimum acceleration are met. from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface. Driving and parking X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further i RACE START is only available in AMG vehi- until ë: appears in the multifunction cles. display. The HOLD function is activated. You can Activation conditions release the brake pedal. You can activate RACE START if: i If depressing the brake pedal the first Rthe doors are closed time does not activate the HOLD function, Rthe engine is running and it has reached an wait briefly and then try again. operating temperature of approximately 80 †. This is the case when the engine oil Deactivating the HOLD function temperature in the multifunction display The HOLD function is deactivated automati- stops flashing. cally if: RSPORT handling mode is activated Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in (Y page 70). position D or R. Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead Ryou shift the transmission to position P. position Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake certain amount of pressure until ë dis- pedal is depressed (left foot) appears from the multifunction display. Rthe transmission is in position D Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. When the HOLD function is activated, the Activating RACE START transmission is shifted automatically to posi- X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot tion P if: and keep it depressed. Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's X Turn the drive program selector clockwise seat belt is unfastened. (Y page 170) until the RS lamp lights up. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP matically switched off by the ECO start/ Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears stop function. in the multifunction display. Rthe bonnet is opened. i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The Driving systems 203

RACE START cancelled message appears AIRMATIC in the multifunction display. Vehicle level X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 170). Important safety notes or G WARNING X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel People's limbs may become trapped if they shift paddle (Y page 170). are located underneath the vehicle or The RACE START available Depress between the vehicle body and the tyres when accelerator message appears in the mul- the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of tifunction display. injury. i If you do not depress the accelerator When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one pedal fully within two seconds, RACE is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate START is cancelled. The RACE START not vicinity of the wheel arches.

possible See Owner's Manual message Driving and parking appears in the multifunction display. G WARNING X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Vehicles with level control: The engine speed rises to approximately The vehicle is slightly lowered if you: 3,500 rpm. Rhave selected comfort suspension tuning The RACE START Release brake to and start message appears in the multifunction display. Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds of switching off the engine i If you do not release the brake pedal within five seconds, RACE START is cancel- You and people in the vicinity of the wheel led. The RACE START cancelled message arch or the underbody may thus become trap- appears in the multifunction display. ped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the wheel arch or the underbody when you lock accelerator pedal depressed. the vehicle. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. ! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if: The RACE START active message appears Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning" in the multifunction display. Ryou switch off the engine and RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. 60 seconds Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated. When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as RACE START is deactivated immediately if the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could you release the accelerator pedal during otherwise be damaged. RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START If you lock the vehicle within 60 seconds of not possible See Owner's Manual mes- switching the engine off, it lowers slightly to sage appears in the multifunction display. the selected Comfort suspension mode. Observe the notes on driving with a trailer i After using it several times in short suc- ( page 235). cession, RACE START will be unavailable Y until a certain distance has been driven. Your vehicle regulates its height automatically. All-round level control ensures the best

Z 204 Driving systems

possible suspension and constant ground If indicator lamp ; is not lit: clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When Press the : button. you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered auto- X Indicator lamp lights up. The vehicle matically to improve driving safety and to ; reduce fuel consumption. height is adjusted to raised level. The following vehicle levels are possible: The Vehicle rising message appears in the display. Rnormal The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you: Rraised: the vehicle is raised by about 25 mm when compared with the normal Rdrive at a speed over approximately level 120 km/h Rlowered: the vehicle is lowered by about Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a 10 mm when compared with the normal speed over 80 km/h level The "Raised level" remains saved when you are not driving within these speed ranges. Driving and parking The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be set manually. Setting the normal level The "Lowered" vehicle level is set automati- Start the engine. cally: X If indicator lamp is lit: Rat speeds above 140 km/h ; Rif you have selected "Comfort tuning" X Press the : button. (Y page 204) and then lock the vehicle Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is within 60 seconds of the engine being adjusted to normal level. switched off Rif you have selected "Sports tuning" Suspension tuning (Y page 204) General notes Setting the vehicle level The electronically controlled damping system Select the "Normal" setting for normal road works continuously. This improves driving surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow safety and ride comfort. chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. The damping is tuned individually to each Your selection remains stored even if you wheel and depends on: remove the key from the ignition lock. Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Setting raised level Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Start the engine. Driving systems 205

Sports tuning the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of injury. When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches.

G WARNING Vehicles with level control: The vehicle is slightly lowered if you: Rhave selected comfort suspension tuning and The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately ensures even better contact with the road. 60 seconds of switching off the engine

Select this mode when employing a sporty You and people in the vicinity of the wheel Driving and parking driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. arch or the underbody may thus become trap- X Press button :. ped. There is a risk of injury. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selec- Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the ted "Sports tuning". wheel arch or the underbody when you lock The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the vehicle. the multifunction display. ! The vehicle is lowered by about 20 mm if: Comfort tuning Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning" In comfort mode, the driving characteristics Ryou switch off the engine and of your vehicle are more comfortable. There- Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately fore, select this mode if you prefer a more 60 seconds comfortable driving style. Select comfort When parking, position your vehicle so that mode also when driving fast on straight roads, it does not make contact with the kerb as e.g. on straight stretches of motorway. the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could X Press button :. otherwise be damaged. Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected "Comfort tuning". Suspension tuning The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspen- safety and ride comfort. sion The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Important safety notes Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty G WARNING Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps People's limbs may become trapped if they Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + are located underneath the vehicle or or Comfort between the vehicle body and the tyres when

Z 206 Driving systems

Sport mode The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort mode When comfort mode is selected, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a comfort-oriented driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of motorway.

X Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamps = and ? go out. : Button for mode selection You have selected Comfort mode. ; Button for saving, calling up and display- The AMG Ride Control COMFORT mes- Driving and parking ing the selected mode sage appears in the multifunction display. = Sport + mode indicator lamp ? Sport mode indicator lamp Storing and calling up settings Once the suspension tuning and drive pro- The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode gram have been selected, you can store and ensures better contact with the road. Select call up your settings using AMG button . this mode when employing a sporty driving ; style, e.g. on winding country roads. X To store: press AMG button ; until you hear a tone. X Press button : once. Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have selec- X To call up: press AMG button ;. ted Sport mode. The stored suspension tuning and drive The AMG Ride Control SPORT message program are selected. appears in the multifunction display. X To display: briefly press AMG button ;. Sport + mode Your selection appears in the multifunction display. The very firm setting of the suspension tuning in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode pri- Vehicle level marily when driving on race circuits. Important safety notes If indicator lamps = and ? are off: G WARNING X Press button : twice. People's limbs may become trapped if they Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You are located underneath the vehicle or have selected Sport + mode. between the vehicle body and the tyres when The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of appears in the multifunction display. injury. If indicator lamp ? lights up: When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate X Press button : once. vicinity of the wheel arches. Second indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected Sport + mode. The vehicle lowers when you press the button for selecting the suspension tuning or the Driving systems 207

AMG button. The vehicle also lowers if it is Load compensation takes place if: stationary. Ra door or the boot lid/tailgate is opened ! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning has Rthe parked vehicle is unlocked been selected, the vehicle's ground clear- For larger level changes, the engine must be ance decreases. Make sure that no objects running. become trapped or that the vehicle has not been damaged, for example, on the kerb. i The vehicle level may change visibly at the 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) rear axle if you park the vehicle and the If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC outside temperature changes. If the tem- can neither reduce the risk of accident nor perature drops, the vehicle level lowers; override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot with an increase in temperature, the vehi- take account of road, weather and traffic con- cle level rises. ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are

responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Driving and parking Changing the rear axle ride height front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good This function is only available for the CLS 63 time, and for staying in the lane. AMG 4MATIC and CLS 63 AMG Shooting If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Brake. The vehicle level at the rear axle depends on Rwhen pulling away, only depress the accel- the selected suspension tuning and the vehi- erator pedal as far as is necessary cle speed. Raccelerate less when driving The vehicle level at the rear axle changes dur- ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle ing the journey depending on the selected raised. This may damage the transfer case. suspension tuning: Damage of this sort is not covered by the RComfort: +10 mm Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All RSport + and Sport: -15 mm wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions When switching from Comfort to Sport or for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full Sport +, the rear axle lowers by approximately contact with the ground. 25 mm. When switching from Sport or Sport + to Comfort, the rear axle raises by approx- i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum imately 25 mm. This level change also takes effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if place when the vehicle is stationary. you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow If you drive faster than 170 km/h, the rear chains if necessary. axle ride height is set to a medium level. This 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per- increases driving safety and reduces air manently driven. Together with ESP®, it resistance. If you then drive at speeds below improves the traction of your vehicle when- 150 km/h, the rear axle ride height is read- ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient justed to the selected suspension tuning. grip. Load compensation The vehicle can compensate differences in PARKTRONIC the vehicle level by raising or lowering the rear axle. This is the case, for example, if peo- Important safety notes ple get out or if luggage is being loaded. PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and

Z 208 Driving systems

audibly the distance between your vehicle Range of the sensors and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substi- General notes tute for your attention to the immediate sur- PARKTRONIC does not take into account roundings. The responsibility for safe obstacles located: manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons, Make sure that there are no persons, animals animals or objects or objects in range while manoeuvring and Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang- parking. ing loads, tail sections or loading ramps of ! When parking, pay particular attention to goods vehicles objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK- TRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the Driving and parking vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARK- : Example: sensors in the front bumper, TRONIC to malfunction. left-hand side PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function cor- PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking you: care not to scratch or damage them Rswitch on the ignition (Y page 345). Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.

Example: side view Driving systems 209

Warning displays

Example: top view Front sensors Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the Centre Approx. 100 cm vehicle Driving and parking Corners Approx. 60 cm ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle Rear sensors = Segments showing operational readiness Centre Approx. 120 cm The warning displays show the distance Corners Approx. 80 cm between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located Minimum distance on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is loca- Centre Approx. 20 cm ted on the roof lining in the rear compart- Corners Approx. 15 cm ment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red seg- If there is an obstacle within this range, the ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow relevant warning displays light up and a warn- segments showing operational readiness ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below = the minimum, the distance may no longer be light up. shown. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission Warning display position D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas is rolling back- activated wards P No areas activated

Z 210 Driving systems

One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC Driving and parking

: Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Park Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Towing a trailer ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Driving systems 211

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Driving and parking

Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 345). warning displays are lit. Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is then X deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves.

X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist G WARNING The vehicle will veer out when parking and can General notes take you onto sections of the oncoming lane. Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking As a result, you may collide with other road aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on users. There is a risk of an accident. both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol When parking, pay attention to other road indicates a suitable parking space. Active users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel steering intervention can assist you during the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 207). ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at Important safety notes a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate Active Parking Assist may also display spaces surroundings. The responsibility for safe not suitable for parking, e.g.: manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Rparking or stopping prohibitions Make sure that no persons, animals or Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits objects are in the manoeuvring range. Runsuitable surfaces When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.

Z 212 Driving systems

Parking tips: into the parking space too soon. As a result, Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possi- you could cause a collision. There is a risk of ble past the parking space. an accident. Rparking spaces that are littered or over- If objects are located above the detection grown might be identified or measured range, stop the vehicle and switch Active incorrectly. Parking Assist off. Rparking spaces that are partially occupied For further information on the detection by trailer drawbars might not be identified range ( page 208). as such or be measured incorrectly. Y Active Parking Assist does not support you Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking with parking spaces parallel to the direction space being measured inaccurately. of travel if: Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC Rthe parking space is on a kerbstone (Y page 209) warning messages during the Rthe parking space appears blocked to the Driving and parking parking procedure. Rat any time, you can intervene in the steer- system, for example, by foliage or grass ing procedure to correct it. Active Parking paving blocks Assist will then be cancelled. Rthe area that the vehicle needs to manoeu- Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes vre is too small from your vehicle, you should not use Rthe parking space is bordered by an obsta- Active Parking Assist. cle, such as a tree, a post or a trailer Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Example: detected parking space Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel : Detected parking space on the left Rthat are on straight roads, not bends ; Parking symbol Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. = Detected parking space on the right not on the pavement Active Parking Assist is switched on automat- Detecting parking spaces ically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately Objects located above the height range of 35 km/h. While in operation, the system inde- Active Parking Assist will not be detected pendently locates and measures parking when the parking space is measured. These spaces on both sides of the vehicle. are not taken into account when the parking Active Parking Assist will only detect parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging spaces: loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are at least 1.5 m wide WARNING G Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your If objects are located above the detection vehicle range, Active Parking Assist may start to steer Driving systems 213

When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you X To cancel the procedure: press the will see parking symbol ; as a status indi- % button on the multifunction steering cator in the instrument cluster. When a park- wheel or pull away. ing space has been detected, an arrow or towards the right or the left also appears. X To park using Active Parking Assist: Active Parking Assist only displays parking press the a button on the multifunction spaces on the front-passenger side as stand- steering wheel. ard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are The Park Assist active Accelerate displayed as soon as the turn signal on the and brake Observe surroundings mes- driver's side is activated. When parking on the sage appears in the multifunction display. driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Park- X Release the multifunction steering wheel. ing Assist by pressing the a button on the X Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake multifunction steering wheel. at all times. When reversing, drive at a

speed below 10 km/h. Otherwise, Active Driving and parking i Take note that Active Parking Assist can- Parking Assist will be cancelled. not measure the size of parking spaces that are at right angles to the direction of travel. i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve You must decide for yourself whether the the best parking results by backing up as vehicle will fit in the parking space. far as possible. When doing so, also observe the PARKTRONIC messages. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approx- X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the imately 15 m away from it. continuous warning tone, if not before. Manoeuvring may be required in tight park- Parking ing spaces. The Park Assist active Select D G WARNING Observe surroundings message appears in Active Parking Assist merely aids you by inter- the multifunction display. vening actively in the steering. There is a risk Shift the transmission to position D while of accident if you do not apply the brakes X the vehicle is stationary. yourself. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in Always apply the brakes yourself when park- the other direction. ing and manoeuvring. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings mes- X Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol shows the desired parking space in the sage appears in the multifunction display. instrument cluster. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: before pulling away. % message appears in the multifunction X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all display. times. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. The Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.

Z 214 Driving systems

Additional transmission shifts may be neces- Active Parking Assist is cancelled automati- sary. cally if: As soon as the parking procedure is com- Rthe transmission is shifted too early plete, the Park Assist switched off mes- Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no sage appears in the multifunction display. longer possible PARKTRONIC continues to be available. Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h Manoeuvre if necessary. X Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails. X Always observe the warning messages dis- The ÷ warning lamp lights up in the played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 209). instrument cluster. Parking tips: A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the disappears and the multifunction display parking space after parking is dependent shows the Park Assist cancelled mes- on various factors. These include the posi- sage.

Driving and parking tion and shape of the vehicles parked in When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you front and behind it and the conditions of the must steer again yourself. location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a Towing a trailer parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the min- onto the kerb. If necessary, you should can- imum length for parking spaces is slightly cel the parking procedure with Active Park- increased. ing Assist. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, Ryou can also engage forward gear prema- you should not use Active Parking Assist. turely. The vehicle redirects and does not Once the electrical connection is established drive as far into the parking space. Should between your vehicle and the trailer, Active a gear be changed too early, the parking Parking Assist is no longer available. PARK- procedure will be cancelled. A sensible TRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Reversing camera Cancelling Active Parking Assist Important safety notes You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not time. a substitute for your attention to the imme- X Stop the movement of the multifunction diate surroundings. The responsibility for safe steering wheel or steer yourself. manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at Make sure that there are no persons, animals once. The Park Assist cancelled mes- or objects in range while manoeuvring and sage appears in the multifunction display. parking. or Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the function in a limited manner: centre console (Y page 210). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Rif the boot lid/tailgate is open Parking Assist is immediately cancelled. Rin heavy rain, snow or fog The Park Assist cancelled message Rat night or in very dark places appears in the multifunction display. Driving systems 215

Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Activating/deactivating the reversing Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED camera lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop

General notes X To activate: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Driving and parking X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear" setting is active in COMAND Online, see the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the COMAND display. X To change the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the Example: Coupé COMAND controller, select symbol : for Reversing camera : is located in the handle the "Reverse parking" function or sym- strip of the boot lid. bol ; for "Coupling up a trailer" (see the separate COMAND Online operating Reversing camera : is an optical parking instructions). and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area The symbol of the selected function is high- behind your vehicle with guide lines in the lighted. COMAND display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a To deactivate: the reversing camera is deac- mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. tivated if you: R i The text of messages shown in the shift the transmission to position P COMAND display depends on the language Rdrive 10 m forwards setting. The following are examples of Rshift the transmission from R to another reversing camera messages in the position after 15 seconds COMAND display. Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 10 km/h

Z 216 Driving systems

Displays in the COMAND display = CLS Shooting Brake: red guide line for The reversing camera may show a distorted the vehicle width including the exterior view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or mirrors, for current steering wheel angle not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the (dynamic). reversing camera in the following locations: ? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel R very close to the rear bumper angle (dynamic) Runder the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle i The following reversing camera display messages in the COMAND display correspond to the images in the CLS Coupé. The representations of the guide lines in the Driving and parking CLS Shooting Brake differ in the detail. ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- Rthe drawbar of a trailer imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle centre axle (marker assistance) Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch C Bumper Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post D Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle Use the guidelines only for orientation. (CLS Shooting Brake:0.25 m) Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the Additional messages for vehicles with PARK- exterior mirrors (static) TRONIC = CLS Coupé: yellow guide line for the vehi- : Front warning display cle width including the exterior mirrors, ; Additional PARKTRONIC operational read- for current steering wheel angle iness indicator (dynamic). = Rear warning display Driving systems 217

Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARK- X Make sure that the reversing camera is TRONIC is operational (Y page 207), addi- switched on (Y page 215). tional operational readiness indicator ; The lane and the guide lines are shown. appears in the COMAND display. If the PARK- X With the help of white guide lines :, check TRONIC warning displays are active or light whether the vehicle will fit into the parking up, warning displays : and = are also active space. or light up correspondingly in the COMAND X Using white guide lines : as a guide, care- display. fully reverse until you reach the end position. "Reverse parking" function Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost paral- Reversing straight into a parking space lel in the parking space. without turning the steering wheel Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle Driving and parking

: White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) : Parking space marking ; CLS Coupé: yellow guide line for the vehi- ; CLS Coupé: yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, cle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle for current steering wheel angle (dynamic). (dynamic). ; CLS Shooting Brake: red guide line for ; CLS Shooting Brake: red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic). (dynamic). = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle X Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on ( page 215). ? Red guide line at a distance of approx- Y The lane and the guide lines are shown. imately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle (CLS Shooting Brake:0.25 m) X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the park-

Z 218 Driving systems

ing space until yellow guide line ; reaches X Turn the steering wheel to the centre posi- parking space marking :. tion while the vehicle is stationary.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully.

: Red guide line at a distance of approx-

Driving and parking imately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle Reversing with the steering wheel turned (CLS Shooting Brake:0.25 m) : CLS Coupé: yellow guide line for the vehi- ; White lane indicating the route the vehicle cle width including the exterior mirrors, will take with the steering wheel straight for current steering wheel angle = End of parking space (dynamic). X Reverse carefully until you have reached : CLS Shooting Brake: red guide line for the end position. the vehicle width including the exterior Red guide line : is then at end of parking mirrors, for current steering wheel angle space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in (dynamic). the parking space. X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. "Coupling up a trailer" function The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible.

: Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle Driving to the final position ; Trailer drawbar : White guide line at current steering wheel angle This function is only available on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch. ; Parking space marking Driving systems 219

X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that ATTENTION ASSIST it is slightly higher than the ball coupling. Important safety notes X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar ;. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration until too late or not at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.

General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h to 180 km/h range. Driving and parking If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica- : Red guide line at a distance of approx- tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con- imately 0.30 m from the ball coupling centration on the part of the driver, it sug- ; Trailer drawbar locating aid gests taking a break. = Trailer drawbar ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of ? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking function the following criteria into account:

X Use the COMAND controller to select sym- Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering bol ?; see the separate operating instruc- characteristics tions for COMAND Online. Rjourney-related parameters, e.g. time of The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec- day, length of journey ted. The distance specifications now only The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is apply to objects that are at the same level restricted, and warnings may be delayed or as the ball coupling. not occur at all: Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer X Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur- drawbar locating aid ; points approx- face is uneven or if there are potholes imately in the direction of the trailer drawbar. Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar = with high cornering speeds or high rates of reaches red guide line :. acceleration The distance between the trailer drawbar and the red guide line is now approximately Rif you are predominantly driving slower 0.30 m. than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h Rif you are currently using COMAND Online X Couple up the trailer ( page 237). Y or making a telephone call with COMAND Online Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed

Z 220 Driving systems

Warning and display messages in the Speed Limit Assist multifunction display General notes X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- board computer (Y page 254). If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the Attention Assist: Drowsiness detected message appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press the a button to confirm the mes-

Driving and parking sage. : Speed Limit Assist camera On long journeys, take regular breaks in good Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you limits in the multifunction display. Data from do not take a break, you will be warned again the navigation system is also used for this after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only purpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speed happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects limit or the end of a speed limit is detected, typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lap- it is shown in the multifunction display. If ses in concentration. Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the signs, the speed limit from the digital road À symbol and OFF appear in the multi- map is taken and shown in the display. function display in the assistance graphics Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs display when the engine is running. with a camera attached behind the top of the ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts windscreen. assessing your tiredness again when you con- i Speed Limit Assist is not operational in all tinue your journey if: countries. Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the Important safety notes driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and does not to take a break always detect traffic signs specifying the maximum permissible speed. Traffic signs always have priority over the Speed Limit Assist display. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Driving systems 221

Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is by dirt, snow or trees generally displayed until: Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for speed limit is detected. instance near roadworks or on multi-lane Ryou make a turn. roads Ryou leave or enter a town. Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway, Information in the multifunction display country road). Ryou have travelled a certain minimum distance without the traffic sign being repeated or detected again. i You can also activate Speed Limit Assist using COMAND Online. The maximum per- Driving and parking missible speed is shown in the COMAND display; see the COMAND Online operating instructions.

: Traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the Night View Assist Plus end of a speed limit (example) ; Units used in the traffic sign displayed Important safety notes Briefly showing detected traffic signs in Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not the multifunction display a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning responsible for the distance to the vehicle in function using the on-board computer front, for vehicle speed and for braking in (Y page 253). good time. Drive carefully and always adapt A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the your driving style to suit the prevailing road end of a speed limit : appears in the mul- and traffic conditions. tifunction display for approximately five The system may be impaired or may not func- seconds as soon as it is detected. Any other tion if: information in the multifunction display is hidden for this period. Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Permanently showing detected traffic Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov- signs in the multifunction display ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity X Display Speed Limit Assist using the on- of the camera board computer (Y page 252). Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the gradients end of a speed limit : appears in the mul- Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or tifunction display as soon as it is detected. inoperative if: Rpedestrians are partially or entirely obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night View Assist Plus display is incomplete or

Z 222 Driving systems

interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflec- Activating Night View Assist Plus tions Rpedestrians do not contrast with the sur- Activation conditions roundings You can only activate Night View Assist Plus Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, if: e.g. sitting, squatting or lying Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock Rit is dark Rthe light switch is in the Ã or L position Rreverse gear has not been engaged Activating Night View Assist Plus Driving and parking

In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road. Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up the infrared light and displays a monochrome image in COMAND. The image displayed in COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by X Make sure that COMAND Online is main-beam headlamps. This enables you to switched on. see the road's course and any obstacles in X Press button :. good time. When pedestrian recognition is The Night View Assist Plus display appears active, pedestrians recognised by the system in the COMAND display. are highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus display. You can read about how to adjust the bright- Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehi- ness of the COMAND display in the COMAND cles does not affect the Night View Assist Plus Online operating instructions. display in the multifunction display. This is i The infrared headlamps only switch on also the case if you cannot switch on the when the vehicle is being driven at speeds main-beam headlamps due to oncoming traf- of at least 10 km/h. This means that you fic. do not have the full visual range while sta- i Infrared light is not visible to the human tionary and cannot check whether Night eye and therefore does not dazzle. Night View Assist Plus is working. View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic. Driving systems 223

Pedestrian recognition Misted up or dirty windscreen If the windscreen in front of the camera is misted up or dirty on the inside or outside, the Night View Assist Plus display is affected.

X To demist: check the automatic air conditioning settings (Y page 145) and fold down the camera cover (Y page 347). X To demist the inside of the windscreen: fold down the camera cover (Y page 347) and clean the windscreen (Y page 344). : Night View Assist Plus display ; Pedestrian recognised = Framing Driving and parking ? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition i Animals are not recognised by pedestrian recognition. Night View Assist Plus can recognise pedestrians using typical characteristics, e.g. when there is a silhouette in the shape of a person. Pedestrian recognition is then switched on automatically: Rif Night View Assist Plus is activated Rif you are driving faster than approximately 10 km/h Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when driving outside built-up areas without street lighting If pedestrian recognition is active, symbol ? appears. If pedestrians are detected, they are highlighted with framing =. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windscreen to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gauged accurately by looking at a screen. It may be the case that objects are highlighted as well as pedestrians.

Z 224 Driving systems

Problems with Night View Assist Plus

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The picture quality of The windscreen wipers are smearing the windscreen. Night View Assist Plus X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 132). has deteriorated. The windscreen is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash.

X Clean the windscreen (Y page 344). There is windscreen chip damage in the camera's field of vision.

X Replace the windscreen. The windscreen is misted up on the inside. Driving and parking X Demist the windscreen (Y page 145). The windscreen is iced up.

X De-ice the windscreen (Y page 144). There is dirt on the inside of the windscreen.

X Clean the inside of the windscreen (Y page 344).

Lane Tracking package Important safety notes WARNING General notes G Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind R Spot Assist ( page 224) and Lane Keeping overtaken too closely on the side, placing Y them in the blind spot area Assist (Y page 226). Rwhen the difference in the speed of Blind Spot Assist approach and overtaking is too great As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn General notes drivers in these situations. There is a risk of Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system an accident. to monitor the areas on both sides of your Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- vehicle. It supports you from speeds of uation and maintain a safe distance at the side 30 km/h. A warning display in the exterior of the vehicle. mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to switch on the corresponding turn signal to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for change lane, you will also receive an optical attentive driving. Always ensure that there is and audible collision warning. For monitoring, sufficient distance to the side for other road Active Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the users and obstacles. rear bumper. For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational. Driving systems 225

Monitoring range of the sensors Due to the nature of the system: In particular, the detection of obstacles can Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- be impaired in the case of: ing close to crash barriers or similar solid Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- lane borders. ing the sensors Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, alongside long vehicles, for example lor- snow or spray ries, for a prolonged time. Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicy- The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist cles are integrated into the sides of the rear Rvery wide lanes bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. Rnarrow lanes The sensors must not be covered, for exam- Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol- lane lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam- Rbarriers or other road boundaries age to the bumpers, have the function of the Driving and parking Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not sensors checked at a qualified specialist indicated. workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at CLS Coupé speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehi- cles in the monitoring range are then not indi- Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to cated. 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel- If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may low up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out driving in the middle of their lane. This may and Blind Spot Assist is operational. be the case if there are vehicles at the edge If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring of their lane nearest your vehicle. range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind

Z 226 Driving systems

spot monitoring range from behind or from To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist if: the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition warning only occurs if the difference in speed lock. is less than 12 km/h. Rthe engine is not running. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse Rthe electrical connection to the trailer gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then has been established. deactivated. The brightness of the indicator/warning Lane Keeping Assist lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Important safety notes Collision warning G WARNING If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the identify lane markings.

Driving and parking corresponding turn signal, a double warning In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may: tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If Rgive an unnecessary warning the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles R are indicated by the flashing of red warning not give a warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic Activating Blind Spot Assist situation and keep in lane, especially if Lane X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist Keeping Assist alerts you. (Y page 254) is activated in the on-board computer. G WARNING X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not lock. return the vehicle to the original lane. There Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors is a risk of an accident. light up red for approximately Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keep- ing Assist alerts you. Towing a trailer If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane correctly established the electrical connec- Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of tion. This can be accomplished by checking accident nor override the laws of physics. the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yel- road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane low in the exterior mirrors and the Blind Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are respon- Spot Assist currently unavailable sible for the distance to the vehicle in front, See Owner's Manual message appears in for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, the multifunction display. and for staying in the lane. i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi- the exterior mirrors. cle in its lane. Driving systems 227

The system may be impaired or may not func- the on-board computer and selected km as tion if: the unit of measurement, Lane Keeping Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- Assist is active starting at a speed of cient illumination of the road, or due to 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, snow, rain, fog or spray the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, A warning may be given if a front wheel the sun or reflection from other vehicles passes over a lane marking. It will warn you (e.g. if the road surface is wet) by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, Activating Lane Keeping Assist in the vicinity of the camera X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are the on-board computer; to do so, select present for one lane, e.g. in a construction Standard or Adaptive(Y page 254). area If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and Driving and parking Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or lane markings are detected, the lines in the covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow assistance graphics display (Y page 253) Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is small and the lane markings thus cannot be ready for use. detected Standard Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or If Standard is selected, no warning vibration merge occurs if: R Rthe road is narrow and winding you have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for R there are highly variable shade conditions a certain period of time. on the road Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as General notes ABS, BAS or ESP®. Adaptive If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an front of your vehicle by means of a cam- obstacle or change lane quickly. era :, at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. road and warns you before you leave your In order that you are warned only when nec- lane unintentionally. essary and in good time if you cross the lane If you have chosen the Display unit marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. Speed-/odometer:(Y page 255) function in

Z 228 Driving systems

The warning vibration occurs earlier if: For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a when driving, the radar sensor system must bend. be: Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor- Ractivated(Y page 259) way. Roperational Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. Important safety notes The warning vibration occurs later if: Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is Rthe road has narrow lanes. not a substitute for attentive driving. Ryou cut the corner on a bend. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to Active Driving Assistance package vehicles: Rovertaking too closely on the side, placing

Driving and parking General notes them in the blind spot area The Active Driving Assistance package con- Rif the difference in the speed of approach sists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 192), Active and overtaking is too great Blind Spot Assist (Y page 228) and Active As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei- Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 231). ther give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Active Blind Spot Assist Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side General notes of the vehicle. Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system, pointed toward the rear of the vehi- Radar sensors cle, to monitor the area to the sides of the The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A integrated into the front and rear bumpers warning display in the exterior mirrors draws and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make your attention to vehicles detected in the sure that the bumpers and the cover in the monitored area. If you then switch on the cor- radiator grille are free of dirt, ice or slush. The responding turn signal to change lanes, you rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by will also receive an optical and audible colli- bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following sion warning. If a risk of side impact is detec- a severe impact or in the event of damage to ted, corrective braking may help you avoid a the bumpers, have the function of the radar collision. Before a course-correcting brake sensors checked at a qualified specialist application, Active Blind Spot Assist evalu- workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may oth- ates the space in the direction of travel and erwise no longer work properly. at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors which Monitoring range are pointed in the direction of travel. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all speed of approximately 30 km/h. traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Driving systems 229

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehi- Driving and parking Example: CLS Coupé cles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up If active Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indi- to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next cator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds The detection of obstacles can be impaired in above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out the case of: and active Blind Spot Assist is operational. Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring ing the sensors range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corre- spray sponding side lights up red. A warning is Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not always issued when a vehicle enters the blind indicated or indicated with a delay. spot monitoring range from behind or from Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar- the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy- warning only occurs if the difference in speed cles, or may only detect them too late. is less than 12 km/h. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not then no longer active. driving in the middle of their lane. This may The brightness of the indicator/warning be the case if there are vehicles at the edge lamps is adjusted automatically according to of their lane. the ambient light. Due to the nature of the system: Visual and acoustic collision warning Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- If you switch on the turn signals to change ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side lane borders monitoring range, you receive a visual and Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving acoustic collision warning. You then hear a alongside long vehicles, for example lor- double warning tone and red warning ries, for a prolonged time. lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flash-

Z 230 Driving systems

ing of red warning lamp :. There are no fur- slightly in the opposite direction or acceler- ther warning tones. ate, for example. The course-correcting brake application is Course-correcting brake application available in the speed range between G WARNING 30 km/h and 200 km/h. A course-correcting brake application cannot Either a course-correcting brake application always prevent a collision. There is a risk of appropriate to the driving situation, or none an accident. at all, may occur if: Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns barriers, on both sides of your vehicle you or makes a course-correcting brake appli- Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the side sides. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

Driving and parking high cornering speeds Ryou brake or accelerate decisively Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake RESP® is deactivated. Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected Activating Active Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 259) and Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 254) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately Example: CLS Coupé 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a Towing a trailer side impact in the monitoring range, a course- correcting brake application is carried out. If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have This is designed to help you avoid a collision. correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking If a course-correcting brake application the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up exterior mirror and a dual warning tone yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Active sounds. In addition, the display shown in the Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ lower image appears in the multifunction dis- able See Owner's Manual message play. appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. An inappropriate course-correcting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer Driving systems 231

Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. General notes G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area Driving and parking in front of your vehicle by means of a cam- situation and keep within the lane, especially era : at the top of the windscreen. Active if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter- Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on minate the intervention in a non-critical driv- the road and warns you before you leave your ing situation. lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the The system may be impaired or may not func- warning, a lane-correcting application of the tion if: brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- If you have chosen the Display unit cient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Speed-/odometer:(Y page 255) function in the on-board computer and selected km as Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the unit of measurement, Lane Keeping the sun or reflection from other vehicles Assist is active starting at a speed of (e.g. if the road surface is wet) 60 km/h. If miles is selected as the display Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam- unit, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. aged or covered, for instance by a sticker, For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you in the vicinity of the camera when driving, the radar sensor system must Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear be operational. bumper or in the radiator grille are dirty, e.g. due to snow Important safety notes Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active present for one lane, e.g. in a construction Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the area risk of an accident nor override the laws of Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. It cannot detect possible road and Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist small and the lane markings thus cannot be is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis- detected tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. for braking in good time and for staying in the lanes branch off, cross one another or lane. merge

Z 232 Driving systems

Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and there are broken lane markings are detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made. Warning vibration through the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you If you leave your lane under certain circum- by means of intermittent vibration in the stances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. side. This is designed to help you bring the vehicle back into the original lane. Driving and parking Lane-correcting brake application If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, G WARNING display : appears in the multifunction dis- A lane-correcting brake application cannot play. always bring the vehicle back into the original This function is available in the range between lane. There is a risk of an accident. 60 km/h and 200 km/h. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, A lane-correcting brake application can only especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns be made after driving over a solid, recognis- you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli- able lane marking. Before this, a warning cation. must have been issued by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel. In G WARNING addition, a lane with lane markings on both Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect sides must be recognised. The brake applica- traffic conditions or road users. In very rare tion also slightly reduces driving speed. cases, the system may make an inappropriate i A further lane-correcting brake applica- brake application, e.g. after intentionally driv- tion can only occur after your vehicle has ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk returned to the original lane. of an accident. No lane-correcting brake application occurs An inappropriate brake application may be if: interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Always make sure that Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or there is sufficient distance to the side for accelerate. other traffic or obstacles. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. Towing a trailer 233

Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. electrical connection to the trailer has been Ryou brake hard. correctly established. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid RESP® is deactivated. an obstacle or change lane quickly. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre In order that you are warned only when nec- has been detected and displayed. essary and in good time if you cross the lane Active Lane Keeping Assist may is unable to marking, the system recognises certain con- detect other road or traffic conditions. An ditions and warns you accordingly. inappropriate brake application may be inter- The warning vibration occurs earlier if: rupted at any time if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction. bend. Ryou use a turn signal. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor- Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. way. Driving and parking A lane-correcting brake application is inter- Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. rupted automatically if: The warning vibration occurs later if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as Rthe road has narrow lanes. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Ryou cut the corner on a bend. Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognised. Towing a trailer If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist correctly established the electrical connec- X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using tion. This can be accomplished by checking the on-board computer; to do so, select the trailer lighting. Standard or Adaptive(Y page 254). If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lines in the Towing a trailer assistance graphics display (Y page 253) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is Important safety notes ready for use. WARNING If Standard is selected, no warning vibra- G tion occurs if: The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In This increases the braking distance and could this case, the warnings are suppressed even cause the braking system to fail. There for a certain period of time. is a risk of an accident. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such ® Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do as ABS, BAS or ESP . not simultaneously depress both the brake If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra- pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. tion occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In G WARNING this case, the warnings are suppressed You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer for a certain period of time. combination if it begins to swerve. The vehi- Ra driving safety system intervenes, such cle/trailer combination could even overturn. as ABS, BAS or ESP®. There is a risk of an accident.

Z 234 Towing a trailer

On no account should you attempt to 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on straighten out the vehicle/trailer combina- the ball coupling. tion by increasing speed. Decrease your When reversing the vehicle towards the speed and do not countersteer. Brake if nec- trailer, make sure there is nobody between essary. the trailer and the vehicle. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If G WARNING you do not couple the trailer to the towing If you exceed the permissible noseweight vehicle correctly, the trailer could become while carrying a load, the carrier system could detached. detach from the vehicle and fall on the road. Make sure that the following values are not There is a risk of an accident and injury. exceeded: Always maintain the permissible noseweight Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight when carrying loads. Rthe permissible trailer load

Driving and parking ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing results in excessive and premature wear to vehicle the brake pads. Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle If you exceed the maximum permissible noseweight of both the towing vehicle and the weight of the trailer drawbar on the ball cou- trailer pling, the following may become damaged: You will find the applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, in the vehi- Ryour vehicle cle documents. Rthe trailer You will find the values approved by the man- Rthe ball coupling ufacturer on the vehicle identification plates Rtrailer tow hitch and those for the towing vehicle under "Tech- The vehicle/trailer combination could nical data" (Y page 417). become unstable. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling If the noseweight used is lower than the min- characteristics will be different in comparison imum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/ to when driving without a trailer. trailer combination may also become unsta- The vehicle/trailer combination: ble. Ris heavier To avoid hazardous situations: Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi- Rmake sure to check the noseweight before ent-climbing capability each journey Rhas an increased braking distance Ruse a drawbar noseweight as close as pos- Ris affected more by strong crosswinds sible to the maximum noseweight Rdemands more sensitive steering Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible Rhas a larger turning circle noseweight This can impair the vehicle's handling char- Rdo not use a noseweight lower than the acteristics. Adapt your style of driving accord- minimum permissible trailer drawbar nose- ingly. Maintain a safe distance. Drive care- weight fully. You can use carrier systems, e.g. bicycle When towing a trailer, always adjust your racks or load-bearing implements, on the ball speed to the current road and weather con- coupling. The maximum noseweight of ditions. Do not exceed the maximum permis- Towing a trailer 235 sible speed for your vehicle/trailer combina- the trailer's documents to see what the max- tion. imum permitted speed is. Observe the legally prescribed maximum speed in the relevant country. Notes on towing a trailer For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased General notes when towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technical ! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as data" section to find out whether this applies possible to the maximum permissible nose- to your vehicle. If you utilise any of the added weight. Do not use a noseweight of less maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come the vehicle/trailer combination may not loose. exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for Note that the payload and the rear axle load reasons concerning the operating permit. are reduced by the actual payload. This also applies in countries in which the

permissible maximum speed for vehicle/ Driving and parking i When towing a trailer, set the tyre pres- trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. sure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure characteristics will be different in comparison table in the fuel filler flap ( page 375). Y to when driving without a trailer and it will You will find fitting dimensions and loads in consume more fuel. the "Technical data" section (Y page 415). Change into a lower gear in good time on long The maximum permissible trailer drawbar and steep downhill gradients. noseweight on the ball coupling is 84 kg. When driving vehicles with an automatic The actual noseweight may not, however, be transmission on long and steep downhill gra- higher than the value which is given: dients, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3. Ron the type plate of the trailer tow hitch and i This also applies if you have activated Ron the type plate of the trailer cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS- The lowest weight applies. TRONIC PLUS. Please note that when towing a trailer, PARK- This will use the braking effect of the engine, TRONIC (Y page 207), Active Parking Assist so less braking will be required to prevent the (Y page 211) and Blind Spot Assist vehicle from gaining speed. This relieves the (Y page 224) are only available with limita- load on the brake system and prevents the tions, or not at all. brakes from overheating and wearing too i On vehicles without level control, the quickly. If you need additional braking, height of the ball coupling will alter accord- depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather ing to the load placed on the vehicle. If nec- than continuously. essary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. Driving tips If the trailer swings from side to side: Driving tips X Do not accelerate. ® i Observe the notes on ESP trailer stabi- X Do not countersteer. lisation (Y page 72). X Brake if necessary. The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check

Z 236 Towing a trailer

RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi- The release wheel is located behind the left- cle in front than when driving without a hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage trailer. compartment. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake To open the cover: gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold Then, increase the braking force rapidly. X down cover ;. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradient- climbing capability, decrease with increasing altitude. Driving and parking Folding out the ball coupling

G WARNING If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged, CLS Shooting Brake the trailer can detach. There is a risk of an To unlock and fold out the ball coupling: accident. X Grip release wheel ? so that your thumb Always engage the ball coupling as described. lies on the thumb rest. Turn release wheel ? anti-clockwise until G WARNING X If you release the ball coupling or it does not the ball coupling releases and folds out engage correctly when folding in, it will swing from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, = flashes. there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in.

X Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages in a vertical position. Indicator lamp = goes out.

CLS Shooting Brake Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, you must fold out the ball coupling. Towing a trailer 237

The multifunction display shows the become trapped between the vehicle body Trailer hitch Check lock mech. mes- and tyres, or underneath the vehicle. This sage until the ball coupling is engaged. poses a risk of injury. X Remove the protective covering from the Make sure that no-one is in the immediate ball coupling and store it in a safe place. vicinity of the wheel arch or underneath the X Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling vehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable. is clean and greased. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an The power socket is integrated in the ball engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your coupling. vehicle could be damaged by the rebound- ing of the overrun brake. Coupling up a trailer X Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Make sure that the transmission is in posi- X Apply the parking brake. tion P. Driving and parking X Secure the trailer against rolling away. X Apply the parking brake. X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle. trailer. X Couple up the trailer. X Establish the electric connection between the vehicle and the trailer. Folding in the ball coupling X Check that the trailer lighting system is working. G WARNING A trailer that is connected is recognised If you release the ball coupling or it does not only when the electrical connection is engage correctly when folding in, it will swing established correctly and when the lighting out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, system is working properly. The function of there is an increased risk of an accident and other systems, such as ESP®, PARKTRONIC injury. and Active Parking Assist also depends on Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting this. range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in.

X Place the protective covering on the ball Uncoupling a trailer coupling. G WARNING If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses a risk of injury. Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake.

G WARNING Vehicles with level control: If you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicle CLS Shooting Brake is lowered. This can cause you or others to

Z 238 Towing a trailer

The release wheel is located behind the left- Trailer power supply hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage compartment. ! You can connect accessories with a power rating of up to 240 W to the perma- To open the cover: nent power supply and with a power rating X Turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold of up to 180 W to the power supply that is down cover ;. switched on via the ignition lock. The trailer battery may not be charged from the power supply.

X To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or 0 respectively (Y page 157). When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's Driving and parking trailer socket is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. CLS Shooting Brake The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. To unlock and lower the ball coupling: The power supply that is switched on via the X Grasp release wheel ? with your hand ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin such that the thumb is in the thumb rest 10. and turn it anti-clockwise. The trailer's permanent power supply is The ball coupling unlocks and lowers. Indi- switched off in the event of low vehicle supply cator lamp = flashes. voltage and after six hours at the latest. You can find more information about installing the trailer electrics at a qualified specialist workshop.

Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps i If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an error message may appear in the multifunction display even if there is no fault. The reason for the error message could be that the current has fallen below the minimum X Press the ball coupling in the direction of of 50 mA. the arrow until it engages behind the bumper. To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failure Indicator lamp = goes out and the mes- indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting sage in the multifunction display disap- must be guaranteed a minimum current of pears. 50 mA. i Fold the ball coupling back in if you are not using the trailer tow hitch. Towing a trailer 239

Trailer with 7-pin connector General notes Trailers with 7-pin connector: you can make a connection to the 13-pin connector on the ball coupling using an adapter plug or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both can be obtained in a qualified specialist workshop.

Fitting the adapter ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. Driving and parking

X Open the socket cover. X Insert connector with lug : into groove ; of the socket. Turn the connector clockwise to the stop. X Let the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties.

Z 240 241

Useful information ...... 242 Important safety notes ...... 242 Displays and operation ...... 243 Menus and submenus ...... 246 Display messages ...... 265 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ...... 292 On-board computer and displays 242 Important safety notes

Useful information times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident. i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- For an overview; see the instrument panel els, series and optional equipment for your illustration (Y page 32). vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

On-board computer and displays G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function restrictions relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all Displays and operation 243

Displays and operation Instrument cluster On-board computer and displays

Instrument cluster: kilometres : Speedometer with segments (Y page 244) ; Multifunction display (Y page 245) = Rev counter (Y page 244) ? Coolant temperature (Y page 244) A Fuel gauge

Instrument cluster: miles : Speedometer with segments (Y page 244) ; Multifunction display (Y page 245) = Rev counter (Y page 244)

Z 244 Displays and operation

? Coolant temperature (Y page 244) A Fuel gauge

Coolant temperature gauge Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is which speed range is available. overheating or while there is a fire in the RCruise control activated (Y page 186): engine compartment, you could come into The segments light up from the stored contact with hot gases or other leaking speed to the maximum speed. service products. There is a danger of injury. RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated Allow an overheating engine to cool down (Y page 189): before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in The segments light up from the start of the the engine compartment, leave the bonnet scale to the selected limit speed. closed and notify the fire brigade. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 192): On-board computer and displays The coolant temperature gauge is in the One or two segments in the set speed instrument cluster on the left-hand side range light up. (Y page 32). RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: Under normal operating conditions and with The segments between the speed of the the specified coolant level, the coolant tem- vehicle in front and the stored speed light perature may rise to 120 †. up. At high outside temperatures and when driving uphill, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. Operating the on-board computer Overview Rev counter ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 245). : Multifunction display Changes in the outside temperature are dis- ; Right control panel played after a short delay. Displays and operation 245

= Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep- Right control panel arate operating instructions ~ R ? Back button Rejects or ends a call RExits telephone book/redial A Left control panel memory X To activate the on-board computer: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. 6 RMakes or accepts a call RSwitches to the redial memory You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using W RAdjusts the volume the buttons on the multifunction steering X wheel. 8 RMute Left control panel Back button = RCalls up the menu and menu bar ; % Press briefly: R

Back On-board computer and displays 9 Press briefly: RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC; : RScrolls through lists see the separate operating RSelects a submenu or function instructions RIn the Audio menu: selects a RHides display messages/calls stored station, an audio track or up the last Trip menu function a video scene used RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: RExits the telephone book/redial switches to the phone book and memory selects a name or telephone number % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in 9 Press and hold: the Trip menu : RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene Multifunction display using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open a RConfirms selection/display message RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number R In the Audio menu: stops the : Description field station search function at the ; Menu bar desired station = Drive program (Y page 166)

Z 246 Menus and submenus

? Transmission position (Y page 166) The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly A Permanent display: outside temperature in vehicles with an audio system and in vehi- or speed ( page 255) cles with COMAND Online. The examples Y given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles X To show menu bar;: press the = equipped with COMAND Online. or ; button on the steering wheel. Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds. Trip menu Text field : shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. Standard display The following messages can appear in the multifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation (Y page 171) XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 211) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist On-board computer and displays Press and hold the % button on the (Y page 127) X steering wheel until the Trip menu with ¤ start/stop function (Y page 160) trip meter : and total distance ë HOLD function ( page 201) Y recorder ; is shown. 120 km/h Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) Trip computer "From start" or "From reset"

Menus and submenus Menu overview Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu. Operating the on-board computer Example: "From start" trip computer : Distance (Y page 244). Depending on the equipment fitted in the ; Time vehicle, you can call up the following menus: = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption RTrip menu (Y page 246) RNavi menu (navigation instructions) X Press the = or ; button on the steer- (Y page 248) ing wheel to select the Trip menu. R Audio menu (Y page 249) X Press the 9 or : button to select RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 251) From start or From reset. RAssist. menu (assistance) (Y page 252) The values in the From start submenu are RServ. menu (Y page 254) calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From reset submenu are RSettings menu (settings) (Y page 255) calculated from the last time the submenu RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 261) was reset (Y page 247). Menus and submenus 247

The From start trip computer is automati- The approximate range which can be covered cally reset if: depends on the fuel level and your current Rthe ignition has been switched off for more driving style. If there is only a small amount than four hours. of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows R999 hours have been exceeded. a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. The From reset trip computer is automati- Digital speedometer cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres.

ECO display

: Gearshift recommendation (Y page 171)

; Digital speedometer On-board computer and displays

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Example: ECO display ing wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the 9 or : button to select the ing wheel to select the Trip menu. digital speedometer. X Press 9 or : to select ECO DIS‐ i If gearshift recommendation is shown at PLAY. the top of the multifunction display, it is not If the ignition remains switched off for longer shown at the bottom of the multifunction than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- display. matically reset. For further information on the ECO display; Resetting values see (Y page 182).

Displaying the range and current fuel consumption

Example: resetting the trip computer "From start"

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steer- function that you wish to reset. ing wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select the X Press the : button to select Yes and current fuel consumption (not for AMG press the a button to confirm. vehicles) and the approximate range.

Z 248 Menus and submenus

You can reset the values of the following func- Route guidance active tions: No change of direction announced Rtrip meter Rtrip computer "From start" Rtrip computer "From reset" RECO display i If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in : Distance to the destination the ECO display are also reset. ; Distance to the next change of direction = Current street ? Symbol indicating "follow the road's Navigation menu course" Displaying navigation instructions Change of direction announced without a On-board computer and displays In the Navi menu, the multifunction display lane recommendation shows navigation instructions. For more information on navigation; see the separate operating instructions. ® X Switch on the audio system with Becker MAP PILOT or COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. Press the = or ; button on the steer- X : Road to which the change of direction ing wheel to select the Navi menu. leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual Route guidance not active distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is announced, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. This shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. : Direction of travel ; Current street Menus and submenus 249

Change of direction announced with a Audio menu lane recommendation Selecting a radio station

: Road to which the change of direction leads : Waveband ; Distance to change of direction and visual ; Station frequency with memory position distance display i Station ; is displayed with the station = New lane during a change of direction frequency or station name. The memory ? Lane continues through change of direc- position is only displayed along with station tion ; if this has been stored.

A Lane recommendation On-board computer and displays X Switch on the audio system or COMAND B Change-of-direction symbol Online and select Radio; see the separate On multilane roads, the system can display operating instructions. lane recommendation = for the next change X Press the = or ; button on the steer- of direction. During the change of direction, ing wheel to select the Audio menu. additional lanes may be displayed. X To select a stored station: briefly press Lane recommendations are only displayed if the 9 or : button. the relevant data is available on the digital X To select a station from the station map. list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. Other status indicators of the navigation system If no station list is received: X To select a station using the station RO: you have reached the destination or an search: press and briefly hold the 9 intermediate destination. or : button. RNew route... or Calculating route: calculating a new route i For information on switching wavebands ROff map or Off road: the vehicle position and storing stations; see the separate oper- is outside the area of the digital map (off- ating instructions. map position). i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast- RNo route: no route could be calculated to ing); see the separate operating instruc- the selected destination. tions.

Z 250 Menus and submenus

Audio player or audio media operation TV operation

Example: CD/DVD changer display : Channel frequency with memory position : Current track i The memory position is only displayed Audio data from various audio devices or along with channel : if this has been media can be played, depending on the equip- stored. ment fitted in the vehicle. X Switch on COMAND Online and select TV; X Switch on the audio system or COMAND see the separate operating instructions. Online and select audio CD, audio DVD or X Press the = or ; button on the steer- MP3 mode; see the separate operating

On-board computer and displays ing wheel to select the Audio menu. instructions. X To select a stored channel: briefly press X Press the = or ; button on the steer- the 9 or : button. ing wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a channel from the channel X To select the next/previous track: list: press and briefly hold the 9 briefly press the 9 or : button. or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the i Storing a TV channel; see the separate 9 or : button until desired operating instructions. track : has been reached. i Depending on the digital TV broadcaster, If you press and hold the 9 or : but- radio stations can also be received. The ton, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. multifunction display shows TV (RADIO). Not all audio devices or media support this function. Video DVD operation If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected).

Example: CD/DVD changer display : Current scene

X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select video DVD; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. Menus and submenus 251

X To select the next or previous scene: When you enter your PIN via the mobile briefly press the 9 or : button. phone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio system

X To select a scene from the scene list or COMAND Online, the mobile phone (rapid scrolling): press and hold the searches for a network. 9 or : button until desired RTelephone ready or the name of the net- scene : has been reached. work provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No service: there is no net- Telephone menu work available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Introduction i You can obtain further information about G WARNING suitable mobile phones and connecting Operating the integrated information systems mobile phones via Bluetooth®: and communications equipment in the vehicle Rfrom any Mercedes Benz Service Centre while driving will distract you from traffic con- Ron the Internet at: http:// ditions. You could then lose control of the www.mercedes-benz.com/connect vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. On-board computer and displays Only operate these devices if road traffic con- Accepting a call ditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. Example: incoming call X Switch on the mobile phone; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the 6 button on the steering X Switch on the audio system or COMAND wheel to accept an incoming call. Online; see the separate operating instruc- If someone calls you when you are in the tions. Tel menu, a display message appears in the X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket multifunction display. (Y page 325). You can accept a call even if you are not in or the Tel menu. ® X Establish a Bluetooth connection to COMAND Online; see the separate operat- Rejecting or ending a call ing instructions. X Press the ~ button on the steering X Press the = or ; button on the steer- wheel. ing wheel to select the Tel menu. You can end or reject a call even if you are not You will see one of the following display mes- in the Tel menu. sages in the multifunction display: RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has been placed in the mobile phone bracket and the PIN has not been entered.

Z 252 Menus and submenus

Dialling a number from the phone book Assistance menu X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Introduction ing wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than In the Assist. menu, you have the following one second. options: Rapid scrolling stops when you release the Rshowing Speed Limit Assist and activating/ button or reach the end of the list. deactivating its message function X If only one telephone number is stored (Y page 252) for a name: press the 6 or a button Rshowing the assistance graphic

On-board computer and displays to start dialling. (Y page 253) or Ractivating/deactivating ® X If there is more than one number for a ESP (Y page 253) particular name: press the 6 or a Ractivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake button to display the numbers. (Y page 253) X Press the 9 or : button to select the Ractivating/deactivating ATTENTION number you want to dial. ASSIST (Y page 254) X Press the 6 or a button to start dial- Ractivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist ling. or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 254) or Ractivating/deactivating Lane Keeping X To exit the telephone book: press the Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist ~ or % button. (Y page 254)

Speed Limit Assist Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names Displaying Speed Limit Assist or numbers dialled in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Speed Lim. Asst. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the a button. Under certain conditions, detected speed X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. limits are shown in the multifunction display (Y page 220). X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button. Menus and submenus 253

Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- Assist message function lowing situations: X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Rwhen using snow chains ing wheel to select the Assist. menu. Rin deep snow X Press the 9 or : button to select Ron sand or gravel Speed Lim. Asst. Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehi- X Press the a button. cles (Y page 70). The multifunction display shows Speed For further information about ESP®, see Limit Assist. (Y page 69). X Press the : button. Start the engine. The current selection is displayed. X X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X To activate or deactivate: press a. If the Speed Limit Assist message function ing wheel to select the Assist. menu. is activated, a detected speed limit is auto- X Press the 9 or : button to select matically displayed for five seconds. Other ESP. items in the multifunction display are not X Press the a button. shown during this time. The current selection is displayed. On-board computer and displays X To activate/deactivate: press the a Showing the assistance graphic button again. ® X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ESP is deactivated if the å warning lamp ing wheel to select the Assist. menu. in the instrument cluster lights up continu- X Press the 9 or : button to select ously when the engine is running. Asst. graphic. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn- ® X Press the a button. ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP is not The DISTRONIC PLUS assistance graphic available due to a malfunction. appears in the multifunction display Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 198). (Y page 297). Observe the information on display messages Deactivating/activating ESP® (Y page 266). i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® tion in the description of ESP (Y page 69). Brake G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- with DISTRONIC PLUS. bilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk Press the = or ; button on the steer- of skidding and an accident. X ing wheel to select the Assist. menu. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- Press the 9 or : button to select bed in the following. X PRE-SAFE Brake. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again.

Z 254 Menus and submenus

When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping assistance graphic shows the æ symbol in Assist the multifunction display. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ® For more information on PRE-SAFE Brake, ing wheel to select the Assist. menu. see (Y page 73). X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keep. Assist Activating/deactivating ATTENTION Press the a button. ASSIST X The current selection is displayed. Press the = or ; button on the steer- X X Press a to confirm. ing wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, X Press the 9 or : button to select Standard or Adaptive. Attention Assist. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 226). X To activate/deactivate: press the a For further information about Active Lane On-board computer and displays button again. Keeping Assist, see (Y page 231). When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunction display in the assistance display Service menu when the engine is running. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST; see (Y page 219).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. In the Serv. menu, you have the following options: X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist. Rcall up display messages in message memory (Y page 265) X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. Rrestart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 377) X To activate/deactivate: press the a R button again. check the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 378) If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors deac‐ Rcall up the service due date ( page 340) tivated or Act. B. Spot Assist Sen‐ Y sors deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated.

X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 259). For further information about Blind Spot Assist; see (Y page 224). For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist; see (Y page 228). Menus and submenus 255

Settings menu The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Introduction Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu Rtotal distance recorder and the trip meter Rtrip computer Rcurrent consumption and the range Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control In the Settings menu, you have the following RSPEEDTRONIC options: RDISTRONIC PLUS Rchange the instrument cluster settings RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 255) Selecting the permanent display function Rchange the light settings (Y page 255) You can determine whether the multifunction Rchange the vehicle settings (Y page 258)

display permanently shows your speed or the On-board computer and displays Rchange the auxiliary heating settings outside temperature. (Y page 259) Rchange the convenience settings X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. (Y page 260) Press the : or 9 button to select the Rrestore the factory settings (Y page 261) X Inst. cluster submenu. Instrument cluster X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Selecting the unit of measurement for dis- Permanent display: function. tance You will see the selected setting: outside The Display unit Speed-/odometer: temperature or Dig. speedo [mph]. function allows you to choose whether cer- Press the a button to save the setting. tain displays appear in kilometres or miles in X the multifunction display. i Speed is displayed in mph. You can determine whether the multifunction i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this display shows some messages in miles or kil- function is unavailable. ometres. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Lights ing wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Setting the brightness for the instrument Inst. cluster submenu. cluster lighting and switches The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the X Press a to confirm. displays and the controls in the vehicle inte- X Press the : or 9 button to select the rior can be adjusted using the Brightness Display unit Speed-/odometer: func- Display/switches: function. tion. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. X Press the a button to save the setting.

Z 256 Menus and submenus

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Switching the Intelligent Light System ing wheel to select the Settings menu. on/off X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Light submenu. ing wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. Brightness Display/Switches: func- X Press a to confirm. tion. X Press the : or 9 button to select the You will see the selected setting. Intell. Light System function. X Press a to confirm. If the Intell. Light System function has X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the been switched on, the cone of light and the brightness to any level from Level 1 to L symbol in the multifunction display Level 5 (bright). are shown in red. Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the a or % button to save the X setting. When you activate Intell. Light System,

On-board computer and displays If the light switch is set to Ã, T or you activate the following functions: L, the brightness is dependent upon Rmotorway mode the brightness of the ambient light. Ractive light function i The light sensor in the instrument cluster Rcornering light function automatically controls the brightness of Rextended range foglamps the multifunction display. If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for In daylight, the displays in the instrument driving on the right/left, the multifunction cluster are not illuminated. display shows the Intell. Light System: system inoperative Inactive for Switching the daytime driving lights on/ left-side traffic or Intell. Light off System: System inoperative Inactive The Day lights function can only be for right-side traffic (Y page 256) switched on with the engine turned off. display message instead of the Intell. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Light System function in the Light sub- ing wheel to select the Settings menu. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Further information on the Intelligent Light Light submenu. System (Y page 125). X Press a to confirm. Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for X Press the : or 9 button to select the driving on the left/right Day lights: function. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- If the Day lights: function has been ing wheel to select the Settings menu. switched on, the cone of light and the X Press the : or 9 button to select the W symbol in the multifunction display Light submenu. are shown in red. X Press a to confirm. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on daytime driving lights (Y page 121). Menus and submenus 257

X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the Dipped beams Setting for: function. Ambient light colour function. You will see the selected setting: Right- X Press a to confirm. side traffic or Left-side traffic. X Press the : or 9 button to set the X Press the a button to save the setting. colour to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR. If you change the setting, conversion does Press the a or % button to save the not take place until the next time the vehi- X setting. cle is stationary. This function is only available on vehicles with Activating/deactivating the surround the Intelligent Light System. lighting and exterior lighting delayed You can use this function to switch between switch-off symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam X Press the = or ; button on the steer- (Y page 120). ing wheel to select the Settings menu. If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for X Press the : or 9 button to select the driving on the right/left, then motorway Light submenu. mode and the extended range foglamps are X Press a to confirm. unavailable. On-board computer and displays X Press the : or 9 button to select the A qualified specialist workshop can set the Surround lighting function. dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the When the Surround lighting function is right or left . activated, the light cone and the area Setting the brightness of the ambient around the vehicle are displayed in red in lighting the multifunction display. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the a button to save the setting. ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte- X Press the : or 9 button to select the rior lighting temporarily: Light submenu. X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to X Press a to confirm. position 0 in the ignition lock. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Amb. light +/- function. lock. You will see the selected setting. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is X Press a to confirm. deactivated. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is brightness to any level from Off to Level reactivated the next time you start the 5 (bright). engine. X Press the a or % button to save the If you have activated the Surround light‐ setting. ing function and the light switch is set to Ã, the following functions are activated Setting the ambient lighting colour when it is dark: X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting ing wheel to select the Settings menu. remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking X Press the : or 9 button to select the with the key. If you start the engine, the Light submenu. surround lighting is switched off and auto- X Press a to confirm.

Z 258 Menus and submenus

matic headlamp mode is activated X Press the : or 9 button to select the (Y page 121). Limit speed (winter tyres): function. Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the You will see the current setting. exterior lighting remains lit for X Press a to confirm. 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust If you close all the doors and the boot lid/ permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of tailgate, the exterior lighting goes off after ten (230 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off set- 5 seconds. ting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, off. when the surround lighting and delayed X Press the a button to store the entry. switch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol- For further information on permanent SPEED- lowing light up: TRONIC (Y page 192). Rside lamps Rdipped-beam headlamps Switching the automatic locking feature Rdaytime driving lights on/off Rsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors X Press the = or ; button on the steer- On-board computer and displays ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Activating/deactivating the interior light- X Press the : or 9 button to select the ing delayed switch-off Vehicle submenu. If you activate the Lighting delayed sw.- X Press a to confirm. off function, the interior lighting remains on Press the : or 9 button to select the for 20seconds after you remove the key from X the ignition lock. Auto. door locks function. When the Automatic door locks func- X Press the = or ; button on the steer- tion is activated, the vehicle doors are dis- ing wheel to select the Settings menu. played in red in the multifunction display. Press the : or 9 button to select the X X Press the a button to save the setting. Light submenu. If you activate the Automatic door locks Press a to confirm. X function, the vehicle is centrally locked above X Press the : or 9 button to select the a speed of around 15 km/h. Light. delay function. For further information on the automatic lock- When the Lighting delayed sw.-off ing feature, see (Y page 88). function is activated, the vehicle interior is displayed in red in the multifunction dis- Activating/deactivating the acoustic play. locking confirmation X Press the a button to save the setting. If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the Vehicle vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC ing wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the : or 9 button to select the ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Vehicle submenu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press a to confirm. Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. Menus and submenus 259

X Press the : or 9 button to select the a window on the side of the vehicle away from Acoustic Lock function. the wind. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction dis- G WARNING play lights up red. When the auxiliary heating is switched on, X Press the a button to save the setting. parts of the vehicle can become very hot. Flammable material such as leaves, grass or Activating/deactivating the radar sensor twigs may ignite if they come into contact with system hot parts of the exhaust system for extended X Press the = or ; button on the steer- periods. There is a risk of fire. ing wheel to select the Settings menu. When the auxiliary heating is switched on, X Press the : or 9 button to select the make sure that no flammable material can Vehicle submenu. come into contact with hot vehicle components. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.):. tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you On-board computer and displays You will see the selected setting: on or have heated or ventilated the vehicle a off. maximum of two times, drive for a longer X Press the a button to save the setting. distance. The following systems are switched off when Only vehicles with auxiliary heating have this the radar sensor system is deactivated: function (Y page 147). In the Heating submenu, you can select a RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 192) stored departure time or change a departure RBAS PLUS ( page 68) Y time. R ® PRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 73) The auxiliary heating timer function calcu- RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 224) lates the switch-on time according to the out- RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 228) side temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the Heating departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five Auxiliary heating departure time minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating adopts the THERMATIC or G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient THERMOTRONIC temperature setting. ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust You can switch off the auxiliary heating by fumes can enter the vehicle, especially car- using the remote control or the auxiliary heat- bon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in ing button on the centre console. enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. once a month for approximately ten You should switch off the auxiliary heating in minutes. enclosed spaces which do not have an extrac- tion system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open

Z 260 Menus and submenus

Selecting the departure time or deactivat- Convenience ing a selected departure time Activating/deactivating the EASY- X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ENTRY/EXIT feature ing wheel to select the Settings menu. WARNING X Press the : or 9 button to select the G Heating submenu. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle X Press a to confirm. occupants – particularly children – could You will see the selected setting. become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Press a to confirm. X While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- X Press the : or 9 button to select ing adjustments, make sure that no one has one of the three departure times or Timer any body parts in the sweep of the steering off (no timer active). wheel. X Press a to confirm. If someone is trapped: If a departure time is selected, the yellow Rpress one of the memory function position indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary buttons, or

On-board computer and displays heating button. Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- Changing the departure time ment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. The adjustment process is stopped. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Heating submenu. ing wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the You will see the selected setting. Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select A, X Press the : or 9 button to select the B or Change C. Easy Entry/Exit: function. X Press a to confirm. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa- You can now change the departure time. ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed X Press the = or ; button to select the in red in the multifunction display. display to be changed: hours, minutes. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to set the Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT selected display. feature (Y page 113). X Press the a button to store the entry. The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary Switching the belt adjustment on/off heating button lights up. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. Menus and submenus 261

X Press the : or 9 button to select the You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors Belt adjustment function. using button :. When the Belt adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed Resetting to factory settings in red in the multifunction display. Press the = or ; button on the steer- Press the a button to save the setting. X X ing wheel to select the Settings menu. For further information on belt adjustment, X Press the : or 9 button to select the see (Y page 52). Factory setting submenu. Switching the fold in mirrors when lock- X Press a to confirm. ing function on/off The Reset all settings? message This function is only available on vehicles with appears. Memory Function (Y page 117). X Press the : or 9 button to select When you activate the Auto. fold in func- No or Yes. tion, the exterior mirrors are folded in when X Press the a button to confirm the selec- the vehicle is locked. When you unlock the tion. vehicle and then open a door, the exterior If you have selected Yes, the multifunction On-board computer and displays mirrors fold out again. display shows a confirmation message. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: ing wheel to select the Settings menu. the Limit speed (winter tyres) function X Press the : or 9 button to select the in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set Convenience submenu. in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset the Daytime driving lights in the Light X Press a to confirm. submenu, you must turn the key to position Press the : or 9 button to select the X 1 in the ignition lock. Auto. fold in function. If the Auto. fold in function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in AMG menu in AMG vehicles red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. AMG displays

: Digital speedometer ; Gear indicator = Upshift indicator ? Engine oil temperature : To fold the exterior mirrors in or out A Coolant temperature If you have switched the Auto. fold in B ECO start/stop function status indicator function on and you fold the exterior mirrors ( page 161) in using button :, they will not fold out auto- Y matically (Y page 115).

Z 262 Menus and submenus

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- RACETIMER ing wheel to select the AMG menu. Displaying and starting the RACETIMER Upshift indicator UP= indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program. Upshift indicator UP= fades out other messages until you have shifted up. If the engine oil temperature is below 80 †, the oil temperature is shown in blue. Avoid using the full output of the engine during this : Lap time. ; RACETIMER SETUP The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. You can start the RACETIMER when the

On-board computer and displays engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. : Drive program (C/SS+/M) X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the ; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling RACETIMER is shown. mode (SPORT) X To start: press the a button to start the = Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/ RACETIMER. SPORT+) Displaying the intermediate time SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the suspension tuning.

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed.

or X Press the = or ; button to select X Briefly press the AMG button on the centre Interm. Time. console (Y page 205). X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. Menus and submenus 263

Starting a new lap Deleting all laps

: RACETIMER If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are = Lap deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If Press a to confirm New Lap. X you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap i It is possible to store a maximum of 16 does not have to be reset. laps. The 16th lap can only be completed X Reset the current lap. with Finish Lap. X Press a to confirm Reset. On-board computer and displays Stopping the RACETIMER Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted.

Overall evaluation

X Press the % button on the steering wheel. X Press a to confirm Yes. The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position : RACETIMER overall evaluation 2 or 3 and then press a to confirm Start, timing is continued. ; Total time driven = Average speed Resetting the current lap ? Distance covered Stop the RACETIMER. X A Maximum speed X Press the = or ; button to select Reset Lap. This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown.

Z 264 Menus and submenus

Lap evaluation

: Lap ; Lap time = Average lap speed ? Lap length A Top speed during lap This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the

On-board computer and displays RACETIMER.

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.

X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. Display messages 265

Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high- priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:

RHOLD function (Y page 201) On-board computer and displays RParking (Y page 180)

Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages:

X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

Z 266 Display messages

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill currently unavail‐ start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable See Owner's able. Manual The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete. Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient. On-board computer and displays G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed:

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. !÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. inoperative See ® Owner's Manual The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE Brake may also have failed. In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING Display messages 267

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. inoperative See ® Owner's Manual The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE Brake may also have failed. On-board computer and displays In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 268 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE- SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabi- ÷ lisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. inoperative See The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may Owner's Manual also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

On-board computer and displays situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. J You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds. Release parking Release the parking brake. brake X J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument Check brake fluid cluster and a warning tone sounds. level G WARNING The braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check brake pad X wear Display messages 269

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant inoperative See safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. Owner's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Functions cur‐ Possible causes: rently limited See Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Owner's Manual Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.

Rthe on-board voltage is too low. On-board computer and displays Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again. If the display message does not disappear:

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grille and the bumper (Y page 345). X Restart the engine. ® X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP (Y page 70).

PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a fault. BAS PLUS or the Functions limited distance warning signal may also have failed. See Owner's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt ü tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle. Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 54).

Z 270 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt ý tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle.

G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection. This poses an increased risk of injury.

X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts (Y page 52). Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 54). 6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus- On-board computer and displays Restraint sys. mal‐ ter. function Consult workshop G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System; see (Y page 43). 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Front left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ G WARNING shoporFront right The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten- malfunction Con‐ tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. sult workshop This poses an increased risk of injury.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 G WARNING Rear left malfunc‐ The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten- tion Consult work‐ tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. shoporRear right This poses an increased risk of injury. malfunction Con‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 sult workshop warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 271

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6 G WARNING Rear centre mal‐ The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten- function Consult tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. workshop This poses an increased risk of injury. SRS has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand window- 6 bag. Left windowbag mal‐ The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. function Consult workshoporRight G WARNING windowbag malfunc‐ The left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally tion Consult work‐ or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. On-board computer and displays shop This poses an increased risk of injury.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all the LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left cornering X light or Right cor‐ nering light b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left dipped beam X or Right dipped beam b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself. Trailer left tail X lamp or Trailer or right tail lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 272 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself. Trailer left turn X signal or Trailer or right turn signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The trailer brake lamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself. Trailer brake lamp X or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Rear left turn sig‐ X nal or Rear right

On-board computer and displays turn signal b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Front left turn X signal or Front right turn signal The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is b faulty. Left mirror turn Visit a qualified specialist workshop. signal or Right X mirror turn signal b The third brake lamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Third brake lamp X b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left-hand tail X lamp/brake lamp or Right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp b The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left main X beamorRight main beam Display messages 273

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left licence plate X lamporRight licence plate lamp b The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left fog X lamporRight fog lamp b The rear foglamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Rear fog lamp X The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. b On-board computer and displays Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Front left parking X lamp or Front right parking lamp b The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself. Left revers. lamp X or Right revers. or lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left daytime driv‐ X ing lamporRight daytime driving lamp The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available b without the Intelligent Light System. Intell. Light Sys‐ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. tem inoperative X b The exterior lighting is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See X Owner's Manual

Z 274 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.

X Check the fuses (Y page 368). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as you do so. If the display message continues to be displayed:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The exterior lighting is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See X Owner's Manual b The light sensor is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. AUTO lights inoper‐ X On-board computer and displays ative The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A b warning tone also sounds. Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Main-beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Main-beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper- Assist currently ative. Possible causes: unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. Owner's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

X Clean the windscreen. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Display messages 275

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Top up coolant See ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine Owner's Manual cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 339). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. On-board computer and displays X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine G WARNING off Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury.

X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †.

Z 276 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator Rtorn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics

X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. If the poly-V-belt is torn:

On-board computer and displays ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. Check eng. oil lev. when next X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest refuelling (Y page 338). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 338). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest Add 1 litre engine X ( page 338). oil when next refu‐ Y elling X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 338). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Display messages 277

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level Reserve fuel level drops into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest filling station. C There is very little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated.

X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Please replace air Visit a qualified specialist workshop. filter X Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The

! On-board computer and displays water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ter X ¯ The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning tone also sounds. Refill AdBlue at ® workshop See Own‐ X Have AdBlue refilled as soon as possible at a qualified spe- er's Manual cialist workshop. ¯ The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A warning tone also sounds. Refill AdBlue at ® workshop No start X Have AdBlue refilled as soon as possible at a qualified spe- in .. km cialist workshop. ¯ The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can no longer start the engine. Refill AdBlue at Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. workshop Eng. X start not possible ¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Check AdBlue See Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Owner's Manual X

Z 278 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Eng. start not pos‐ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. sible in ..km X ¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. You can no longer start the engine. Eng. start not pos‐ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. sible X

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue On-board computer and displays or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone Attention Assist: also sounds. Take a break! X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get enough rest. À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Attention Assist X inoperative

¨or° Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. Vehicle rising

¨or° The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. Vehicle rising Do not pull away. Please wait X The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

¨or° You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short Stop vehicle Vehi‐ period. cle too low X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Display messages 279

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions AIRMATIC is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.

X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wings or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movement is too great. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨or° The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

Malfunction On-board computer and displays X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. currently unavail‐ Possible causes: able See Owner's Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

X Clean the windscreen. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Speed Limit Assist is operational again.

Speed Limit Speed Limit Assist is only available in certain countries.

Assist: Unavaila‐ X Drive on. ble in this country Speed Limit Assist is available again as soon as you drive into a country in which its use is approved.

Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is faulty. inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. off X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 201).

Radar sensor deac‐ The radar sensor system is deactivated. tivated See Own‐ X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 259). er's Manual

Z 280 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated Assist currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. Owner's Manual or Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist cur‐ Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. rently unavailable Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. See Owner's Manual Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear:

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.

Assist inopera‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. tiveorActive Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Display messages 281

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop- currently unavail‐ erative. Possible causes: able See Owner's Rthe sensors are dirty. ManualorActive Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature able See Owner's range. Manual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out.

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. On-board computer and displays If the display message does not disappear:

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Clean the sensors (Y page 345). X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer. You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle.

X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty. inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir- Active Blind Spot rors. Assist inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist cancel‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been led fastened.

X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed.

You inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active.

X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the multifunction steering wheel.

Z 282 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 211). Park Assist inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking ative manoeuvres. Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 211). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC is faulty. On-board computer and displays X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. switched off The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 192). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo- available again rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 192). Display messages 283

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. rently unavailable Possible causes: See Owner's Manual Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. DISTRONIC is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear: On-board computer and displays

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grille and the bumper (Y page 345). X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. inoperative BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. The following may have also failed: RBAS PLUS RPRE-SAFE® Brake A warning tone also sounds.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no pended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - km/h X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 192). DISTRONIC PLUS and DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ also sounds. erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 284 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning. SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ A warning tone also sounds. erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Limit While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point --- km/h (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated. Cruise control A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. - - - km/h You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example.

X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 186).

On-board computer and displays 120 km/h Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been excee- Maximum speed ded. exceeded In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h!.

X Drive more slowly. Display messages 285

Tyres

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant Check tyres loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. On-board computer and displays There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 354). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 377). Check tyre pres‐ The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display mes- sures sage and has not been restarted since. then restart Run X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. Flat Indicator X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 377). Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Rectify The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre tyre pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 378). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 380).

Z 286 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. tyre(s) The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. On-board computer and displays X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 354). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 378). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

Warning The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The tyre defect wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build- up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 354). Display messages 287

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received currently unavail‐ from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily able malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.

Wheel sensor(s) There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display.

X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre press. moni‐ The wheels fitted do not have a suitable tyre pressure sensor. The tor inoperative No tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. On-board computer and displays wheel sensors X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.

Tyre press. monitor The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To start engine, You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in shift to either P position R or D. or N X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer malfunction being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Apply brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to deselect position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.

Park (P) position X Depress the brake pedal.

Risk of vehicle The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N rolling or D. Transmission not A warning tone also sounds. in P X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180).

Z 288 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Without changing You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. gear, A warning tone also sounds. consult workshop If transmission position D is selected:

X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Only select Park The vehicle is moving.

(P) X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying when vehicle is attention to road and traffic conditions. stationary X Shift the transmission to position P.

On-board computer and displays N CLS Coupé: The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. A CLS Shooting Brake: the tailgate is open. G WARNING When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open. There is a risk of poisoning.

X Close the tailgate.

The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. M or ? G WARNING The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Close the bonnet. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. Display messages 289

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions _ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds. Rear left seat Push the backrest back until it engages. backrest not X locked or Rear right seat back‐ rest not locked _ The driver's or front-passenger seat backrest is not engaged. A warning tone also sounds. Front left seat Push the backrest back until it engages. backrest not X locked or Front right seat back‐ rest not locked j The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged. On-board computer and displays A warning tone also sounds. Check trailer hitch lock X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Apply the parking brake. X Engage the trailer coupling's ball coupling in the end position (Y page 236). & The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 147). inoperative Bat‐ Drive for a longer distance. tery weak X The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating is operational again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. & There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on (Y page 147). inoperative Refuel Refuel at the nearest filling station. vehicle X & The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled inoperative See X down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heat- Owner's Man. ing, waiting several minutes between each attempt (Y page 147). X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 290 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The power steering assistance is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. Power steering mal‐ function See Own‐ G WARNING er's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident.

X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Telephone No Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ service receiver range. On-board computer and displays X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display.

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped ¥ below the minimum. Top up washer fluid X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 339).

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. Use the correct key. Key does not X belong to vehicle Â The key needs to be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Replace key X Â The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. Change the batteries ( page 83). Change key batter‐ X Y ies Display messages 291

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. Key not detected (red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. On-board computer and displays X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. Â The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions Key not detected X in the vehicle. (white display message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:

X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. Â The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. Key still in vehi‐ Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. cle X Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not continually detected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn- Remove starting ing tone also sounds. button, then insert key X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Â At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. Close doors to X lock vehicle

Z 292 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning and indicator lamps overview L Dipped-beam headlamps (Y page 121) T Side lamps (Y page 122) K Main-beam headlamps (Y page 124) #! Turn signals (Y page 123) R Rear foglamp (Y page 122) ü Seat belts (Y page 293) J Brakes: (Y page 294) ! ABS (Y page 295) ® On-board computer and displays ÷ ESP (Y page 297) ® å ESP OFF (Y page 297) M SPORT handling mode in AMG vehicles (Y page 298) 6 SRS (Y page 300) ; Engine diagnostics (Y page 300) 8 Reserve fuel (Y page 301) ? Coolant (Y page 301) · Distance warning signal (Y page 303) % Diesel engine: preglow (Y page 159) h Tyre pressure monitor (Y page 304) Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 293

Safety Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger Only for certain coun- to fasten their seat belts. tries: the red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52). warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine starts.

ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

Only for certain coun- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52). tries: the red seat belt The warning tone ceases. warning lamp lights up

after the engine starts. On-board computer and displays In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.

ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52). ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out. the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat. the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out.

ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the The red seat belt warn- same time, the car is being driven faster than 25 km/h or has been ing lamp flashes and an briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52). warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h.

X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Z 294 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J G WARNING The yellow brake sys- The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteris- tem warning lamp tics may be affected. lights up while the There is a risk of an accident. engine is running. X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. J G WARNING The red brake system The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking char- warning lamp is lit while acteristics may be affected. On-board computer and displays the engine is running. A There is a risk of an accident. warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. The red brake system WARNING warning lamp is lit while G the engine is running. A The braking efficiency may be impaired. warning tone also There is a risk of an accident. sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 295

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault. The yellow ABS warning For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic lamp is lit while the Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD func- engine is running. tion, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are also deactivated, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. ® ® If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilise the vehicle. On-board computer and displays There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavailable.

Z 296 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, The yellow ABS warning EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®, lamp is lit while the PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer engine is running. stabilisation and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are also deactivated. Possible causes: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete. Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. On-board computer and displays The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on:

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 297

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! EBD is unavailable due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS The yellow ABS warning PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, lamp is lit while the hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation and the adaptive brake engine is running. A lights, for example, are not available either. warning tone also ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. sounds. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.

There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. On-board computer and displays

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

J÷å! ABS and ESP® are unavailable due to a fault. Therefore, BAS, BAS The red brake warning PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill lamp, the yellow ESP® start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation and the adaptive brake and ESP® OFF warning lights, for example, are not available either. lamps and the yellow ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is G WARNING running. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 298 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. the vehicle is in motion. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. ® X Do not deactivate ESP .

For exceptions; see: (Y page 69). å ESP® is deactivated. ® The yellow ESP OFF WARNING warning lamp is lit while G the engine is running. If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. On-board computer and displays There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. ® X Reactivate ESP .

For exceptions; see: (Y page 69). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Drive on carefully. ® X Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M SPORT handling mode is activated. AMG vehicles only: G WARNING The yellow SPORT han- ® dling mode warning When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP is unable to lamp is lit while the stabilise the vehicle. engine is running. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions written in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode" section (Y page 70). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 299

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD The yellow ESP® and function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation and the adap- ESP® OFF warning tive brake lights are not available due to a malfunction. lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. engine is running. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. On-board computer and displays X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷å ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and The yellow ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. ESP® OFF warning The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may lamps are lit while the also have failed. engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 300 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J You are driving with the parking brake applied.

The red brake system X Release the parking brake. warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds.

6 There is a malfunction in SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The red SRS warning WARNING lamp is lit while the G engine is running. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury.

X Drive on carefully.

On-board computer and displays X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System; see (Y page 43).

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a fault, for example: The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode.

X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 179). X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 301

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level warning lamp lights up drops into the reserve range. while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ning.

? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is The red coolant warn- faulty. ing lamp lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a the engine is running risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. and the coolant tem- X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf- perature gauge is at the fic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving start of the scale. under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180).

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. On-board computer and displays

Z 302 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant level is too low. The red coolant warn- If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator ing lamp comes on may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be mal- while the engine is run- functioning. ning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the On-board computer and displays warning notes (Y page 339). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is under 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

? The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the The red coolant warn- engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too ing lamp comes on low. while the engine is run- WARNING ning. A warning tone G also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. This poses a risk of injury.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 303

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 339). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

Driving systems On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed The red distance warn- selected. ing lamp lights up while X Increase the distance. the vehicle is in motion.

· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed. ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately. the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to A warning tone also brake or take evasive action. sounds. ® Further information on PRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 73).

Z 304 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Tyres

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at The yellow tyre pres- least one of the tyres. sure monitor warning WARNING lamp (pressure loss/ G malfunction) is lit. With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. On-board computer and displays

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 354). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 378). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. h The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. The yellow tyre pres- WARNING sure monitor warning G lamp (pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre malfunction) flashes for pressure. approximately one There is a risk of an accident. minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction remains lit. display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 305

Useful information ...... 306 Stowage areas ...... 306 Features ...... 319 Stowing and features 306 Stowage areas

Useful information or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Rthe boot/luggage compartment is the pre- els, series and optional equipment for your ferred place to store objects. vehicle that were available at the time of Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as pos- going to press. National variations are possible and as low down in the boot/luggage sible. Note that your vehicle may not be compartment as possible. equipped with all of the functions descri- Rthe load must not protrude above the upper bed. This is also the case for systems and edge of the seat backrests. functions relevant to safety. Ralways place the load against the rear or i Read the information on qualified special- front seat backrests. Make sure that the ist workshops: (Y page 25). seat backrests are securely locked into place. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied Stowage areas seats if possible. Loading guidelines Ruse the lashing eyelets and the luggage nets to transport loads and luggage. G WARNING Ronly use lashing eyelets and fastening com-

Stowing and features If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or ponents that are suitable for the weight and not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip size of the load. over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle Rwhen transporting objects in the luggage occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially compartment, the combined luggage cover when braking or abruptly changing directions. and net must always be installed (luggage Always store objects so that they cannot be compartment cover and safety net). flung around. Secure objects, luggage or Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and loads against slipping or tipping before the wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp journey. edges for protection. i Load restraints are available at any quali- G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust Benz Service Centre. gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid/tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartments There is a risk of poisoning. Important safety notes Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid/tailgate. Never drive with the G WARNING boot lid/tailgate open. If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be The handling characteristics of a laden vehi- thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. cle are dependent on the distribution of the There is a risk of injury, particularly in the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you event of sudden braking or a sudden change should observe the following notes when in direction. transporting a load: Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Stowage areas 307

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be X To lock: insert the emergency key element thrown around in such situations. into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- position 2. trude from stowage spaces, luggage nets X To unlock: insert the emergency key ele- or stowage nets. ment into the lock and turn it 90° anti- RClose the lockable stowage spaces while clockwise to position 1. driving. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- Spectacles compartment ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/luggage compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 306).

Glove compartment Stowing and features There is a compartment to stow spectacles in the roof lining on the driver's side.

X To open: pull down spectacles compartment : by the handle.

Stowage compartments in the front X To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. centre console

X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. i The glove compartment can be ventilated (Y page 153).

Front stowage compartment (except AMG vehicles)

X To open: slide the cover forwards by handle : in the direction of the arrow until it engages. The glove compartment can only be locked X To close: briefly press the front of han- and unlocked using the emergency key ele- dle :. ment.

Z 308 Stowage areas

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a 12 V socket, a USB port, and an AUX-IN jack or a Media Interface are installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the separate Audio 20 or COMAND Online operating instructions).

Stowage compartment under the front seats Rear stowage compartment (except AMG vehicles)

X Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the G WARNING arrow. If you exceed the maximum permitted load of Cover : swings upwards. the stowage compartment, the cover is unable to restrain the objects. Objects may be thrown out of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direc- Stowing and features tion. Always observe the maximum load of the stowage compartment. Stow and secure heavy objects in the boot/luggage compartment.

AMG vehicles The maximum permissible load of the stowage compartment is 1.5 kg. X Briefly press trim :. i The stowage tray can be removed.

Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest

X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment under the driver's seat. X To open: pull handle : up. The armrest folds out. Stowage areas 309

Stowage compartments in the rear Through-loading facility in the rear centre console (CLS Coupé) bench seat Important safety notes

G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and X To open: slide covers : and ; in the could result in additional injury. direction of the arrow. RObjects or loads in the boot cannot be i There is a 12 V power socket in the front restrained by the seat backrest. stowage compartment. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat

Stowage compartment in the rear seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat Stowing and features armrest are engaged before every trip.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 306). The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the boot capacity.

Folding the seat backrest forwards

Illustration: CLS Coupé

X To open: fold down seat armrest ;. X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards.

Stowage nets Stowage nets are located in the front- i Vehicles with memory function: when you passenger footwell and on the left and right- fold one or both parts of the rear seat back- hand sides of the boot/luggage compart- rest forwards, the respective front seat ment. moves forward slightly, when necessary, in Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 306) order to avoid contact. and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 306).

Z 310 Stowage areas

X Vehicles without memory function: if nec- tion display in the instrument cluster. A essary, move the driver's or front- warning tone also sounds. passenger seat forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat X Open the boot. back if necessary. Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat back- X i If you do not need the through-loading rest release handle :. feature, you should always engage the rear The corresponding rear seat backrest is seat backrests. This will prevent unauthor- released. ised access to the boot from the vehicle interior.

Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat (CLS Shooting Brake) Important safety notes

G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for-

Stowing and features wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the Fold rear seat backrest forwards. X ; event of an accident. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be back if necessary. pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The Folding back the seat backrest seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat RObjects or loads in the boot/luggage com- backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam- partment cannot be restrained by the seat aged. backrest. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 306).

Folding the seat backrest forwards ! When folding the rear seat backrest forwards, ensure that there are no items lying on the seat cushions. These items could X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat otherwise be damaged or could themselves forward if necessary. damage the rear seats. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunc- Stowage areas 311

The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr- X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat ests can be folded forwards separately to forward if necessary. increase the luggage compartment capacity. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. i When you fold one or both parts of the If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and rear seat backrests forwards, the headr- locked, this will be shown in the multifunc- ests are also lowered if necessary. In the tion display in the instrument cluster. A case of vehicles with memory function, the warning tone also sounds. respective front seat is moved forwards X Adjust the head restraints if necessary

slightly to avoid contact with the seat (Y page 106). Stowing and features behind it. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat X Vehicles without memory function: if nec- back if necessary. essary, move the driver's or front- passenger seat forwards. X Pull back the left or right release lever in Securing a load the luggage compartment :. Lashing eyelets The corresponding backrest folds forwards. General notes X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat Observe the following notes on securing back if necessary. loads: RObserve the loading guidelines Folding back the seat backrest (Y page 306). ! Make sure that the seat belt does not RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets. become trapped when folding the rear seat RDistribute the load on the lashing eyelets backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam- evenly. aged. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection.

Z 312 Stowage areas

Boot/luggage compartment

CLS Coupé

CLS Coupé X Pull bag hook ; down by tab :. Stowing and features

CLS Shooting Brake CLS Shooting Brake There are six lashing eyelets in the boot or : X To open: press bag hook : (arrow). luggage compartment. Bag hook : slides out. To close: press bag hook : until it Bag hook X engages. G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug- Coat hook (CLS Shooting Brake) gage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load.

: Coat hook Stowage areas 313

Luggage compartment cover (CLS X To retract: push the rear edge of luggage Shooting Brake) compartment cover : downward. Luggage compartment cover : automati- Important safety notes cally moves forward. G WARNING On its own, the luggage compartment cover Fitting/removing the luggage compart- cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, ment cover items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the luggage compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure that X To remove: make sure that the luggage you do not stack the load in the luggage compartment cover is rolled up. Stowing and features compartment higher than the lower edge of X Push in the end cap of luggage compart- the side windows. Do not place heavy ment cover : in the direction of the arrow objects on top of the luggage compartment on the right or left side using grip =. cover. X Push luggage compartment cover : into The luggage compartment cover is located opposite anchorage ;. behind the rear bench seat backrest. X Remove luggage compartment cover : Extending and retracting the luggage upwards. compartment cover X To fit: place luggage compartment cover : into anchorage ; on the right or left-hand side. X Push in opposite end cap of luggage compartment cover : in the direction of the arrow and insert luggage compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;.

Fitting/removing the luggage cover There is a luggage cover on the tailgate which can be removed and then installed again to ease loading and unloading. X To extend: pull luggage compartment cover : back by grab handle ; until it engages.

Z 314 Stowage areas

X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the safety net. X Unroll and unfold the safety net. The joints on the upper and lower guide rod should engage audibly. The corresponding lashing eyelets for tightening the safety net are in the luggage compartment in front of the rear bench seat (Y page 311).

Attaching and tightening the safety net X To remove: press buttons : on luggage cover ; simultaneously and remove it in the direction of the arrow. X To install: insert luggage cover ; and push it in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages.

Stowing and features Safety net (CLS Shooting Brake) Important safety notes

G WARNING X To attach and tighten: insert guide On its own, the safety net cannot secure or rod : into bracket ;. restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and X Attach spring hook = to the lashing eyelet heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured or bracket (vehicles wit EASY-PACK load- load during sudden changes in direction, securing kit (Y page 316)) and pull down braking or in the event of an accident. There on the loose end of the lashing strap until is an increased risk of injury or even fatal the safety net is taut. injury. X After driving a short distance, check the Always store objects so that they cannot be tension of the safety net and retighten it if flung around. Secure objects, luggage or necessary. loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by pull belt using lashing material, even if you are using X To loosen and detach: the safety net. clamp ? up to reduce the tension in the lashing strap. It is important to use a safety net if you load X Remove spring hook = from the lashing the vehicle with small objects above the seat eyelet or bracket (vehicles with EASY-PACK backrests. For safety reasons, always use a load-securing kit (Y page 316)). safety net when transporting a load. X Detach guide rod : from bracket ;. The safety net is located in the stowage space X To stow: press the red button on the upper under the luggage compartment floor and lower guide rod. (Y page 318). X Fold the safety net and roll it up. X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the safety net holder. Stowage areas 315

EASY-PACK boot box (CLS Coupé) Adjusting the height to any position Important safety notes

G WARNING When the load surface moves up, your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK boot box. There is a risk of injury. When the load surface moves up, make sure that your hands are not within the sweep of the load surface. If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the centre of the load surface downward. X Pull the box out by handle : in the direc- ! When the EASY-PACK convenience box is tion of the arrow all the way to the stop. pulled out, no objects may be placed on the X Lowering the load surface: push the frame of the box or pushed onto the frame centre of load surface ; down by hand in from above. Otherwise, the box could be the direction of the arrow until load sur- damaged. face ; has reached the desired position and the box is the desired size.

! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects Stowing and features can damage the EASY-PACK boot box and X To raise the load surface: press switch then be thrown out. There is a risk of injury. =. Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or Load surface ; of the box moves up auto- fragile objects in the EASY-PACK boot box. matically. Always store and secure these or similar X To stow the box: push the box in by han- objects in the boot outside of the EASY- dle : all the way to the stop. PACK boot box. ! If you exceed the maximum permitted Removing and fitting load of the EASY-PACK boot box, objects can be thrown out of the EASY-PACK boot box and strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box. Always store and secure heavy objects in the boot outside of the EASY-PACK boot box. The maximum permitted load of the EASY- PACK boot box is 10 kg. With a load of above X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into approx. 5 kg, the bottom of the box moves slots = downward until it is rests on the mat of the boot floor. Thus, overloading of the box is avoided.

Z 316 Stowage areas

Inserting the brackets into the loading rail

X Raise box : and press hooks A into anchorage ? as far as they will go.

X Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise X Insert bracket : into the centre of loading and right-hand rotating catch B anti-clock- rail ?. wise by 90°. X Press release button ; and push X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch bracket : into the desired position in load- B anti-clockwise and right-hand rotating ing rail ?. catch B clockwise by 90°.

Stowing and features X Let go of release button ;. X Move box : downwards and pull it out X Press locking button =. from anchorages ?. Bracket : is locked in loading rail ?.

i Store the EASY-PACK boot box on a flat X If necessary, fold lashing eyelet A surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable upwards. shelf. Luggage holder EASY-PACK load-securing kit (CLS ! Only use the luggage holder to secure Shooting Brake) loads with a maximum weight of 7 kg and with dimensions that allow the loads to be Components and storage safely and securely retained by the luggage The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you holder. to use your luggage compartment for a variety of purposes. The following accessory parts are located under the luggage compartment floor: Rtelescopic rod (on the underside of the luggage compartment floor) Rbag containing the brackets and luggage holder (below the luggage compartment floor or in one of the side stowage nets in the luggage compartment) The luggage holder can be used to secure light loads against the side wall of the luggage compartment to prevent them from moving around. Stowage areas 317

X To install: insert two brackets A into the X To install: insert one bracket ; into both left or right loading rail (Y page 316). the left and the right loading rails and slide X Press release button : of the luggage it to the desired position (Y page 316). holder and pull the strap out slightly. X Insert telescopic rod : into brackets ; X Insert luggage holder ; into brackets A and, while doing so, press release but- and, while doing so, press release button ton ? and push the rod downwards until it = and push the luggage holder downwards engages. until it engages. X Make sure that locking button = on brack- X Press release button : of the luggage ets ; is pressed. holder and pull the strap out in the direction This keeps brackets ; in place on the of the arrow. loading rail. X Place the load between the strap and the X To remove: press release button ? on luggage compartment side wall. respective bracket ; and remove tele- X Using one hand, press locking button : of scopic rod : by pulling it upwards and out. the luggage holder. X With your other hand, let the strap go slowly until the load is secured. Stowage well under the boot floor X Make sure that locking button ? on brack- ! Remove the handle again before closing Stowing and features ets A is pressed. the boot lid and snap it in tightly to prevent This keeps brackets A in place on the the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, loading rail. you could damage the handle. X To remove: press release button = on respective bracket A and remove luggage holder ; by pulling upwards and out.

Telescopic rod

The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment.

X To open: pull handle : up.

The telescopic rod can be used to secure the load against the rear seats to prevent it from moving around.

Z 318 Stowage areas

X To close: fold the luggage compartment floor down. X Using handle :, press the luggage compartment floor down until it engages.

Roof carrier Important safety notes

G WARNING X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. When a load is transported on the roof, the vehicle's centre of gravity rises and the handling changes. If you exceed the maximum Stowage compartment under the lug- roof load, the handling as well as steering and gage compartment floor (CLS Shoot- braking characteristics are severely affected. ing Brake) There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the maximum roof load and G WARNING adapt your driving style. If you drive when the luggage compartment Stowing and features floor is open, objects could be flung around, ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk only use roof carriers that have been tested of injury, especially when braking or abruptly and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. changing directions. This helps to prevent damage to the vehi- Always close the luggage compartment floor cle. before a journey. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Make sure that, depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can raise the sliding sunroof fully and open the boot lid or tailgate fully when the roof carrier is fitted. ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. The maximum roof load is 100 kg. An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof EASY-PACK load-securing kit, TIREFIT, the load may become detached from the vehicle. vehicle tool kit, etc. are located underneath You must therefore ensure that you observe the luggage compartment floor. the roof carrier manufacturer's installation X To open: open the tailgate. instructions. X Holding the ribbing, press handle : downwards. Handle : folds upwards.

X Swing the luggage compartment floor up using handle : until it stands vertically. Features 319

Attaching the roof carrier X To open: press the front of cover ;. X To remove the insert: slide catch : inwards on both sides in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cup holder insert = upwards. X To refit the insert: place insert in the stowage compartment. X Slide catch : outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages.

X Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :.

X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Stowing and features

Features AMG vehicles Cup holders : Cup holders ; Cover Important safety notes X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost ! Only use the cup holders for containers of position. the right size and which have lids. The You can remove the cup holder insert to clean drinks could otherwise spill. it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. Cup holder in the front centre console AMG vehicles: you can remove the rubber mat of the cup holder in the direction of the arrow to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only.

All vehicles (except AMG)

Z 320 Features

Cup holder in the rear-compartment centre console

Example: CLS Coupé

X Fold down the rear seat armrest. CLS Coupé X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.

X To open: slide cover : forwards. X Press release catch :. Cup holder ; folds out forwards. X To remove the insert: slide catch ; inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Fold the cover of the rear seat armrest back down again if necessary. X Remove cup holder insert = upwards. X To close: lift the cover of the rear seat arm- Stowing and features X To refit the insert: place insert in the stowage compartment. rest. Swing cup holder ; back until it engages. X Slide catch ; outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. You can remove the insert and the rubber mat Bottle holders of the cup holder to clean them. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only. Observe the "Important safety notes" in the "Stowage compartments" section Cup holder in the rear seat armrest (Y page 306). ! Do not sit on or support your body weight G WARNING on the rear seat armrest when it is folded If objects in the passenger compartment are down, as you could otherwise damage it. stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. ! Close the cup holder before folding the There is a risk of injury, particularly in the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup event of sudden braking or a sudden change holder could be damaged. in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces while driving. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/luggage compartment. Features 321

! Make sure that any bottles weighing more Vanity mirror in the sun visor than 0.5 kg that are stored in the bottle holder rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor holder could otherwise be damaged. is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Press the outer edge of button : and slide in the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits into the opening.

X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder. X Fold down sun visor :. Stowing and features The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a X Pull sun visor : out of bracket ;. capacity from 0.7 l to 1.5 l. X Swing sun visor : to the side. The bottle holder does not secure bottles; it X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required. merely prevents them from tipping over.

Sun visors Rear-window roller sunblind (CLS Coupé) Overview Important safety notes

G WARNING Parts of the body could be trapped in the sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a risk of injury. When extending or retracting make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again if someone becomes trapped. The opening/ closing process is stopped. : Mirror light ; Bracket ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind ? Vanity mirror or other objects could be damaged. A Mirror cover

Z 322 Features

Extending/retracting the roller sun- X To open: slide cover : forwards until it blind engages. X To remove the insert: hold insert = by the notch at the side and lift it up ; and out. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. The cover moves back.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. Stowing and features X To stop: briefly press button : again. The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves back into the out-of-use position. AMG vehicles

X To open: briefly press the trim on cover :. Ashtray The stowage compartment opens. Front ashtray X To remove the insert: slide insert ; forwards in the direction of the arrow. ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga- X Remove insert ;. rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the X To refit the insert: place the insert into the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the holder and press it in the opposite direction stowage space could be damaged. of the arrow until it engages. X To close: fold down cover :. i You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage.

All vehicles (except AMG) Features 323

Rear-compartment ashtray Cigarette lighter

G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. CLS Coupé Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is To open: slide cover ; forwards. X out of reach of children. Never leave children X To remove the insert: pull insert : up unattended in the vehicle. and out. X To fit the insert: fit insert : into the holder from above and press down into the

holder until it engages. Stowing and features

All vehicles (except AMG) Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions per- CLS Shooting Brake mit. X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition The ashtray opens. lock (Y page 157). X To remove the insert: press release but- X To open: slide cover : forwards until it ton and lift the insert up and out. = engages. X To fit the insert: fit insert : into the X Press in cigarette lighter ;. holder from above and press down into the Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati- holder until it engages. cally when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. The cover moves back.

Z 324 Features

Socket under the armrest

AMG vehicles Your attention must always be focused on the X Open the stowage compartment under the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette armrest ( page 308). lighter when road and traffic conditions per- Y mit. X Lift up the cover of socket :.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Socket in the front centre console lock (Y page 157). X To open: briefly press the trim on

Stowing and features cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.

12 V sockets General notes All vehicles (except AMG) Turn the key to position in the ignition X 1 X To open: slide cover : forwards until it lock (Y page 157). engages. The sockets can be used for accessories with X Lift up the cover of socket ;. a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso- To close: briefly press cover : at the ries include such items as lamps or chargers X front. for mobile phones. The cover moves back. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. i An emergency cut-off ensures that the on- board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Features 325

X Briefly press cover ; at the top. The cover opens. X Lift up the cover of socket :.

Socket in the luggage compartment

AMG vehicles

X To open: briefly press the trim on cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: fold down cover :. CLS Shooting Brake

X Lift up the cover of socket :. Socket in the rear-compartment centre console Stowing and features Mobile phone Important safety notes

G WARNING Operating mobile communications equipment while driving distracts you from paying attention to traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Use this device only when the vehicle is sta- CLS Coupé tionary. Slide cover ; forwards. X i You must observe the legal requirements X Lift up the cover of socket :. for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communications equipment in the vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so if the traffic situation permits. You may otherwise be dis- tracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial CLS Shooting Brake

Z 326 Features

takes into consideration the scientific discus- Using a mobile phone sion surrounding the possible health risk If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile posed by electromagnetic fields. phone bracket, you can speak to the person Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an you are calling using the hands-free system. approved exterior aerial. This ensures: X Open the telephone compartment Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in (Y page 308). the vehicle X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile Rmutual interference between the vehicle phone bracket (see the separate installa- electronics and mobile phones is mini- tion instructions for the mobile phone fit- mised ting). An exterior aerial has the following advan- tages: i On some mobile phone brackets, first you have to connect the phone to the mobile Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen- phone bracket via Bluetooth® (see the sep- erated by a wireless device to the exterior. arate operating instructions for the mobile Rthe field strength in the vehicle interior is phone bracket). lower than in a vehicle that does not have If this is the case, the mobile phone does an exterior aerial. not have to be inserted into the bracket for Information on retrofitting two-way radios you to be able to use the telephone func- Stowing and features and mobile phones (RF transmitters) tions. However, the charging function and (Y page 402). aerial function are not available.

General notes Operating the mobile phone There are various mobile phone brackets that You can operate the telephone using the may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, 6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction these are country-specific. steering wheel. You can operate other mobile You can connect a Bluetooth®-capable phone functions via the on-board computer mobile phone with Audio 20 or COMAND (Y page 251). Online via the Bluetooth® interface. This also When you remove the key from the ignition applies if your vehicle is equipped with con- lock, the mobile phone stays switched on. venience telephony. However, you can no longer use the hands- More information on suitable mobile phones, free system. mobile phone brackets and on connecting If you have an active call and would like to Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with take the key out of the ignition lock, first Audio 20 or COMAND Online can be obtained: remove the mobile phone from the bracket. Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre i If you use a mobile phone bracket which Ron the Internet at http://www.mercedes- is connected to your mobile via Blue- benz.com/connect tooth® and you wish to continue a call on i The functions and services available when your mobile phone: you use the phone depend on your mobile You should switch the call to "Private phone model and service provider. mode" before you remove the key from the ignition lock. Otherwise, it will take up to 20 seconds for the mobile phone to disconnect from the system. Only then can you continue the call on your mobile phone. Features 327

Notes on the necessary steps for setting Rat a qualified specialised workshop "Private mode" can be found in the sepa- Rvia the HomeLink® Hotline rate operating instructions of the mobile (0) 08000 466 354 65 or alternatively phone. +49 (0) 6838 907-277 i Not all mobile phones support "Private Ron the Internet at: mode". http://www.homelink.com

Programming Garage door opener Programming buttons Important safety notes Observe the "Important safety notes" G WARNING (Y page 327). When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door

opener, always make sure that nobody is Stowing and features within the range of movement of the garage door.

WARNING G Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mir- Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust ror gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling Garage door remote control is not part of these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There A is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the integrated garage door opener. the engine running in enclosed spaces with- X Before programming for the first time, clear out sufficient ventilation. the memory of the integrated garage door opener (Y page 329). ® The HomeLink garage door opener integra- X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper- lock. ate up to three different door and gate sys- X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on tems. the integrated garage door opener. When programming a garage door opener, After a short time, indicator lamp : begins park the vehicle outside the garage. to light up yellow. i The garage door opener is only available i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow imme- for certain countries. Observe the legal diately the first time button ;, = or ? is requirements for each individual country. programmed. If the selected button has The HomeLink® garage door opener is already been programmed, indicator compatible with most European garage and lamp : lights up yellow after ten seconds gate opener drives. More information on have elapsed. HomeLink® and/or compatible products is Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator available: X lamp : flashes yellow.

Z 328 Features

X Point garage door remote control A i Usually, you now have 30seconds to ini- towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view tiate the next step.

mirror at a distance of 5to 20 cm. X Press previously programmed button ;, i The required distance between remote = or ? of the integrated garage door control A and the integrated garage door opener until the door closes. opener depends on the garage door drive The rolling code synchronisation is then system. Several attempts may be required. complete. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Problems when programming If you have problems when programming the X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. integrated garage door opener, please note the following: If indicator lamp : lights up green or flashes, then programming has been suc- RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage cessful. door drive remote control A. This can usually be found on the back of the remote X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. control. RReplace the batteries in garage door X If indicator lamp : blinks red: repeat the remote control . This increases the like- programming process for the correspond- A Stowing and features ing button on the rear-view mirror. When lihood that garage door remote control A doing so, vary the distance between remote will transmit a strong and precise signal to control A and the rear-view mirror. the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. i If the indicator lamp flashes green after RWhen programming, hold remote control successful programming, the garage door A at varying distances and angles from the system is using a rolling code. After pro- button which you are programming. Try var- gramming, you must synchronise the ious angles at a distance between 5and garage door opener integrated in the rear- 30 cm or at the same angle but at varying view mirror with the receiver of the garage distances. door system. RIf there is another remote control for the Synchronising the rolling code same garage door drive, perform the pro- Observe the "Important safety notes" gramming steps again using this remote ( page 327). control. Before performing these steps, Y make sure that new batteries have been Your vehicle must be within range of the fitted in garage door drive remote control garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure A. that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the RNote that some remote controls transmit door or gate. only for a limited period (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press but- Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X ton B on remote control A again before lock. transmission ends. Press the programming button of the door X RAlign the aerial cable of the garage door or gate drive (see the door or gate drive opener unit. This can improve signal recep- operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro- tion/transmission. gramming of additional remote controls"). Features 329

Opening or closing the garage door Frequencies

Once programmed, the integrated garage Europe door opener will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please Country Radio type approval num- also read the operating instructions for the ber garage door system. Frequency range (MHz) X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition AD (Andorra) 20 July 2005 lock. MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. AT (Austria) Article 6 of Directive Garage door system with a fixed code: indi- 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May cator lamp : lights up green. 05 Garage door system with a rolling code: MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 indicator lamp : flashes green. BE (Belgium) Article 6 of Directive i The transmitter will transmit a signal for 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May as long as the button is pressed. The trans- 05 mission is halted after a maximum of ten MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if BG (Bulga- Article 6 of Directive Stowing and features necessary. ria) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 12 April 07 Clearing the memory MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition CH (Switzer- Article 6 of Directive lock. land) 1999/5/EC R&TTE14357 27 May 05 X Press buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the CY (Cyprus) Article 6 of Directive indicator lamp turns green. 1999/5/EC R&TTE 5 May 05 i Make sure that you clear the memory of MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. CZ (Czech General Licence GL-30/R/ Republic) 2000 Reg No. 844 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433 DK (Den- Article 6 of Directive mark) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 20 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 DE (Ger- Article 6 of Directive many) 1999/5/EC R&TTE7519301 29 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868

Z 330 Features

Country Radio type approval num- Country Radio type approval number ber Frequency range (MHz) Frequency range (MHz) EE (Estonia) Article 6 of Directive IC (Canary 000438/2005, 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 May Islands) 000439/2005 05 000440/2005, MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 000441/2005 ES (Spain) 000438/2005, 000445/2005, 000439/2005, 000446/2005 000440/2005 000447/2005, 3 June 2005 000441/2005, MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 000445/2005, IE (Ireland) Article 6 of Directive 000446/2005 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 000447/2005 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 FI (Finland) Article 6 of Directive IS (Iceland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 Stowing and features 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 13 May 05 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 FR (France) Article 6 of Directive IT (Italy) DGPGSR/II/347487/ 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 FOR/15347 13 May 05 DGPGSR/II/347487/ 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 FOR/15348 GI (Gibraltar) Article 6 of Directive DGPGSR/II/347487/ 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 FOR/15350 13 May 05 (UK) DGPGSR/II/347487/ MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 FOR/15357 DGPGSR/II/347487/ GR (Greece) Article 6 of Directive FOR/15358 1999/5/EC DGPGSR/II/347487/ R&TTE11409/18/4/2005 FOR/15359 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LI (Liechten- Article 6 of Directive HR (Croatia) SDR 224/06 stein) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 27 May 05 HU (Hun- Article 6 of Directive MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 gary) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May LT (Lithua- Article 6 of Directive 05 nia) 1999/5/EC MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Features 331

Country Radio type approval num- Country Radio type approval number ber Frequency range (MHz) Frequency range (MHz) LU (Luxem- Article 6 of Directive RU (Russian POCC DE.MJ05.H00015 13 bourg) 1999/5/EC Federation) May 05 R&TTE150405/9538 24 MHz: 433 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SE (Sweden) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May LV (Latvia) Article 6 of Directive 05 1999/5/EC R&TTE MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 27.4-1B-1609 26 April 06 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SI (Slovenia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE MC (Mon- Article 6 of Directive 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 aco) 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SK (Slova- Article 6 of Directive kia) 1999/5/EC R&TTE

MT (Malta) Article 6 of Directive Slovak Stowing and features 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 206/11/2005 4 May 05 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 UK (United Article 6 of Directive NL (Nether- Article 6 of Directive Kingdom) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May lands) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 05 MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 NO (Norway) Article 6 of Directive Africa 1999/5/EC Country Radio type approval num- R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18 ber May 05 Frequency range (MHz) MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 EG (Egypt) W-KLE-17/08 Mar. 06 PL (Poland) Article 6 of Directive MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 1999/5/EC R&TTE 21 April 868 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 RE (Réunion) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July PT (Portugal) ANCOM-S08399/05 05 27, 40, 433, 868 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 RO (Roma- Article 6.4 of Directive ZA (South 11 October 2005 nia) 1999/5/EC R&TTE Africa) MHz: 27, 40, 433 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Z 332 Features

America Country Radio type approval num- Country Radio type approval number ber Frequency range (MHz) Frequency range (MHz) SY (Syria) 279/4/14 / 05 March 06 BB (Barba- Registration not required TR (Turkey) National Certification 23 dos) MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 July 07 CL (Chile) 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 MHz: 433 MHz: 40, 433 Australia 3943/DFRS05165/F-50 MHz: 280 to 433 Country Radio type approval number GF (French Article 6 of Directive Frequency range (MHz) Guyana) 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 AU (Aus- 28 June 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 tralia) MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 GP (Guade- Article 6 of Directive NZ (New 20 March 06 loupe) 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 Zealand) MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433 Stowing and features 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Floormats MQ (Martini- Article 6 of Directive que) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July G WARNING 05 Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle MX (Mexico) MHz: 280 to 390 is jeopardised. There is a risk of an accident. Asia Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter Country Radio type approval num- the driver's footwell. Fit the floormats ber securely and as specified in order to ensure Frequency range (MHz) sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats. AE (United 1623/5/10-2/26/76 Arab Emi- MHz: 433 rates) JO (Jordan) TRC/LPD/2005/23 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 KW (Kuwait) 5 October 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 SA (Saudi 11_02_05/5024-5-6 Arabia) MHz: 418, 433 Example: CLS Coupé Features 333

X Slide the seat backwards. X To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat away from retainers ;.

X Remove the floormat.

Retrofitted anti-glare film Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. You can obtain information about anti-glare film from a qualified specialist workshop. Stowing and features

Z 334 335

Useful information ...... 336 Engine compartment ...... 336 Service ...... 340 Care ...... 341 Maintenance and care 336 Engine compartment

Useful information engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- service products. There is a danger of injury. els, series and optional equipment for your Allow an overheating engine to cool down vehicle that were available at the time of before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in going to press. National variations are pos- the engine compartment, leave the bonnet sible. Note that your vehicle may not be closed and notify the fire brigade. equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and G WARNING functions relevant to safety. There are parts in the engine compartment i Read the information on qualified special- that move. Certain components may continue to run even if the ignition is switched off or ist workshops: (Y page 25). may suddenly start again, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a danger of injury. Engine compartment If you need to access the engine compartment: Bonnet Rswitch off the ignition Important safety notes Rnever enter the danger area of moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan G WARNING Rkeep items of clothing away from moving An unlocked bonnet may open while driving parts

Maintenance and care and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. WARNING Never unlock the bonnet while driving. G The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. If you touch WARNING G the live components, you could receive an When being opened and closed, the bonnet electric shock. There is a danger of injury. may suddenly fall into the closed position. Never touch components of the ignition sys- There is a risk of injury to persons in the range tem or the fuel injection system when the of movement of the bonnet. ignition is switched on. Open and close the bonnet only when nobody is in the range of movement. Opening the bonnet WARNING G G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the wipers are set in motion, you can be injured radiator and parts of the exhaust system. by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. There is a risk of injury when accessing the Always switch off the windscreen wipers and engine compartment. the ignition before opening the bonnet. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following compo- ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are nents. not folded away from the windscreen. Oth- erwise, you could damage the windscreen G WARNING wipers or the bonnet. If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the Engine compartment 337

protection covers or anything similar. Doing so can cause the Onboard Diagnostics Sys- tem to display inaccurate values. Some of these values are legally required and must always be correct.

Engine oil General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per switched off. 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. than this when the vehicle is new or if you The bonnet is released. frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is

at normal operating temperature. Maintenance and care Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle ; up and lift the bonnet. If you lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the bonnet

X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.

Radiator Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover the radiator. Do not use thermal mats, insect

Z 338 Engine compartment

Checking the oil level using the oil dip- that have come into contact with engine oil stick before you start the engine.

H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Example: vehicles with a petrol engine Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system

Maintenance and care Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after missing the change interval required by the service system Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Rusing engine oil additives X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick ! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with tube. too much engine oil can result in damage X Wipe off oil dipstick :. to the engine or to the catalytic converter. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide Have excess engine oil siphoned off. tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, top up with 1.0 litre of engine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- Example: engine oil filler cap ponents in the engine compartment, it may X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. X Top up the engine oil. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool on the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 litre of down and thoroughly clean the components engine oil. Engine compartment 339

X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 157) in clockwise. the ignition lock. Make sure that the cap locks securely into X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clock- place. wise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and stick (Y page 338). remove it. For further information on engine oil; see If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is (Y page 410). enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. Other service products If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler Checking the coolant level neck when warm, there is enough coolant G WARNING in coolant expansion tank ;. The engine cooling system is under pressure, X If necessary, top up with coolant that has particularly if the engine is warm. You could been tested and approved by Mercedes- be scalded by hot coolant spraying out when Benz. opening the cap. There is a danger of injury. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far Allow the engine to cool before opening the as it will go. cap. Wear gloves and protective eyewear when opening. Slowly turn the cap half a turn For further information on coolant; see to allow pressure to escape. (Y page 411). Maintenance and care Topping up the windscreen washer system/headlamp cleaning system

G WARNING Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 157). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 70 †.

Z 340 Service

X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed. X Top up with the premixed washer fluid. If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. this display, you will receive a statement on the associated costs. The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the The ASSYST PLUS service interval display windscreen washer system and the headlamp does not take into account any periods of cleaning system. time during which the battery is disconnec- If the washer fluid level drops below the rec- ted. ommended minimum of 1 litre, a message Maintaining the time-dependent service appears in the multifunction display prompt- schedule: ing you to refill the washer fluid (Y page 290). X Note down the service due date displayed Further information on windscreen washer in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. fluid/antifreeze (Y page 412). or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract Service the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. ASSYST PLUS Service messages Hiding a service message

Maintenance and care The ASSYST PLUS service interval display X Press the a or % button on the steer- informs you of the next service due date. ing wheel. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet). Displaying service messages You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Switch the ignition on. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. does not show any information on the Press the 9 or : button to select the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the X engine oil level ( page 337). ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by Y pressing the a button. The multifunction display shows a service The service due date appears in the multi- message for a few seconds, e.g.: function display. RService A in .. days RService A due Information about Service RService A overdue by .. days Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter- Depending on the operating conditions of the val display vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this set- The letter indicates which service is due. A ting can be corrected at a qualified special- stands for a minor service and B for a major ist workshop. service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. This figure indicates Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise Care 341

lead to increased wear and damage to the up as part of the service. Under normal oper- major assemblies or the vehicle. ating conditions, a full tank of AdBlue® should A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a last until the next service due date. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the Depending on how and where the vehicle is ASSYST PLUS service interval display after used, there may be an increase in the the service work has been carried out. You AdBlue® consumption, resulting in the next can also obtain further information on main- service due date being brought forward. tenance work, for example. Certain display messages show that AdBlue® must be topped up, e.g.: Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on Refill AdBlue at workshop See Own‐ normal operation of the vehicle. Service work er's Manual will need to be performed more often if the Refill AdBlue at workshop No start vehicle is operated under arduous conditions in .. km or increased loads, for example: A warning signal also sounds. Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- You can no longer start the engine when the ate stops AdBlue® supply has been used up Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel (Y page 277). short distances ! Have the AdBlue® tank topped up at a Rfor frequent operation in mountainous ter- qualified specialist workshop only. The rain or on poor road surfaces vehicle may otherwise be damaged or

Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri- soiled. Maintenance and care ods Before taking a trip with your vehicle outside In these or similar operating conditions, have Europe, have the AdBlue® supply checked at the air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for exam- a qualified specialist workshop. If necessary, ple, changed more frequently. The tyres must have AdBlue® topped up. Before a longer stay be checked more frequently if the vehicle is outside of Europe, consult a qualified special- operated under increased loads. Further ist workshop. information can be obtained at a qualified Observe the notes on AdBlue®( page 409). specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Y Service Centre. Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and AdBlue® can be Driving abroad obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. is also available in other countries. The Service Hotline's current telephone numbers for use when you are abroad are to be found Care in the "Mercedes-Benz Service24h" section General notes of the Service Booklet. H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning ® AdBlue service indicator cloths in an environmentally responsible man- i For BlueTEC vehicles only. ner. To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment must be operated with the reducing agent AdBlue®. AdBlue® is topped

Z 342 Care

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function of the following: is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- Rdry, rough or hard cloths cally in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC Rabrasive cleaning agents PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- Rsolvents ing or other similar situations: Rcleaning agents containing solvents Rwhen towing the vehicle Do not scrub. Rin the car wash Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice ! Make sure that: scraper. You could otherwise scratch or Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are damage the surfaces and protective film. closed completely. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is period straight after cleaning it, particularly switched off (OFF button is depressed). after having cleaned the wheels with wheel Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at posi- cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause tion 0. increased corrosion of the brake discs and The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. brake pads/linings. For this reason, you ! In car washes with a towing mechanism, should drive for a few minutes after clean- make sure that the automatic transmission ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the is in transmission position N, otherwise the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle could be damaged.

Maintenance and care vehicle can then be parked up. RVehicles with a key: Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for do not remove the key from the ignition retaining the quality in the long term. lock. Do not open the driver's door or Use care products and cleaning agents rec- front-passenger door when the engine is ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You Washing the vehicle and cleaning the can prevent this by shifting the auto- paintwork matic transmission to N beforehand. Automatic car wash RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: do not open the driver's door or front- G WARNING passenger door when the engine is Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle switched off. Otherwise, the automatic has been washed. There is a risk of an acci- transmission selects park position P dent. automatically and locks the wheels. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully Observe the following to make sure that the while paying attention to the traffic conditions automatic transmission stays in position N: in order to restore full braking efficiency. X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off.

X Turn the key to position 2(Y page 157) in the ignition lock. Use the key instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. Care 343

X Depress and hold the brake pedal. High-pressure cleaning equipment Shift the automatic transmission to posi- X WARNING tion N. G The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind- Release the brake pedal. X ers) can cause damage not visible from the X Release the electric parking brake. outside to tyres or chassis components. Com- X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in ponents damaged in this way can unexpect- the ignition lock. edly fail. There is a risk of an accident. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu- wash from the very start. lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam- Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehi- aged tyres or chassis components replaced cle in an automatic car wash. immediately. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off ! Always maintain a distance of at least wax from the windscreen and the wiper 30 cm between the vehicle and the high- blades. This will prevent smears and reduce pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about wiping noises caused by residue on the wind- the correct distance is available from the screen. equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle Washing by hand around when cleaning your vehicle. In some countries, washing by hand is only Do not aim directly at any of the following: allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Rtyres Observe the legal requirements for each indi- Maintenance and care vidual country. Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. Relectrical components X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Rbattery R X Use a soft sponge to clean. connectors R X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car lights shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rseals X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a Rtrim elements gentle jet of water. Rventilation slots X Do not point the water jet directly towards Damaged seals or electrical components the air inlet. can lead to leaks or failures. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. Cleaning the paintwork Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry X ! Do not affix: thoroughly with a chamois. Rstickers X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. Rfilms When using the vehicle in winter, remove all Rmagnetic plates or similar items traces of road salt deposits carefully and as to painted surfaces. You could otherwise soon as possible. damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inade- quate care cannot always be completely

Z 344 Care

repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- i The vehicle should preferably be washed cialist workshop. by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo

X Remove impurities immediately, where and plenty of water. possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo X Soak insect remains with insect remover from the range of recommended and and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. approved Mercedes-Benz care products. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, Cleaning vehicle parts oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently Cleaning the wheels with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. wheel bolts and brake components. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended Care and treatment of matt paintwork period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork increased corrosion of the brake discs and shiny. brake pads/linings. For this reason, you ! The following may cause the paint to should drive for a few minutes after clean- Maintenance and care become shiny and thus reduce the matt ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the effect: brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. Cleaning the windows RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- when cleaning the windscreen or wiper ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. blades, you could become trapped. There is a wax. These products are only suitable for danger of injury. high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt finish leads to considerable sur- Always switch off the windscreen wipers and face damage (shiny, spotted areas). the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. Always have paintwork repairs performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax vents to clean the inside of the windows. treatment under any circumstances. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or Observe these notes if your vehicle has a ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging clear matt finish. This will help you to avoid the windows. damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels windscreen and the rear window at regular with a clear matt finish. intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals Care 345

and pollen may under certain circumstan- cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car ces prevent water from draining away. This shampoo or cleaning cloths. can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. Mirror turn signal Clean the inside and outside of the win- X ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. agent that is recommended and approved Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning by Mercedes-Benz. cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. Cleaning the wiper blades X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn G WARNING signals in the exterior mirror housing using If the windscreen wipers are set in motion a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. when cleaning the windscreen or wiper Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning blades, you could become trapped. There is a cloths. danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and Cleaning the sensors the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres- wiper blades. sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner noz- the wiper blade could be damaged. zle. Information about the correct distance Maintenance and care ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and is available from the equipment manufac- do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the turer. graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly.

X Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Clean sensors : of the driving systems Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning X with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild

Z 346 Care

Cleaning the reversing camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a high- pressure cleaner.

The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded.

X Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush. X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :. Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- i You can also have the maintenance work Maintenance and care based cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist work- Impurities combined with the effects of road shop. grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust Interior care pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. Cleaning the display X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. lowing: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol Cleaning the trailer tow hitch (CLS Shooting Brake) Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household clean- H Environmental note ing agents Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi- These may damage the display surface. Do ronmentally-responsible manner. not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara- ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high- ble damage to the display. pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. ! Observe the note on care provided by the trailer manufacturer. Care 347

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that Cleaning the plastic trim it is switched off and has cooled down. WARNING X Clean the display surface using a commer- G cially available microfibre cloth and TFT/ Care products and cleaning agents containing LCD display cleaner. solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in plastic Dry the display surface using a dry micro- X parts breaking away when the airbags are fibre cloth. deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents Cleaning Night View Assist Plus containing solvents to clean the cockpit. ! Never clean the camera lens. When cleaning the field of vision of the driving systems, ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa- make sure that you do not spray glass ces: cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera Rstickers lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist work- Rfilms shop. Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Maintenance and care X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Fold down the camera cover by recess :. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever

X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wooden trim and trim elements Use a soft cloth to clean the windscreen in X ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents front of camera . ; such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.

Z 348 Care

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements Seat covers from other materials with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfi- ! Observe the following when cleaning: bre cloth. RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning moistened with a solution containing products recommended and approved by 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Mercedes-Benz. RClean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution contain- Cleaning the seat covers ing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe entire General notes seat sections to avoid leaving visible ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen- lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. uine leather, artificial leather or Cleaning results depend on the type of Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can dirt and how long it has been there. damage the cover. RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp i Note that regular care is essential to cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire make sure that the appearance and com- seat sections to avoid leaving visible fort of the covers are retained over time. lines.

Genuine leather seat covers Cleaning the seat belts Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, e.g.: G WARNING

Maintenance and care Runevenness in structure Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the Rmarks caused by growth and injury seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an R subtle colour differences accident. There is an increased risk of injury, These are characteristics of leather and not possibly even fatal. material faults. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical instructions: cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct R Clean genuine leather covers carefully sunlight. with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets R Only use leather care agents that have X Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft been tested and approved by Mercedes- brush or dry shampoo. Benz. You can obtain these from a quali- X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean- fied specialist workshop. ing agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Care 349

Cleaning the designo wooden luggage i A second treatment with the wood oil is compartment floor (CLS Shooting recommended for extremely worn wooden Brake) luggage compartment floor surfaces. ! For cleaning and treating the wooden luggage compartment floor, do not use any of the following: Rmicrofibre cloth Rhousehold cleaning agents Rcommercially available furniture pol- ishes, sprays or similar items Rsteam cleaners Otherwise, the surface of the wooden luggage compartment floor will be damaged. ! Do not apply self-adhesive films or mask- ing strips to the wooden luggage compartment floor; the solvent residue and plasti- cisers contained in them may destroy the paintwork. Use a lint-free cotton cloth to remove dust, dirt and fingerprints. If necessary, dampen the lint-free cotton cloth with a small amount Maintenance and care of clear water. Use wood oil recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz to treat and protect the wooden luggage compartment floor. This revitalises the wooden surface and increases the resilience of the wood. To apply the wood oil:

X Using the sanding pad that comes with the care set, sand the wooden surface in the direction of the grain. X Remove the wood dust. X With a lint-free cotton cloth, distribute a thin layer of wood oil evenly over the wooden surface using a simple wiping motion. Always wipe in the direction of the grain. X Then, using a second lint-free cotton cloth, apply the remaining wood oil. A new protective coating forms within approximately four hours.

Z 350 351

Useful information ...... 352 Where will I find...? ...... 352 Flat tyre ...... 354 Battery (vehicle) ...... 359 Jump-starting ...... 363 Towing and tow-starting ...... 365 Electrical fuses ...... 368 Breakdown assistance 352 Where will I find...?

Useful information X CLS Shooting Brake: open the tailgate. X Open the right-hand side trim panel. i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- X Remove warning triangle :. els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of Setting up the warning triangle going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Where will I find...? Warning triangle : Press-stud Removing the warning triangle ; Reflectors = Feet

X Fold feet = down and out to the side. X Fold side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using press stud .

Breakdown assistance :

First-aid kit

X CLS Coupé: open the boot lid. X Turn the catch 90° in the direction of the arrow and remove warning triangle :.

X CLS Coupé: open the boot lid. X Slide the stowage net down. X Open the stowage compartment. X Remove tensioning strap :. X Remove first-aid kit ;. Where will I find...? 353

Observe the legal requirements for each individual country.

Vehicle tool kit General notes The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor/luggage compartment floor. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle tool kit is on the left- X CLS Shooting Brake: open the boot lid. hand side or the right-hand side in the stow- X Open the stowage compartment. age well under the boot floor/load compart- X Remove first-aid kit :. ment floor. i Apart from some country-specific var- i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyre- at least once a year. Replace the contents changing tools. Some tools for changing a if necessary, and replace any missing wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more items. information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, Fire extinguisher consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tyre-changing tools can include, ! Keep the stowage compartment closed for example: while the vehicle is in motion. It may oth- Rjack erwise be damaged. Breakdown assistance Rwheel chock The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage R compartment underneath the driver's seat. wheel wrench Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

X Pull handle : upward and fold cover ; forward. Example: CLS Coupé X Remove the fire extinguisher from the stowage compartment. : Towing eye ; Tyre sealant filler bottle i Have fire extinguisher ; refilled after = Tyre inflation compressor each use and checked every one to two years. It may otherwise fail in an emer- ? Fuse allocation chart gency. 354 Flat tyre

X Open the boot lid/tailgate. Vehicles with collapsible emergency X Swing the boot/luggage compartment spare wheel (AMG vehicles) floor upwards (Y page 317) or (Y page 318). X Swing the boot floor (Y page 317) or the luggage compartment floor (Y page 318) upwards.

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Example: CLS Coupé : Towing eye ; One pair of gloves = Jack ? Folding wheel chock A Centring pin B Sheet for faulty wheel Example: CLS Coupé C Tyre inflation compressor : Vehicle tool kit tray D Wheel wrench ; Stowage tray E Fuse allocation chart Breakdown assistance

= "Minispare" emergency spare wheel X Open the boot lid/tailgate.

X Open the boot lid/tailgate. X Swing the boot/luggage compartment floor upwards ( page 317) or X Swing the boot/luggage compartment Y (Y page 318). floor upwards (Y page 317) or (Y page 318). X Swing the boot floor (Y page 317) or the luggage compartment floor ( page 318) X Swing the boot floor ( page 317) or the Y Y upwards. luggage compartment floor (Y page 318) upwards. The vehicle tool kit contains: Flat tyre RFoldable wheel chock RFuse allocation chart Preparing the vehicle RJack Your vehicle may be equipped with: RCentring pin RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- ROne pair of gloves acteristics) (Y page 355) RWheel wrench Vehicle preparation is not necessary on RTowing eye vehicles with MOExtended tyres. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 353) Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain countries) (Y page 396) Flat tyre 355

Information on changing/fitting a wheel MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat (Y page 381). characteristics) X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level General notes ground. With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of X Secure the vehicle against rolling away pressure in one or more tyres. The affected (Y page 180). tyre must not show any clearly visible dam- If possible, bring the front wheels into the X age. straight-ahead position. MOExtended tyres may only be used in con- Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that X junction with an active tyre pressure loss "normal" level is selected ( page 203). Y warning system or tyre pressure monitoring X Switch off the engine. system. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove If the pressure loss warning message the key from the ignition lock. appears in the multifunction display: Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the X Robserve the instructions in the display mes- driver's door. sages ( page 285). The on-board electronics now have status Y 0. This is the same as the key having been Rcheck the tyre for damage. removed. Rif driving on, observe the following notes. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the The maximum driving distance is approx- Start/Stop button from the ignition lock imately 80 km when the vehicle is partially (Y page 157). laden and approximately 30 km when the

vehicle is fully laden. Breakdown assistance X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- they do so. tance possible depends upon: X Make sure that no one is near the danger Rspeed area while a wheel is being changed. Any- Rroad condition one who is not directly assisting in the Routside temperature wheel change should, for example, stand The driving distance possible in run-flat mode behind the barrier. may be reduced by extreme driving condi- X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf- tions/manoeuvres, or it can be increased fic conditions when doing so. through a moderate style of driving. X Close the driver's door. The maximum permissible distance which X Place the warning triangle a suitable dis- can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from tance away (Y page 352). Observe legal the moment the tyre pressure loss warning requirements. appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. i When replacing one or all tyres, make sure that you use only: Rthe tyre size specified for the vehicle and Rtyre(s) marked "MOExtended" 356 Flat tyre

If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be G WARNING replaced with an MOExtended tyre, a In the following situations, the tyre sealant is standard tyre may be used as a temporary unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis- measure. Make sure that you use the tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: proper size and type (summer or winter tyre). Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Important safety notes Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures G WARNING or on a flat tyre. When driving in emergency mode, the driving There is a risk of accident. characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner- Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified ing, accelerating quickly and when braking. specialist workshop. There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. WARNING Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeu- G The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irrita- vres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot- tion. It must not come into contact with your holes, off-road). This applies in particular to a skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not laden vehicle. inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away Stop driving in emergency mode if: from children. There is a risk of injury. Ryou hear banging noises. If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, Rthe vehicle starts to shake. observe the following: Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin R ® immediately with water.

Breakdown assistance ESP is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with After driving in emergency mode, have the your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist oughly with clean water. workshop with regard to their further use. The RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately faulty tyre must be replaced. rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. TIREFIT kit RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. Using the TIREFIT kit RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. attention immediately. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up ! to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. Do not operate the tyre inflation com- You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise down to Ò20 †. overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Flat tyre 357

X Do not remove any foreign objects which X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or tyre. nails. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accom- panying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre infla- X Insert plug ? into a 12 V socket tion compressor from the stowage space (Y page 324) in your vehicle. under the boot floor/luggage compart- Observe the notes on sockets ment floor (Y page 353). (Y page 324). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition the driver's field of vision. lock (Y page 157). X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched

on. The tyre is inflated. Breakdown assistance i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar, 73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase.

X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi). Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out X If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi) of the housing. has been attained after five minutes: Screw hose onto flange of tyre seal- X A B (Y page 358). ant bottle :. If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi) X Place tyre sealant bottle : head down- has not been attained after five minutes: wards into recess ; of the tyre inflation (Y page 358). compressor. i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene.

Z 358 Flat tyre

Tyre pressure not reached If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after five minutes: X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. the faulty tyre. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pull away immediately. The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with X Pump up the tyre again. tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of After a maximum of five minutes the tyre the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ instrument cluster in the driver's field of 26 psi). vision. G WARNING X Stop after driving for approximately ten If the required tyre pressure is not reached minutes and check the tyre pressure with after the specified time, the tyre is too badly the tyre inflation compressor. damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the The tyre pressure must now be at least tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). pressure that is too low can significantly WARNING impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- G acteristics. There is a risk of accident. If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot specialist workshop. repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres Breakdown assistance and a tyre pressure that is too low can signif- Tyre pressure reached icantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. WARNING G Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant specialist workshop. impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least accident. 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (see the fuel filler You should therefore adapt your driving style flap for values). accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the specified maximum speed with a tyre that the tyre inflation compressor. has been repaired using tyre sealant.

! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. Battery (vehicle) 359

depress X To reduce the tyre pressure: G WARNING pressure release button E next to pres- Work carried out incorrectly on the battery sure gauge F. may lead to a malfunction, e.g. a short circuit. This, in turn, may restrict the functions of the X If the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the repaired safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys- tyre. tem, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the repaired tyre. ating safety of your vehicle may then be com- promised. You could then lose control of the X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre vehicle, e.g.: inflation compressor. R The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant when braking bottle. Rwhen making sudden steering movements and/or travelling at an inappropriate X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. speed. There is a risk of an accident. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. In the event of a short circuit or similar situation, inform a qualified specialist workshop X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist immediately. Do not drive any further. You workshop. should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist work- WARNING shop. G Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- Breakdown assistance the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's explosion. side. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. Battery (vehicle) The highly flammable gas mixture is created Important safety notes while the battery is charging and when jump- Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting, starting. requires specialist knowledge and the use of Always make sure that neither you nor the special tools. Therefore, always have work on battery is electrostatically charged. Electro- the battery carried out at a qualified specialist static charge is created, for example: workshop. Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothing Rdue to friction between clothing and the seat Rwhen you pull or push the battery across carpet or other synthetic materials Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth

Z 360 Battery (vehicle)

! G WARNING Have the battery checked regularly at a During the charging process, a battery produ- qualified specialist workshop. ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or Observe the service intervals in the Service sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can Booklet or contact a qualified specialist ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. workshop for more information. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a ! You should have all work involving the connected battery does not come into con- battery carried out at a qualified specialist tact with vehicle parts. workshop. In the exceptional case that it is RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat- necessary for you to disconnect the battery tery. yourself, make sure that: RIt is important that you observe the descri- Ryou switch off the engine and remove the bed order of the battery terminals when key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, connecting and disconnecting a battery. ensure that the ignition is switched off. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the Check that all the indicator lamps in the battery poles with identical polarity are instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, connected. electronic components, such as the RIt is particularly important to observe the alternator, may be damaged. described order when connecting and dis- Ryou first remove the negative terminal connecting the jump leads. clamp and then the positive terminal RNever connect or disconnect the battery clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. terminals while the engine is running. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rthe transmission is locked in position G WARNING P

Breakdown assistance Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. can then no longer move the vehicle. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from The battery and the cover of the positive batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with terminal clamp must be fitted securely dur- water and seek medical attention. ing operation. Comply with safety precautions and take pro- H Environmental note tective measures when handling batteries. Batteries contain pollutants. WARNING It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an Fire, naked flames and smoking environmentally responsible are prohibited when handling the recycling system. battery. Avoid creating sparks. Dispose of batteries in an Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- environmentally responsible tact with the skin, eyes or clothing. manner. Take discharged Wear suitable protective clothing, batteries to a qualified spe- in particular gloves, an apron and cialist workshop or to a col- a face mask. lection point for used batteries. Battery (vehicle) 361

Immediately rinse acid splashes i If the power supply has been interrupted, off with clean water. Consult a doc- e.g. if the battery was discharged, you will tor if necessary. have to: Wear eye protection. Rset the clock. Information on setting the clock can be found in the separate operating instructions. Keep children away. On vehicles with COMAND Online and a navigation system, the clock is set automatically. Rreset the function for folding the exterior Observe this Owner's Manual. mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 115).

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have Charging the battery been tested and approved for your vehicle by WARNING Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide G During charging and jump-starting, explosive increased impact protection to prevent vehi- gases can escape from the battery. There is a cle occupants from suffering acid burns risk of an explosion. should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- ventilation while charging and jump-starting. mum possible service life, it must always be Do not lean over a battery. sufficiently charged. Breakdown assistance The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can WARNING discharge over time if you do not use the G Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. vehicle. In such cases, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. You can also charge the battery with a Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. over the battery. Keep children away from For more information, please contact a quali- batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with fied specialist workshop. water and seek medical attention. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short G WARNING trips or if you leave it standing idle for a A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist tures below freezing point. When jump-start- workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases parked up for a long period of time. can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. i When you park the vehicle, remove the Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before key if you do not require any electrical con- charging it or jump-starting. sumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jump- start connection point.

Z 362 Battery (vehicle)

The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 363). X Open the bonnet (Y page 336). X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 363). If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump- start the vehicle. The service life of a battery that has been thawed could be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Never charge a battery still installed in the vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an Breakdown assistance accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Jump-starting 363

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting Breakdown assistance and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter. Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RVehicles with a petrol engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.

Z 364 Jump-starting

RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jump leads are not damaged. Rnon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. Rthe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Firmly depress the parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Open the bonnet. Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump- starting device. Breakdown assistance

X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead. Always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first.

X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes. Towing and tow-starting 365

X First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jump leads. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- Important safety notes cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- WARNING age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC G PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- Safety-relevant functions are restricted or not ing or other similar situations: available if: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rthe engine is not running. Rin the car wash Rthe brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning ! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar to Rthe voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical the towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer system is malfunctioning. tow hitch. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. If your vehicle is towed, significantly greater Breakdown assistance force may be required to steer the vehicle or ! Observe the following points when towing to brake. There is a risk of an accident. with a tow rope: In such circumstances, use a towing bar. Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on Make sure that the steering is moving freely both vehicles. before towing. Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope G WARNING in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow- (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road started is greater than the permissible gross users aware that a vehicle is being weight of your vehicle: towed. Rthe towing eye could detach itself Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could over- eye. turn. Robserve the brake lamps of the towing There is a risk of an accident. vehicle while driving. Always maintain a When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, distance so that the tow rope does not its weight should not be greater than the per- sag. missible gross weight of your vehicle. Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise dam- Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle age the vehicle. weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 404).

Z 366 Towing and tow-starting

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, Fitting/removing the towing eye this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. Fitting the towing eye ! When towing, pull away slowly and G WARNING smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, The exhaust tail pipe may be extremely hot. the vehicles could be damaged. There is a risk of burning when removing the ! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use rear cover. the key instead of the Start/Stop button. Do not touch the exhaust tail pipe. Use The automatic transmission may otherwise extreme caution when removing the rear switch to position P when you open the cover. driver's or front-passenger door which could damage the transmission. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-

Breakdown assistance age, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. Towing eye covers (example: CLS Coupé) The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N i Deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 88). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Deactivate tow-away protection (Y page 75) before the vehicle is towed.

Towing eye covers (AMG vehicles) Towing and tow-starting 367

The mountings for the removable towing eyes Towing the vehicle with both axles on are located in the bumpers. They are at the the ground front and at the rear, under the covers. It is important that you observe the safety X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle instructions when towing away your vehicle tool kit (Y page 353). (Y page 365). Pull cover out of the bumper in the X : The automatic transmission automatically direction of the arrow by inserting your fin- shifts to position P when you open the driver's gers into the recess. or front-passenger door or when you remove X Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the the key from the ignition lock. In order to direction of the arrow. ensure that the automatic transmission stays X Remove cover ; from the opening. in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 0 in the ignition Removing the towing eye lock. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. X X lock. Position the top of cover in the bumper X : On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key and press it in at the bottom until it instead of the Start/Stop button engages. (Y page 157). X Attach cover ; to the bumper and press X Depress and hold the brake pedal. until it engages. X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. tion N. Breakdown assistance X Release the brake pedal. Release the parking brake. Towing the vehicle with the rear axle X raised X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 124). ! The ignition must be switched off if you X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition are towing the vehicle with the rear axle lock. raised. Intervention by ESP® could other- i When towing with the hazard warning wise damage the brake system. lamps switched on, use the combination Only possible on vehicles without switch as usual to signal a change of direc- 4MATIC. tion. In this case, only the turn signals for X Switch on the hazard warning lamps the desired direction flash. When you reset (Y page 124). the combination switch, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. Transporting the vehicle X When leaving the vehicle, take the key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels When towing your vehicle with the rear axle or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle raised, it is important that you observe the such as axle or steering components. Oth- erwise, the vehicle could be damaged. safety instructions (Y page 365).

Z 368 Electrical fuses

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle Tow-starting (emergency engine onto a trailer or transporter for transporting starting) purposes. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be must not be tow-started. The transmission used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or trans- may otherwise be damaged. porter if you wish to transport it. You can find information on "Jump-starting" X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. at (Y page 363). X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. Electrical fuses As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Important safety notes X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. G WARNING X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty tion P. fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident lock. and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new X Secure the vehicle. fuses of the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approved Notes for 4MATIC vehicles for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which

Breakdown assistance ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed have the correct fuse rating for the system with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, concerned. Otherwise, components or sys- the transmission may be damaged. tems could be damaged. If the vehicle has transmission damage or The fuses in your vehicle serve to disconnect damage to the front or rear axle, have it trans- faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- ported on a transporter or trailer. nents on the circuit and their functions will In the event of damage to the electrical fail. system Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of If the battery is defective, the automatic the same rating, which you can recognise by transmission will be locked in position P. To the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings shift the automatic transmission to position are listed in the fuse allocation chart. N, you must provide power to the vehicle's If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the electrical system in the same way as when cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz jump-starting (Y page 363). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter Service Centre. or trailer. Before replacing a fuse

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Switch off all electrical consumers. Electrical fuses 369

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 157). or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 157). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel X Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. RCLS Coupé: fuse box in the boot on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed X To open: take lines ; out of the guides. in the direction of travel X Move lines ; to one side. Route the lines RCLS Shooting Brake: fuse box in the lug- behind connection = to do this. gage compartment on the right-hand side X Open retaining clamps :. of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction X Remove the fuse box cover forwards. of travel X To close: check whether the rubber seal is CLS Coupé: the fuse allocation chart is loca- lying correctly in the cover. ted in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage com- Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box partment under the boot floor ( page 353). X Y into the retainer. CLS Shooting Brake: the fuse allocation Fold down cover and close clamps . chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the X : Breakdown assistance stowage compartment under the luggage X Secure lines ; in the guides. compartment floor (Y page 353). X Close the bonnet.

Fuse box in the engine compartment Fuse box in the boot (CLS Coupé) G WARNING ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen fuse box when the cover is open. wipers are set in motion, you can be injured ! When closing the cover, make sure that it by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture Always switch off the windscreen wipers and seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the ignition before opening the bonnet. the operation of the fuses. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the X Open the boot lid. fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Open the bonnet.

Z 370 Electrical fuses

X To open: release cover : at the top right and left-hand sides with a flat object. X Swing cover : downwards in the direction of the arrow.

Fuse box in the luggage compartment (CLS Shooting Brake) ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture

Breakdown assistance seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

X Open the tailgate.

X To open: turn handle : of the cover anti- clockwise. X Swing the cover down. X Swing trim ; forwards. 371

Useful information ...... 372 Important safety notes ...... 372 Operation ...... 372 Winter operation ...... 374 Tyre pressure ...... 375 Changing a wheel ...... 381 Wheel and tyre combinations ...... 386 Emergency spare wheel ...... 396 Wheels and tyres 372 Operation

Useful information Tyres with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warn- i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- ing notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres els, series and optional equipment for your with run-flat characteristics). vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are pos- Accessories that are not approved for your sible. Note that your vehicle may not be vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not equipped with all of the functions descri- being used correctly can impair the operating bed. This is also the case for systems and safety. functions relevant to safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved i Read the information on qualified special- accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- ist workshops: (Y page 25). shop and enquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Important safety notes Rfactory recommendations Information on the dimensions and types of WARNING G wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, found under "Wheel/tyre combinations" the wheel brakes or suspension components ( page 386). may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Y Information on air pressure for the tyres on dent. your vehicle can be found: Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original Ron the tyre pressure label on the fuel filler part. flap (Y page 176) When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 375) correct: Modification work on the brake system and Wheels and tyres wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel Rdesignation spacers or brake dust shields is not permit- Rtype ted. This invalidates the general operating When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the permit for the vehicle. correct: i Further information on wheels and tyres Rdesignation can be obtained at any qualified specialist Rmanufacturer workshop. Rtype

G WARNING Operation A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steer- Information on driving ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyre pressures when the vehicle is Tyres without run-flat characteristics: heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, Rdo not drive with a flat tyre. noises and unusual handling characteristics, Rimmediately replace the flat tyre with your e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you sus- consult a qualified specialist workshop. pect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon Operation 373 as possible to check the wheels and tyres for other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pres- damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be sure monitoring systems. causing the unusual handling characteristics. Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre and wheels checked at a qualified specialist pressure as necessary (Y page 375). workshop. Observe the notes on the emergency spare When parking your vehicle, make sure that wheel (Y page 396). the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or The service life of tyres depends on various other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over factors, including the following: kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth- Rdriving style erwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, Rtyre pressure may be damaged. Rtyre mileage

Regular checking of wheels and tyres Important safety notes on the tyre tread G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres- G WARNING sure loss. As a result, you could lose control Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre trac- of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. tion. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage water. This means that on wet road surfaces, and replace any damaged tyres immediately. the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving Regularly check the wheels and tyres of your conditions. There is a risk of accident. vehicle for damage at least once a month, as If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres well as after driving off-road or on rough may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of ent locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you Wheels and tyres tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to should regularly check the tread depth and damage such as: the condition of the tread across the entire Rcuts in the tyres width of all tyres. Rpunctures Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rtears in the tyres Rsummer tyres: 3 mm Rbulges on tyres RM+S tyres: 4 mm Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels For safety reasons, replace the tyres before Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the the legally prescribed limit for the minimum condition of the tread across the whole width tyre tread depth is reached.. of the tyre (Y page 373). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres All wheels must have a valve cap to protect ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit and make. anything onto the valve other than the stand- Exception: it is permissible to fit a different ard valve cap or other valve caps approved by type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not fit any Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with

Z 374 Winter operation

run-flat characteristics" section Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" (Y page 355). section (Y page 381). ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for Driving with summer tyres the first 100 km. They only reach their full At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres performance after this distance. lose elasticity and therefore traction and RDo not drive with tyres which have too little braking power. Change the tyres on your vehi- tread depth. This otherwise significantly cle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very reduces the traction on wet roads (aqua- cold temperatures could cause tears to form, planing). thereby damaging the tyres permanently. RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat- Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility est, regardless of wear. for this type of damage. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel ( page 396). Y M+S tyres

G WARNING MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than characteristics) 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat do not provide sufficient traction. There is a characteristics), you can continue to drive risk of accident. your vehicle even if there is a total loss of M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than pressure in one or more tyres. 4 mm must be replaced. Only use MOExtended tyres in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres system or tyre pressure monitoring system or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are Wheels and tyres and only on tyres specifically inspected by identified by the M+S marking. Mercedes-Benz. Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road con- a flat tyre (Y page 355). ditions. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not Only these tyres will allow driving safety sys- equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti- It is therefore recommended that you addi- mally in winter. These tyres have been devel- tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit oped specifically for driving in snow. if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread kit can be obtained from a qualified spe- on all wheels to maintain safe handling char- cialist workshop. acteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have Winter operation fitted. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maxi- General notes mum permissible speed than that of the vehi- Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified cle, affix a corresponding warning label in the specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Tyre pressure 375 driver's field of vision. This can be obtained Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of at a qualified specialist workshop. snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg- Under these circumstances, you should also ulations if you wish to fit snow chains. restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it speed of 50 km/h. does not exceed the maximum permissible Ron vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 192). at raised vehicle level if snow chains have When you have fitted the M+S tyres: been fitted (Y page 203). ® X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 375). i You may wish to deactivate ESP when X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning sys- pulling away with snow chains fitted tem (Y page 377). (Y page 70). This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach- X Restart the tyre pressure monitor ieving an increased driving force (cutting (Y page 380). action). For more information on driving with an emer- For more information on driving with an emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 396). gency spare wheel, see (Y page 396).

Snow chains Tyre pressure WARNING G Tyre pressure specifications If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle G WARNING body or chassis components. This could Tyres with insufficient or excessive tyre pres- cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. sure harbour the following hazards: There is a risk of an accident. Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load To avoid hazardous situations:

and vehicle speed increase. Wheels and tyres R never fit snow chains on the front wheels Rthe tyres may wear excessively or unevenly Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. which can severely impair tyre traction. Rthe handling as well as steering and braking For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- characteristics may be severely affected. mends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle There is a risk of an accident. by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corre- Observe the recommended tyre pressures sponding standard of quality. and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear including the spare wheel: the following points in mind: Revery day before starting a journey Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel- Rwhen the load changes tyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre Rprior to long journey combinations (Y page 386). Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off- Ronly use snow chains when the road sur- road driving face is completely snow-covered. Remove If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered.

Z 376 Tyre pressure

label apply for all tyres approved for this vehi- G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre cle. valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tyre valve.

G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre following tyre pressure information is only pressure that is too low may result in a tyre valid for that tyre size. blow-out. There is a risk of accident. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. does not permit any reliable conclusion about R Check whether the wheel is losing air or the the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the valve is leaking. electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- pressure can be checked using the on-board tact a qualified specialist workshop. computer. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when H Environmental note the tyres are cold. Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least The tyres are cold: every 14 days.

Wheels and tyres Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres You will find a table of tyre pressures for var- out of direct sunlight for at least three ious operating conditions on the inside of hours and your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Rif the vehicle has not been driven further Operation with an emergency spare than 1.6 km wheel(Y page 396). Depending on the ambient temperature, the Operation with a trailer: the applicable speed at which you are driving and the load value for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus pressure value stated in the table inside the the tyre pressure changes by approximately fuel filler flap. 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this The table inside the fuel filler flap may state into account when checking the pressure of tyre pressures for different load conditions. warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if These are defined in the table as different it is too low for the current operating condi- numbers of passengers and amounts of lug- tions. gage. The actual number of seats may vary; for more information, please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure information Tyre pressure 377

Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or Important safety notes too low can: The tyre pressure warning system does not Rshorten the service life of the tyres warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Rcause increased tyre damage Observe the notes on the recommended tyre Rhave a negative effect on handling charac- pressure (Y page 375). teristics and thus the driving safety (e.g. The tyre pressure loss warning does not aquaplaning) replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressures. An even loss of pressure on sev- i The tyre pressure values given for low eral tyres at the same time cannot be detec- loads are minimum values which offer you ted by the tyre pressure loss warning system. good ride comfort characteristics. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn However, you can also use the values given you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the for higher loads. These are permissible and tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the will not adversely affect the running of the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle. vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid For speeds up to 210 km/h (does not abrupt steering manoeuvres. apply to AMG vehicles): for speeds up to The function of the tyre pressure loss warning 210 km/h, the values given on the tyre pres- system is limited or delayed if: sure information label (fuel filler flap) may be reduced by 20 kPa (0.2 bar/3 psi) without a Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's reduction in safety. tyres. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Tyre pressure loss warning system Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high General notes rates of acceleration).

While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres- Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the Wheels and tyres sure loss warning system monitors the set vehicle or on the roof). tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn- significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed ing system of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system message will appear in the multifunction dis- if you have: play. Rchanged the tyre pressure You can recognise the tyre pressure loss Rchanged the wheels or tyres warning by the Run Flat Indicator Rfitted new wheels or tyres active Restart with OK message which appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunc- X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre tion display. Further information on the mes- pressures are set properly on all four tyres sage display can be found under "Restarting for the respective operating conditions. the tyre pressure loss warning system" sec- The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the table on the fuel filler flap. tion (Y page 377). The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect

Z 378 Tyre pressure

tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values Tyre pressure monitor will be monitored. General notes X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 375). If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that the ignition lock (Y page 157). monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if Press the 9 or : button on the steer- X the corresponding sensors are fitted to all ing wheel to select the Tyre pressure wheels. menu. Information on tyre pressures is shown in the X Press the a button. multifunction display. After a few minutes of The Run Flat Indicator active driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre Restart with OK message appears in the is shown in the Service menu of the multi- multifunction display. function display. For further information on If you wish to confirm the restart: displaying this message, refer to the "Check- ing the tyre pressure electronically" section Press the a button. X ( page 379). The Tyre press. now OK? message Y appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. Example: current tyre pressure display Wheels and tyres After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set Important safety notes tyre pressures of all four tyres. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre If you wish to cancel the restart: pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation X Press the % button. ( page 375). Note that the correct tyre pres- or Y sure for the current operating situation must X When the Tyre press. now OK? message first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. appears, press the 9 or : button to If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the select Cancel. warning threshold for the warning message is X Press the a button. aligned to the reference values taught-in. The tyre pressure values stored at the last Restart the tyre pressure monitor after restart will continue to be monitored. adjusting to the cold tyre pressure (Y page 380). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. This will ensure that a warning message will only appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe Tyre pressure 379 the notes on the recommended tyre pressure Checking the tyre pressure electroni- (Y page 375). cally The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn X Make sure that the key is in position you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the 2( page 157) in the ignition lock. tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the Y Press the = or ; button on the steer- event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the X vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. sudden steering movements X Press the 9 or : button to select The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warn- Tyre pressure. ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat- X Press the a button. ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending The current tyre pressure for each wheel on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up, will be displayed in the multifunction dis- a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunc- play. tion in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated: If the vehicle was parked for longer than Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be tyre pressure on one or more tyres is sig- displayed after a few minutes of nificantly too low. The tyre pressure moni- driving message is shown. tor is not malfunctioning. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a monitor automatically recognises new minute and then remains lit constantly, the wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning. allocation of the tyre pressure values to the If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning, individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre it may take more than ten minutes for the tyre pressure monitor active display mes- pressure warning lamp to inform you of the sage is shown instead of the tyre pressure malfunction by flashing for approximately one display. The tyre pressures are already being minute and then remaining lit. When the fault monitored. has been rectified, the tyre pressure warning i If an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the Wheels and tyres lamp goes out after you have driven for a few system may continue to show the tyre pres- minutes. sure of the wheel that has been removed The tyre pressure values indicated by the on- for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that board computer may differ from those meas- the value displayed for the position where ured at a filling station using a pressure the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the on- the current tyre pressure of the emergency board computer refer to those measured at spare wheel. sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are Warning messages of the tyre pressure higher than those shown by the on-board monitor computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pres- The operation of the tyre pressure monitor sure loss in one or more tyres, a warning mes- can be affected by interference from radio sage is shown in the multifunction display and transmitting equipment (e.g. radio head- the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning light phones, two-way radios) that may be being comes on. operated in or near the vehicle. RIf the Please correct tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre

Z 380 Tyre pressure

is too low and must be corrected at the next X Press the a button. opportunity. The multifunction display shows the cur- RIf the Check tyre(s) message appears in rent tyre pressure for each tyre or the the multifunction display, the tyre pressure Tyre pressures will be displayed in one or more tyres has dropped signifi- after a few minutes of driving mes- cantly and the tyres must be checked. sage. RIf the Tyre malfunction appears in the X Press the : button. multifunction display, the tyre pressure in The multifunction display shows the Use one or more tyres has dropped suddenly current pressure values as new ref‐ and the tyres must be checked. erence values message. Observe the instructions and safety notes in If you wish to confirm the restart: the display messages in the "Tyres" section X Press the a button. (Y page 285). The Tyre press. monitor restarted i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are message appears in the multifunction dis- interchanged, the tyre pressures may be play. displayed for the wrong positions for a After you have driven for a few minutes, the short time. This is rectified after a few system checks whether the current tyre minutes of driving and the tyre pressures pressures are within the specified range. are displayed for the correct positions. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor If you wish to cancel the restart: When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and X Press the % button. the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses The tyre pressure values stored at the last the currently set tyre pressures as the refer- restart will continue to be monitored. ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the Wheels and tyres tyre pressure monitor will automatically Radio type approval for the tyre pres- detect the new reference values after you sure monitor have changed the tyre pressure. However, In certain countries, a radio type approval for you can also define reference values man- the tyre pressure monitor may be required. ually as described here. The tyre pressure The radio type approval number for the tyre monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure pressure monitor can be found online at: values. http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler betriebsanleitung. flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set Missing values were not available at the time correctly in all four tyres for the current of going to print. operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on Country Radio type approval number tyre pressures (Y page 375). Brazil 1489-10-4415 X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Dubai TRA, Registered NO 0016161/08 X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. TRA, Registered NO ER0076990/11 X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. Changing a wheel 381

Country Radio type approval number Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage Morocco MR6706 ANRT 2011/ the electronic components. 17 November 2011 Only have tyres changed at a qualified spe- MR5526 ANRT 2010/ 27 April cialist workshop. 2010 Interchanging the front and rear wheels of Philip- ESD-1105558C differing dimensions can render the general pines operating permit invalid. Observe the instructions and safety notes in Singa- Compliance with IDA Standard the "Fitting a wheel" section ( page 382). pore N0140-09 Y The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres South TA-2008/1068 differ, depending on the operating conditions. Africa TA-2011/1370 Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the Changing a wheel rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and Flat tyre rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels You can find information on what to do in the every 5000km to 10,000 km depending on event of a flat tyre under "Breakdown assis- the degree of tyre wear. Maintain the direction of tyre rotation. tance" (Y page 354). Information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and tyre can be found under "Breakdown assis- the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel tance" (Y page 355). is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, Vehicles with an emergency spare if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss wheel: in the event of a flat tyre, the emer- warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. gency spare wheel is fitted according to the Wheels and tyres description under "Fitting a wheel" Direction of rotation (Y page 382). Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk Interchanging the wheels of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is WARNING G observed. Interchanging the front and rear wheels may An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates severely impair the driving characteristics if its correct direction of rotation. the wheels or tyres have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci- Storing wheels dent. Interchange front and rear wheels only if the Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel.

Z 382 Changing a wheel

Cleaning the wheels information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, G WARNING consult a qualified specialist workshop. The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind- Necessary wheel-changing tools can ers) can cause damage not visible from the include, for example: outside to tyres or chassis components. Com- Rjack ponents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Rwheel chock Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu- Rwheel wrench lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced Securing the vehicle against rolling immediately. away

Fitting a wheel Preparing the vehicle

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the parking brake. X Bring the front wheels into the straight- ahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit "normal" level is selected ( page 203). Y (Y page 353). X Switch off the engine. The folding wheel chock is an additional Wheels and tyres X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove securing measure to prevent the vehicle from the key from the ignition lock. rolling away, for example when changing a X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the wheel. driver's door. X Fold both plates upwards :. The on-board electronics now have status X Fold out lower plate ;. 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 157). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle (Y page 353). X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. i Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with tyre- changing tools. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more Changing a wheel 383

The following must be observed when raising the vehicle: Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle- specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for per- Securing the vehicle on level ground (example: CLS forming maintenance work under the vehi- Coupé) cle. R X On level ground: place chocks or other avoid changing the wheel on uphill and suitable items under the front and rear of downhill slopes. the wheel that is diagonally opposite the Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from wheel you wish to change. rolling away by applying the parking brake and positioning wheel chocks. Never release the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the

jack will not be able to achieve its load- Wheels and tyres Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients bearing capacity due to the restricted (example: CLS Coupé) height. X On light downhill gradients: place Rmake sure that the distance between the chocks or other suitable items in front of underside of the tyres and the ground does the wheels of the front and rear axle. not exceed 3 cm. Rnever place your hands or feet under the Raising the vehicle raised vehicle. Rnever lie under the raised vehicle. G WARNING Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is If you do not position the jack correctly at the raised. appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. Rnever open or close a door or the boot lid/ There is a risk of injury. tailgate when the vehicle is raised. Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- Rmake sure that no persons are present in ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.

Z 384 Changing a wheel

X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on Example the wheel you wish to change by about one X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi- full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com- tioned vertically under the jacking point. pletely. X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank ? until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground.

Removing a wheel ! AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and get a Jacking points (example: CLS Coupé) second person to assist you. Alternatively, Wheels and tyres you can use a second centring pin. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened.

X Position jack = at jacking point ;. Changing a wheel 385

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw centring pin : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel

G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged Attaching a wheel (example: vehicle with emer- wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel gency spare wheel) bolts to come loose. As a result, you could X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of surfaces. accident. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event centring pin and push it on. of damage to the threads, contact a qualified X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- specialist workshop immediately. Have the ger-tight. damaged wheel bolts or hub threads Unscrew the centring pin. replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. X X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- tight. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip spare wheel: inflate the collapsible emer- over. There is a risk of injury. gency spare wheel (Y page 398). Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts Only then lower the vehicle.

when the vehicle is on the ground. Wheels and tyres Lowering the vehicle Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notices in "Changing a wheel" G WARNING (Y page 381). The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts Only use wheel bolts that have been designed and bolts are not tightened to the specified for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you Have the tightening torque immediately only use wheel bolts which have been checked at a qualified specialist workshop approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the after a wheel is changed. respective wheel. ! Vehicles with a collapsible emergency ! AMG vehicle with ceramic brake spare wheel: Inflate the collapsible emer- discs: during removal and repositioning of gency spare wheel using the tyre inflation the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the compressor before lowering the vehicle. ceramic-brake disc and damage it. There- The rim could otherwise be damaged. fore, take precautions and have a second person assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin.

Z 386 Wheel and tyre combinations

These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been Tightening the wheel bolts (example: vehicle with specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. emergency spare wheel) Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tes- X Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer- until the vehicle is once again standing tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle firmly on the ground. noise emissions or fuel consumption, may X Place the jack to one side. otherwise be adversely affected. In addi- X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- tion, when driving with a load, tyre dimen- wise pattern in the sequence indicated sion variations could cause the tyres to (: to A). The specified tightening torque come into contact with the bodywork and is 130 Nm. axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. X Turn the jack back to its initial position. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the boot again. damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tes- Check the air pressure of the newly fitted X ted and approved. wheel and adjust accordingly. Further information about wheels, tyres

Wheels and tyres Observe the recommended tyre pressure and approved combinations can be ( page 375). Y obtained from any qualified specialist i Vehicles with a tyre pressure control sys- workshop. tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor with functioning sensors. recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Wheel and tyre combinations Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle General notes safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- about their previous usage. ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by ! Large wheels: the lower the section width Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi- for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride cle. comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. Wheel and tyre combinations 387

Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables: RBA: both axles RFA: front axle RRA: rear axle You will find a table with recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 375). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tyres i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be mounted at the factory in all countries.

Z 388 Wheel and tyre combinations

Tyres CLS 250 CDI

Summer tyres R 17

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL1, 2 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 30 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended1, 2, 3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 30 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y4 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended3, 4 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48

All-weather tyres R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48

1 Not for CLS Shooting Brake. 2 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package (code 950). 3 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 5 Observe notes on "large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". Wheel and tyre combinations 389

Winter tyres R 17

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

CLS 350

Summer tyres R 17

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

R 18 Wheels and tyres Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 285/35 R18 97 Y4 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended3, 4 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48

2 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package (code 950). 3 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Z 390 Wheel and tyre combinations

R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48

All-weather tyres R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48

Winter tyres R 17

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 Wheels and tyres BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

CLS 350 CDI

Summer tyres R 17

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

5 Observe notes on "large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 2 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package (code 950). 3 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. Wheel and tyre combinations 391

R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 285/35 R18 97 Y4 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended3, 4 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48

R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48

All-weather tyres R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48

Winter tyres Wheels and tyres R 17

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

3 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 5 Observe notes on "large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 2 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package (code 950).

Z 392 Wheel and tyre combinations

CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC

Summer tyres R 17

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

R 18

R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 Wheels and tyres RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48

All-weather tyres R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48

Winter tyres R 17

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5

R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

CLS 500

Summer tyres R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 4 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 285/35 R18 97 Y Wheels and tyres FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended3, 4 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48

R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48

Z 394 Wheel and tyre combinations

All-weather tyres R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48

Winter tyres R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

CLS 500 4MATIC

Summer tyres R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 4 Wheels and tyres FA: 285/35 R18 97 Y RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended3, 4 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48

R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48

4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 5 Observe notes on "large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 3 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. Wheel and tyre combinations 395

All-weather tyres R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 BA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48

Winter tyres R 18

Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5

CLS 63 AMG

Summer tyres R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 ZR 19 (96 Y) XL5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 285/30 ZR 19 (98 Y) XL4, 5 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47

Winter tyres

R 19 Wheels and tyres

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si4, 5 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47

Z 396 Emergency spare wheel

CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tyres R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 ZR 19 (96 Y) XL5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 285/30 ZR 19 (98 Y) XL4, 5 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47

Winter tyres R 19

Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si4, 5 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47

Emergency spare wheel qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre Important safety notes type are correct. WARNING G When using an emergency spare wheel or The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type spare wheel of a different size, you must not Wheels and tyres of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fit- Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency ting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel spare wheels. may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. To prevent hazardous situations: General notes RAdapt your driving style accordingly and You should regularly check the pressure of all drive carefully. your tyres, including the emergency spare RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emer- wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and cor- gency spare wheel if the dimesions are dif- rect the pressure as necessary (Y page 375). ferent to those of the wheel being replaced. The applicable value is found on the wheel or R Only use a spare wheel/emergency spare under "Technical data" (Y page 400). wheel briefly if the dimesions are different An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted to those of the wheel being replaced. against the direction of rotation. Observe the RDo not switch off ESP®. time restriction on use as well as the speed RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel in question replaced at the nearest wheel.

5 Observe notes on "large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". Emergency spare wheel 397

Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, X Swing the luggage compartment floor regardless of wear. This also applies to the upwards (Y page 318). emergency spare wheel. X Remove stowage compartment :. i When you are driving with the collapsible emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre Removing the "Minispare" emergency pressure loss warning system or the tyre spare wheel pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system/tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emer- Stowage space (example: CLS Coupé) gency spare wheel. X Open the stowage well (Y page 397). X Turn stowage tray ; anti-clockwise and Removing the "Minispare" emer- remove together with vehicle tool kit gency spare wheel/collapsible emer- tray :. gency spare wheel X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel =. Opening the stowage well the emergency spare wheel can CLS Coupé: Removing the collapsible emergency Wheels and tyres be found in the stowage well under the boot spare wheel (AMG vehicles) floor.

X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 317).

Stowage space (example: CLS Coupé)

X Open the stowage well (Y page 397). Stowage space under the luggage compartment Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and floor (example: CLS Shooting Brake) X lift it up. CLS Shooting Brake: the emergency spare Remove collapsible emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under X wheel ;. the luggage compartment floor.

Z 398 Emergency spare wheel

Observe the instructions and safety notes in The tyre inflation compressor can be oper- the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 382). ated again once it has cooled down.

Stowing a used collapsible emergency spare wheel ! Only place the collapsible emergency spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle. Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible emergency spare wheel. It will not otherwise fit into the spare wheel well. Mount the collapsible emergency spare Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have X wheel as described ( page 381). this work performed at a qualified specialist Y workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service The collapsible emergency spare wheel Centre. must be mounted before it is inflated. X Pull connector ? and the air hose out of X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. the housing. X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release X Remove the cap from the valve on the col- the air. lapsible emergency spare wheel. i Fully deflating the tyre may take a few X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the minutes. valve. Make sure on/off switch A of the tyre Screw the valve insert back into the valve. X X inflation compressor is set to 0. X Screw the valve cap back on. X Insert connector ? into the cigarette Wheels and tyres Remove the protective film from the vehicle X lighter socket or into a 12 V socket in your tool kit and put it over the collapsible emer- vehicle. gency spare wheel. Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter Stow the collapsible emergency spare X ( page 323). Observe the notes on sock- wheel in the emergency spare wheel well Y ets ( page 324). under the boot. Y X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). Inflating the collapsible emergency X Press on/off switch A on the tyre inflation spare wheel compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched ! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is wheel using the tyre inflation compressor shown on pressure gauge =. before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. X Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- The specified tyre pressure is printed on pressor for longer than eight minutes at a the yellow label of the emergency spare time without a break. It may otherwise wheel. overheat. Emergency spare wheel 399

X When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A on the electric air pump to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release button ; until the correct tyre pressure has been reached. X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from the valve. X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible emergency spare wheel valve again. X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower section of the blower housing. X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle. Wheels and tyres

Z 400 Emergency spare wheel

Technical data All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel Tyres Light-alloy wheel T 155/70 R17 110 M6, 7 4.0 B x 17 H2 ET 346, 7 Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) T 155/60 R18 107 M 4.5 B x 18 H2 ET 36 Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

AMG vehicles

Collapsible emergency spare wheel Tyres Light-alloy wheels 175/50- 19 97 P 6.5 B x 19 H2 ET 14 Tyre pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi) Wheels and tyres

6 Not in conjunction with Sports package code 950. 7 Not for CLS 500 and CLS 500 4MATIC. 401

Useful information ...... 402 Information on technical data ...... 402 Vehicle electronics ...... 402 Identification plates ...... 404 Service products and capacities ..... 405 Vehicle data ...... 413 Trailer tow hitch ...... 415 Technical data 402 Vehicle electronics

Useful information Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for your G WARNING vehicle that were available at the time of If RF transmitters are tampered with or not going to press. National variations are pos- properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radi- sible. Note that your vehicle may not be ation they emit can interfere with the vehicle equipped with all of the functions descri- electronics. This may jeopardise the opera- bed. This is also the case for systems and tional safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of functions relevant to safety. an accident. You should have all work on electrical and i Read the information on qualified special- electronic components carried out at a quali- ist workshops: ( page 25). Y fied specialist workshop.

WARNING Information on technical data G If you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle in You can find current technical data on the an improper way, its electromagnetic radia- Internet at: tion can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if: http://www.mercedes-benz.com Rthe RF transmitter is not connected to an exterior aerial i The technical data was determined in accordance with EC Directives. All data Rthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is applies to the vehicle's standard equip- not a low-reflection aerial ment. The data may therefore differ for This can jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicles with optional equipment. You can vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. obtain further information from a Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. a qualified specialist workshop. When operating in the vehicle, always connect the RF transmitter to the low-reflection exterior aer- Vehicle electronics ial. Technical data Tampering with the engine electron- ! The operating permit may be invalidated ics if the instructions for installation and use of ! Only have work carried out on the engine RF transmitters are not observed. electronics and its associated parts, such In particular, the following conditions must as control units, sensors and connector be complied with: leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Vehicle components may otherwise wear Robserve the maximum permissible out- more quickly and the vehicle's operating put in these wavebands. permit may be invalidated. Ronly approved aerial positions may be used. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discus- Vehicle electronics 403 sion surrounding the possible health risk equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio fre- posed by electromagnetic fields. quency) transmitters. Comply with the legal Observe the notes on operating mobile requirements for add-on parts. phones (Y page 325). If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio The following aerial positions may be used for equipment, use the power supply or aerial the correct installation of RF transmitters: connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values:

Waveband Maximum transmission CLS Coupé: approved aerial positions output : Front roof area Short wave 100 W ; Rear roof area 3 - 54 MHz = Rear wing 4 m waveband 30 W ? Boot lid 74 - 78 MHz 2 m waveband 50 W 144 - 174 MHz Trunked radio/Tetra 10 W 380 - 460 MHz

70 cm waveband 35 W Technical data 400 - 460 MHz GSM/DCS/PCS 10 W 850/900/1800/1900 CLS Shooting Brake: approved aerial positions : Rear roof area UMTS/LTE 10 W ; Rear wing The following can be used in the vehicle with- i When fitting an aerial on the front roof out restrictions: area of vehicles with a sliding sunroof, observe the sweeping range of the roof. RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis- On the rear wing, it is recommended that sion output of up to 100 mW you position the aerial on the side of the Rmobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/ vehicle closest to the centre of the road. LTE) Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fitting aftermarket radio frequency transmitting

Z 404 Identification plates

There are no restrictions when positioning the B Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the fol- C Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) lowing wavebands: D Paint code RTrunked radio/Tetra R70 cm waveband RGSM/DCS/PCS RUMTS/LTE

Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)

Vehicle identification plate (example: CLS Shoot- ing Brake) : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) = EU type approval number (only for certain countries) ? VIN A Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg) B Maximum permissible mass of vehicle/ X Open the front right-hand door. trailer combination (kg) You will see vehicle identification plate :. C Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) D Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) E Paint code Technical data i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate.

Vehicle identification plate (example: CLS Coupé) : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) = EU type approval number (only for certain countries) ? VIN A Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg) Service products and capacities 405

VIN Service products include the following: Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Rclimate control system refrigerant When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations. Components and service products must be X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear- matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends that most position. you use products tested and approved by X Fold floor covering : upwards. Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this You will see VIN ;. Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. The VIN can also be found on the vehicle You can identify service products approved identification plate ( page 404). Y by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- tions on the container: Engine number RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R The engine number is stamped onto the MB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) crankcase. You can obtain further informa- Other designations or recommendations indi- tion from any qualified specialist workshop. cate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been Service products and capacities approved by Mercedes-Benz. Further information can be obtained from any

Important safety notes Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Technical data Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Fuel Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and dis- Important safety notes posing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed original con- G WARNING tainer. Always keep service products out of Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel the reach of children. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. H Environmental note You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating Dispose of service products in an environ- sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine mentally-responsible manner. and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling.

Z 406 Service products and capacities

G WARNING Model Of which Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. reserve fuel There is a danger of injury. Models with 59.0 l total Approx. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact capacity 8.0 l with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil- Models with 80.0 l total Approx. dren. capacity 9.0 l If you or others come into contact with fuel, (except AMG vehicles) observe the following: All models (AMG vehicles) Approx. RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin 14.0 l with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- Petrol (EN 228, E DIN 51626-1) oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. Fuel grade RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi- ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a cal attention. Do not induce vomiting. petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition RChange any clothing that has come into if you accidentally refuel with the wrong contact with fuel immediately. fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel Tank capacity could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel depending on the vehicle equipment. lines drained completely. Model Total capa- ! Only refuel using unleaded petrol with at city least 95 RON/85 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or E DIN CLS 250 CDI 59.0 l 51626-1 or an equivalent specification. or Fuel with this specification may contain up Technical data 80.0 l to 10 % ethanol. All other models (except 80.0 l ! Only refuel using premium-grade unlea- AMG vehicles) ded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/85 MOZ, that conforms to European standard All other models (AMG 66.0 l EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equivalent vehicles) or specification. 80.0 l Fuel of this specification can contain up to 10 % ethanol. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear and damage the engine and exhaust system. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) Service products and capacities 407

RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) fuel consumption. As much as possible, RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol) avoid driving at full throttle. RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) ! Regular unleaded petrol with an octane RM100 (100% methanol) rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also be RPetrol with additives containing metal used as a temporary measure if the recommended fuel is not available. RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi- consumption, and the engine power output tives. This can otherwise lead to engine is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full damage. This does not include cleaning throttle. additives for the removal and prevention of If only regular unleaded petrol with an residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON or with additives recommended by Mercedes- lower is available, you must have the vehi- Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain fur- cle adapted to this fuel at a qualified spe- ther information from any Mercedes-Benz cialist workshop. Service Centre. i E10 fuel contains up to 10 % bioethanol. Usually you will find information about the Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 label on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta- fuel. tion staff. CLS 350 i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. ! Only refuel using premium-grade sulphur- Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 free unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/ fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 85 MON that conforms to European stand- fuel. ard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. i As a temporary measure, if the recom- You could otherwise impair engine output mended fuel is not available, you may also or damage the emission control system. use unleaded petrol with an octane rating i In some countries, the available petrol

of 91 RON/82 MON. This may reduce Technical data may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This engine performance and increase fuel con- fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant sumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. odours, especially on short journeys. As Information on refuelling (Y page 176). soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours AMG vehicles are reduced. ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON/88 MON that con- Additives forms to European standard EN 228 or an ! Operating the engine with fuel additives equivalent specification. added later can lead to engine failure. Do You can otherwise impair engine output or not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does damage the engine. not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must ! Premium-grade unleaded petrol with an only be mixed with additives recommended octane rating of 95 RON/85 MON may be by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instruc- used as a temporary measure if the recom- tions for use in the product description. mended fuel is not available. This may More information about recommended reduce engine performance and increase

Z 408 Service products and capacities

additives can be obtained from any ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: in Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. countries outside the EU, only refuel with Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur con- fuel brands that have additives. tent under 50 ppm; otherwise the emission control system could be damaged. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This causes unnecessary costs and could lead to ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- engine failure. ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with In areas where petrol with the required addi- a high sulphur content is available, you will tives is not available, carbon deposits can need to carry out your vehicle's oil change build up. In this case, Mercedes-Benz recom- at shorter intervals. More information mends the use of additives that have been about the interval for oil change can be approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles; see obtained from any qualified specialist http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. workshop. Usually you will find information about the Diesel (EN 590) fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta- Fuel grade tion staff.

G WARNING Information on refuelling (Y page 176). If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of Low outside temperatures pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved components in the exhaust system may over- cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. EN 590 standard defines various climate- Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to dependent temperature categories. Malfunc- diesel fuel. tions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifi- ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that cations outlined in EN 590. At unusually low conforms to the European standard EN 590 outside temperatures, it is possible that the or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be Technical data not conform to EN 590 can lead to insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from increased wear as well as damage to the warmer areas may not be suitable for opera- engine and exhaust system. tion in colder climatic conditions. ! Do not use the following: i Further information on country-specific fuel properties and fuel types with low-tem- R marine diesel perature resistance can be obtained from Rheating oil oil companies, e.g. at filling stations. Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Fuel consumption information Rpetrol H Environmental note Rparaffin CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien- R kerosene tists believe to be principally responsible for Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your do not use any special additives. This can vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to otherwise lead to engine damage. fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Service products and capacities 409

Refficient use of the fuel by the engine AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the Rdriving style exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road conditions or Rnon-toxic traffic flow Rcolourless and odourless

You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis- Rnon-flammable sions by driving carefully and having it serv- If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts iced regularly. of ammonia vapour may be released. The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and the following situations: are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may Rat very low outside temperatures experience a burning sensation in your eyes, Rin urban traffic nose and throat. You may also experience Ron short journeys coughing and watery eyes. Rin mountainous terrain Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may ® Rwhen towing a trailer be released. Only fill the AdBlue tank in well- ventilated areas. i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emission val- Low outside temperatures ues of your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approx- documents are delivered with your vehicle. imately -11 †. The vehicle is delivered from The consumption figures were in each case the factory equipped with an AdBlue® pre- based on the currently applicable version: heating system. Winter operation can thus be Rfor vehicles that comply with standards guaranteed even at temperatures below up to and including the EURO 4 standard, -11 †. in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC Additives

Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed ! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO Technical data the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with 22241. Do not use additives with AdBlue® Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 and do not dilute AdBlue® with water. This Deviations from these values may occur may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after- under normal operating conditions. treatment system.

Purity AdBlue® ! Impurities in AdBlue® (e.g. due to other Important safety notes service products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to: Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling Rincreased emission values ® AdBlue (Y page 405). Rdamage to the catalytic converter Rengine damage Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC® exhaust gas aftertreatment system

Z 410 Service products and capacities

Assuring the purity of AdBlue® is particularly The table shows which engine oils have been important with respect to avoiding malfunc- approved for your vehicle. tions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat- Petrol engines MB Approval ment system. If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank, CLS 350 229.3, 229.5 e.g. during repair work, do not use this fluid CLS 500 229.5 to refill the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaranteed. CLS 500 4MATIC CLS 63 AMG Capacities CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC

Model Total capacity Diesel engines with MB Approval CLS 350 BlueTEC 24.5 l diesel particle filter CLS 350 BlueTEC All models 228.51, 4MATIC 229.31, 229.51

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils Engine oil for AMG vehicles. General notes i If the engine oils listed in the table are not Comply with the important safety notes for available, you may add the following engine service products when handling engine oil oils until the next oil change: (Y page 405). Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the Approval 229.1, 229.3 or ACEA A3 function and service life of an engine. After Rdiesel engines: MB Approval 229.1, extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 engine oils that correspond to the current Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine technical standard. oils for AMG vehicles. Technical data Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved This must only be added once and the engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz amount must not be greater than 1.0 l. engines. Further information on tested and approved Capacities engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes- The following values refer to an oil change Benz recommends that you have the oil including the oil filter. change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at: http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. Service products and capacities 411

Model Replacement Brake fluid amount G WARNING CLS 350 6.5 l The brake fluid continuously absorbs mois- CLS 250 CDI ture from the air. This results in the boiling point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling All other models 8.0 l point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour (except AMG vehi- pockets may form when the brakes are sub- cles) jected to a heavy load. This would impair brak- All other models With external oil ing efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. (AMG vehicles) cooler: 8.5 l Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescribed intervals.

Additives Comply with the important safety notes for ! Do not use any additives with the engine service products when handling brake fluid oil. This could damage the engine. (Y page 405). The brake fluid change intervals can be found Engine oil viscosity in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at: http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet.

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics Technical data of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity Coolant rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, the faster it flows. Important safety notes Engine oil selection is based on the respective WARNING outside temperatures and in accordance with G the SAE classification (viscosity). The table If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- shows you which SAE classifications are to be ponents in the engine compartment, it may used. The low-temperature properties of ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. engine oils can be significantly impaired dur- Let the engine cool down before you top up ing operation due to, for example, ageing or the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly strongly recommended to observe regular oil clean the antifreeze from components before changes using an approved engine oil with the starting the engine. appropriate SAE classification. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine.

Z 412 Service products and capacities

Further information on coolants can be The coolant is checked at every maintenance found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications interval at a qualified specialist workshop. for Service Products, MB Specifications for i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil- Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Inter- led with a coolant mixture that ensures net at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec- Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. tion. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Windscreen washer system and head- Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not lamp cleaning system sufficiently protected from corrosion and Important safety notes overheating. ! The engine cooling system is filled with G WARNING coolant, which must be renewed after Windscreen washer concentrate is highly 15 years or after 250,000 kilometres at the flammable. If it comes into contact with hot latest. engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. (Y page 405). The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or for the following: MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid Ranti-corrosion protection could damage the plastic lenses of the Rantifreeze protection headlamps. Rraising the boiling point ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the the correct concentration, the boiling point of level sensor may be damaged.

Technical data the coolant during operation will be approx- ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and imately 130 †. WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- spraying nozzles could become blocked. tion in the engine cooling system should: Comply with the important safety notes for Rbe at least 50 %. This will protect the engine service products when handling washer fluid cooling system against freezing down to (Y page 405). approximately -37 †. At temperatures above freezing: Rnot exceed 55 % (antifreeze protection down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture dissipated as effectively. of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum- merFit. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor- Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Prod- ucts 310.1. Vehicle data 413

At temperatures below freezing: Dimensions and weights X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter- Fit. Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature. RDown to Ò10 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 2 parts water. RDown to Ò20 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 1 part water. RDown to Ò29 †: mix 2 parts MB WinterFit to 1 part water. CLS Coupé i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB Model Opening height : SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. All models (except 1772 mm - AMG vehicles) 1788 mm CLS 63 AMG 1777 mm Vehicle data CLS 63 AMG 1806 mm General notes 4MATIC Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tyres - load - condition of the suspension Technical data - optional equipment Ritems of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. The unladen weight is specified in CLS Shooting Brake accordance with EC directive and includes: - driver (68 kg) Model Opening height : - luggage (7 kg) All models (except 1971 mm - - all fluids (fuel tank 90 % full) AMG vehicles) 1976 mm Rvehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate All models (AMG 2015 mm vehicles) (Y page 404). Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle.

Z 414 Vehicle data

CLS Coupé CLS 350 BlueTEC Missing values were not available at the time CLS 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC of going to print. Vehicle length 4940 mm All models Vehicle height 1416 mm Vehicle width including 2075 mm Unladen weight exterior mirrors 1881 mm Vehicle width excluding All models (AMG vehicles) exterior mirrors Vehicle length 4996 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Vehicle width including 2075 mm 100 kg Maximum roof load exterior mirrors 100 kg Maximum boot load Vehicle width excluding 1881 mm exterior mirrors CLS 350 Wheelbase 2874 mm Vehicle length 4940 mm Unladen weight Vehicle height 1416 mm Maximum roof load 100 kg Unladen weight 1735 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg

CLS 500 CLS 63 AMG Vehicle length 4956 mm Vehicle height 1406 mm Vehicle height 1404 mm Unladen weight 1890 kg CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC Technical data Vehicle height 1422 mm CLS 500 4MATIC

Vehicle length 4956 mm CLS Shooting Brake Vehicle height 1404 mm Missing values were not available at the time Unladen weight 1940 kg of going to print. All models CLS 250 CDI Vehicle length 4956 mm Vehicle length 4940 mm Vehicle width including 2075 mm Vehicle height 1416 mm exterior mirrors Unladen weight 1785 kg Vehicle width excluding 1881 mm exterior mirrors Wheelbase 2874 mm Trailer tow hitch 415

All models CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC Maximum roof load 100 kg Vehicle length 4956 mm Maximum boot load Vehicle height 1416 mm Unladen weight 1970 kg CLS 350 Vehicle length 4956 mm All models (AMG vehicles) Vehicle height 1416 mm Vehicle length 5000 mm Unladen weight 1830 kg Vehicle width including 2075 mm exterior mirrors CLS 500 Vehicle width excluding 1881 mm exterior mirrors Vehicle length 4960 mm Vehicle height 1438 mm Vehicle height 1421 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Unladen weight 1955 kg Unladen weight CLS 500 4MATIC Maximum roof load 100 kg Vehicle length 4960 mm Vehicle height 1421 mm Trailer tow hitch Unladen weight 2005 kg Mounting dimensions ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, CLS 250 CDI changes to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. Technical data Vehicle length 4956 mm If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, Vehicle height 1416 mm observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame. Unladen weight 1865 kg

CLS 350 CDI Vehicle length 4956 mm Vehicle height 1416 mm Unladen weight 1910 kg

Z 416 Trailer tow hitch

Example: anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch : Anchorage points ; Overhang dimension = Rear axle centre line For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension including protective covering is 1278 mm. Technical data Trailer tow hitch 417

Trailer loads Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)

CLS Shooting Brake (all models) Permissible trailer load, braked CLS 350 2100 kg CLS 500 2100 kg CLS 500 4MATIC 2100 kg CLS 250 CDI 2100 kg CLS 350 CDI 2100 kg CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC 2100 kg

The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.

CLS Shooting Brake (all models) Permissible trailer load, unbraked 750 kg Maximum drawbar noseweight 84 kg

Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer

CLS Shooting Brake (all models)

CLS 350 1400 kg Technical data CLS 500 1425 kg CLS 500 4MATIC 1415 kg CLS 250 CDI 1380 kg CLS 350 CDI 1405 kg CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC 1400 kg

Z 418 419 420 Publication details Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mercedes-benz.com http://www.daimler.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address: Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.

As at 25.07.2012 É2185843581Z102eËÍ 2185843581Z102

Order no. 6515 1503 02 Part no. 218 584 35 81 Z102 Edition ÄJ 2013-0a

Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only